manual eg2003 360 manufacturing

Exact Globe 2003 | Manufacturing

RELEASE 360

Manufacturing

II EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING

The information provided in this manual is intended for internal use only. Exact Group B.V. has carefully selected the content ofthis document. However, the content may not always represent reality or may become out-dated. Information may be changedor updated without notice. Exact Group B.V. may also make improvements and/or changes in the products, prices and/or theprograms described in this manual at any time without notice.

Exact Group B.V. shall not be liable for the accuracy of any of the examples included and procedures described in this document,nor shall Exact be liable for any ensuing damage or loss of any nature whatsoever arising from or relating to its use.

No part of this manual may be reproduced, published and/or transmitted in any form or in any way, electronically, by printphotocopy, microfilm or any other means, without the prior written consent of Exact Group B.V.

© Copyright Exact Group B.V. All rights reserved. All trademarks mentioned herein belong to their respective owners. ExactSoftware® is a registered trademark of Exact Group B.V.

RELEASE 360

EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING III

Preface

Welcome to Exact Globe 2003!

This guide provides the information you need to work effectively with Exact Globe 2003. It is part of the series of user guidesfor Exact Globe 2003. The goal of this documentation is to help you to get quickly acquainted with the product and thepossibilities it offers. It will help all users, even those without much experience with our software, to get started with and benefitfrom the product straightaway.

Exact Globe 2003 is an integrated software solution; its modules of related business processes function together in anintegrated manner. Besides the user guides, there are other information sources related to the software available to you. Youcan access on-line help documents on to the Globe functionality while working with the software by just pressing the F1 key.The list of help document also contains release notes related to the product. They inform you of the improvements andfunctional additions in the various releases of the product. You can also access the help documents, release notes and otherrelated documents online at the Exact Customer Portal on www.exactsoftware.com. The Customer Portal is a protected part ofthe Exact internet site, which has been specially developed to provide you with information and to help you get the maximumyield from your software. The portal informs you about contacts with us, downloads, FAQs, and the latest product news. Weinvite you to use the portal as often as you wish!

We value your comments and feedback. We hope that you will use the reader’s feedback form at the end of this user guide totell us how you appreciate this book. Please take a few minutes to fill in the form and return it to us by (e-)mail.

Thank you for using Exact Software and this user guide!

IV EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING

CONTENTS

EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING V

Chapter 1: The Standard Process Flow in E - Manufacturing

Chapter 2: Setting Up 7

1

Chapter 3: Master Data Configuration1. Maintaining Items

1.1 Creating and Maintaining Items

2. Maintaining Machines

2.1 Creating and Maintaining Machines

2.2 Calculating for Machines

2.3 Selling Machines

2.4 Writting off Machines

2.5 Deleting Machines

3. Maintaining Hours

3.1 Creating and Maintaining Hours

4. Maintaining Extra Charges

4.1 Creating and Maintaining Extra Charges

5. Maintaining Bills of Material (BOM)

5.1 Creating and Maintaining BOM’s

5.2 Deleting BOM’s

5.3 Copying to Create New BOM’s

13

15

22

95

98

124

129

134

136

138

143

188

194

198

205

295

219

222

226

233

234

236

237

238

242

246

249

253

255

258

258

262

269

272

280

280

281

283

284

285

287

287

287

289

291

292

292

VI EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING

6. Maintaining Variant

6.1 Creating nad Maintaining Variant Items

6.1.1 Obtaininng Overview of Recipe Versions

6.1.2 Generating a Bill of Material using Variant

6.1.3 Copying to Create New Variant

6.2 Deleting Existing Variant Item

6.3 Adding Items to Existing Variant

6.4 Replacing an Item in an Existing Variant

7. Maintaining Scenarios

7.1 Creating nad Maintaining Scenario’s

7.2 Deleting Scenario’s

7.3 Copying to Create New Scenario

8. Relate Common Functionalities

8.1 Deleting Standard Item/ Hour Item/ Extra Charges Item

8.2 Copying to Create New Item

8.3 Recoding Items, Machines, Hours, Extra Charges

8.4 Batch Update

9. Routing and Operations

9.1 Prior Setting - Enable System Setting for Routing and Operations

9.2 Work center Settings

9.2.1 Duplicating a Work Center

9.2.2 Deleting a Work Center

9.2.3 Opening a Work Center

9.2.4 Creating a New Work Center

9.2.5 Closing a Work Center

9.3 Operations

9.3.1 Deleting Operations

9.3.2 Opening Operations

9.3.3 Creating New Operations

9.3.4 Closing Operations Screen

CONTENTS

EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING VII

Chapter 4: Entries and Processes1. Production Order Entry

1.1 Copying a Production order to generate a New one

1.2 Deleting Production Order

1.3 Creating New or Opening existing Production Order

1.3.1 Production Order Source Requirements

1.3.2 Inter Branch Transfers

1.3.3 Purchasing for a Production Order

1.3.4 Outsourcing Production Work

1.3.5 Sub Orders

1.3.6 Generating Sub Orders

293

295

296

298

301

301

302

304

306

307

308

309

309

312

313

316

316

319

319

327

330

332

348

352

356

361

371

375

9.4 Routing Master Setting

9.4.1 Copy Creating New Routing Setup

9.4.2 Deleting a Routing Setup

9.4.3 Opening Existing Routing Setup

9.4.4 Creating a New Routing Setup

9.4.5 Closing and Existing Routing Setup

9.5 Bill of Material (BOM)

9.6 Production Order Entry

9.7 Overview/Reports

9.7.1 Production Order Report

9.7.2 Actuals Report

9.7.3 BOM Report

10. Reason Code

10.1 Deleting Reasone Code

10.2 Opening Reason Code Master Card

10.3 Creating New Reason Code

10.4 Closing Reason Code Functionality

VIII EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING

1.3.7 Split Large Volume Production Orders

1.3.8 Scrap in Production Orders

1.3.9 Exploding Sub - Assembly Items

2. Production Order Authorization

2.1 Authorization Production Order

2.2 Rejecting Production Orders

3. Releasing Production Orders

3.1 Sorting Sequence for Production Order Release

3.2 Releasing Production Orders

4. Printing Production Order Intructions

4.1 Printing Labels

5. Issuing Production Orders

5.1 Entering New Issue of Materials

5.2 Production Order Issue and Printing Picking List

6. Production Order Receipts

6.1 Production Receipts

7. Engineering Change

7.1 Approving the Bill of Material Change

7.2 Rejecting the Bill of Material Change

7.3 Editing Engineering Change

8. Related Common Functionalities

8.1 Inserting Notes

8.2 Attaching Documents

378

383

389

390

398

401

405

411

413

416

427

431

438

443

451

457

464

469

470

472

475

475

478

EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING IX

Chapter5: Manufacturing Planning1. Planning Master Production Schedule (MPS)

1.1 Prior Setting - Creating New & Retrieving Existing Budget Scenario

1.2 Planning Master Production Schedule

1.3 Entering Master Production Schedule in Microsoft Excel

2. Master Planning

2.1 Zooming in for Master Planning Overview of the Parent Project

2.1.1 Creating / Entering Activities

2.1.2 Entering Task Planning of Projects

2.1.3 Inserting a New Child Project in Master Planning Overview

2.1.4 Changing Planning Details

2.1.5 Linking Child Projects to Parents

2.2 Completing Projects

3. Resource Planning

3.1 Planning Resource Labor Hours

3.2 Entering Tasks

3.3 Generating Sales Orders from Resource Planning

3.4 Exporting Resource Planning Data to MS-Excel

3.5 Deleting Resource Planning

3.6 Entering Realization of Hours for Resource Planning

4. Machine Planning

4.1 Allocation of Machine Capacity to Requirements

4.2 Deleting or Undoing Machine Planning

485

487

487

490

497

506

510

523

534

537

540

544

547

553

560

562

564

566

569

570

575

587

591

CONTENTS

X EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING

5. MRP (Material Requirement Planning) Overview

5.1 Detailed Overview of Material Requirements

5.2 Where Used information upon MRP Overview

5.3 Item Cards

5.4 Inter branch Transfers from Production Order Entry

5.5 Purchasing based on MRP Overview

5.6 Retrieving Order from MRP Overview

5.7 Changing Delivery Dates from MRP Overview

5.8 Exporting Information from MRP Overview

6. MRP Engine for Real Time High Performance Overview of Results

7. Replace Part Items of Bill of Material

Chapter6: Extended Scenarios1. Production Advice

1.1 Producing based on Stock Positions or MRP

2. Generate Purchase Orders

3. Calculations

3.1 Batch Update Costing Calculations by Scenario

3.2 Calculation by Standard Costing

3.2.1 Generating Production orders upon Calculating Standard Costing

4. Dispatch List

5. Completing Production orders

6. Project Cards

593

619

629

632

637

642

646

651

654

661

671

681

682

690

693

701

706

714

719

720

723

731

EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING XI

749

749

749

761

762

763

764

765

766

767

781

782

785

786

787

788

797

798

799

808

809

815

821

828

829

836

837

Chapter7: Reports and Statistics1. Reports

1.1 Production Orders

1.1.1 Expanding Production orders Overview

1.1.2 Exporting Overview Information to MS-Excel Spreadsheet

1.1.3 Zoom in Production order for Detailed Overview

1.1.4 Obtaining view of Production order Note

1.1.5 Obtaining view of Production order Attachment

1.1.6 Obtaining Overview of Production order Financial Transactions

1.2 Actuals

1.2.1 Exporting Results to MS-Excel spreadsheet

1.2.2 Zoom in for detailed overview of production order actuals

1.2.3 Obtaining view of Note in the Production order

1.2.4 Obtaining View of Document Attached in the Production order

1.2.5 Obtaining the Financial Transaction Entries Overview of Production order

1.3 Allocation

1.3.1 Exporting results to MS-Excel spreadsheet


1.4 Pegging

1.4.4 Obtaining Pegging Overview results in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet

1.5 BOM

1.6 Where Used

1.7 Production Capability


1.8 Gross Requirements


1.9 Exception Codes

CONTENTS

EXACT GLOBE 2003 - MANUFACTURING

849

849

857

858

865

866

867

877

2. Statistics

2.1 Rejected

2.1.1 Exporting Results to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet

2.2 Waste

2.2.1 Exporting Overview Results to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet

2.2.2 Obtaining Financial Transaction Entries Overview

2.3 Production Orders

Feedback form

XII

The standard process flow in E-Manufacturing

CHAPTER 1

2 CHAPTER 1 | STANDARD PROCESS IN E-MANUFACTURING

CHAPTER 1

CHAPTER 1 | STANDARD PROCESS IN E-MANUFACTURING 3

1. The standard process flow in E-Manufacturing

IntroductionThe manufacturing process in general contains the following elements:


In Exact Globe 2003 E-Manufacturing the following steps are part of the production order process. There are also interferencesof manufacturing planning steps prior and during processing of production orders.

Process elements Descriptions

Ordered Step of entering a production order. A production order is created by entering theend product's Bill Of Material (BOM) item in the header which is then expandedwith its structure of required items. This step is shown checked when aproduction order is entered completely. The date of when the production orderwas entered is displayed.

Authorized Step for checks and validation of the entered production order.

ReleasedStep of ensuring availability of resources, raw material, machines and relevantcapacity before an order can be processed.

Printed Step of Printing the ordered production order's itemized instructions.

IssuedStep of issuing raw materials and parts required for production as quoted in theBOM in the production order.

Received Step of receiving finished products at the warehouse.

Completed Step of setting the production order status to completed.

CHAPTER 1

CHAPTER 1 | STANDARD PROCESS IN E-MANUFACTURING 5

Production planning

Planning Elements Description

Master PProduction SSchedule Initial step of planning production schedule

Master PPlanning Enhanced planning for complex production projects

Resource PPlanning Planning of resources for production requirements

Machine PPlanning Planning of machines for production requirements

Materials RRequirement PPlanning Planning of materials for production requirements

Setting up

CHAPTER 2

8 CHAPTER 2 | SETTING UP

CHAPTER 2

CHAPTER 2 | SETTING UP 9

Introduction

System Settings are important and must be defined accordingly with relevant information that complies within the company’sinternal business processes and that complies with external government legislation. Basic master information is setup anddefined accordingly for each module of Exact Globe 2003. Prior specifications of system settings are mandatory and must bedefined first.

Every company performs business with its own flow of processes and systems in compliance with its internal policies andprocedures. The way business processes are performed must also comply with external parties such as customers, suppliersand the relevant government authority and its legislation. Therefore, prior to using Exact Globe 2003 E-Manufacturing, settingsmust be configured accordingly.

2. Setting up


2.1 Manufacturing settings

System settings for manufacturing can be adjusted at menu path [System, General, Settings] – Manufacturing settings displaysthe following screen:

CHAPTER 2

11CHAPTER 2 | SETTING UP

Authorizing is the process where checks and validation in the details of a production order are performed.

Production order - This setting determines whether or not production orders need to be authorized. Checking this optionsignifies that compulsory authorization of the production order is required. Unchecking this option would not requireauthorization of production order.

Release: Required - This setting determines whether the production orders need to be “released”. Checking this option meansthat the production orders must be released before further process. Unchecking this option does not require the release step.

Production order - Allows you to determine whether production orders need to be printed. Checking this option allows printinga hardcopy of a Production Order that serves as an instruction document. Unchecking this option does not require printing ofproduction order.

Use multiple layouts - Enabling this option allows you to use multiple layouts when printing production orders.

Back Flush - Back Flush is a process where components/parts of an end item are automatically realized at the moment aproduction order is received. This reflects the inventory of items and hours realization that are automatically realized ordeducted. This eliminates the step of manual realization and stock checks.

Items - Enabling this option determines whether items are to be automatically realized/back flushed when an end product isreceived.

Labor Hours - Enabling this option determines whether labor hours are to be automatically realized / back flushed when an endproduct is received.

Machine Hours - Enabling this option determines whether machine hours are to be automatically realized / back flushed whenan end product is received.

Planning Resource - Default hour item to be used when Resource planning is performed.


Allocate on - Enabling this option, automatically allocates available material based on priority. This is applicable to productionorders entered manually for make-to-stock or make-to-engineer scenario. There are three possible options of material allocationto manually entered production orders:

• None - Selecting this option does not enable automatic material allocation. Material allocation is not applicable. Authorized - Material is automatically allocated based on the Production Order Authorization priority. Released - Material is automatically allocated based on the priority upon Production order Release.

• Use routing and operations - Checking this enables the routing and operations menu for organizations that requires bettercontrol production operations within the Bill of Material throughout work centers. The routing and operations can be executed via [Manufacturing, Setup, Routings and operations]

• Receipts: Recalculate APP - Enabling this performs the costing of end product based on Average Purchase Price upon completing production order.

Use engineering change management - Enabling this states that the engineering management functionality can be used via[Manufacturing, Entries, Engineering change]

Generate project - Enabling this, a project will be generated as when changes taken place in the BOM. This will be used inconjunction with the engineering change management functionality.

Master Data Configuration

CHAPTER 3

14 CHAPTER 3 | MASTER DATA CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER 3

CHAPTER 3 | MASTER DATA CONFIGURATION 15

Introduction

In the previous Section we discussed the system settings requirements for E-Manufacturing in Exact Globe 2003 EG2003. Now,we look at the "Master Data" required for the E-Manufacturing module. Master Data Definitions and Specifications determinethe basic data required for the planning and production of a product. Manufacturing System Settings are configured to complywith the policies and procedures used by a company to run its business. The Master Data Settings must be configured as "Data"in order to perform the necessary daily data processing activities. Master Data can be Item's Details, Bill of Material (BOM),Recipes, Extra Charges, Hour Items, Variant Items, Scenario, and so on that are used in the daily activities of planning, entering,processing, producing and completing the entire process.

Master Data forms the basic foundation of 'Data' for the Manufacturing processes and planning. The most important MasterData that must be defined is the Bill of Material (BOM) and the Recipe which specifies the elements of required materials;required hours, capacity, and operations that form the entire sequential process of producing an End-Product.

Bill of Material is made up of elements such as the following items (standard parts and raw materials in serials or bulk), laborhours, machine hours, extra charges (phantom items) with conditions and sequential operations. These elements must bedefined prior to structuring the Bill of Material (BOM). The following sections discuss the EG2003 functionality of how and where these various master data can be defined:

1. Maintaining items

Introduction

Standard Items are used in many applied applications that are integrated. For example Item: KEYBOARD would be used in aPurchase application if it is being bought from a supplier, or in a Production application if it is being assembled/produced,and/or used in the Sales Order application when it is sold, and also used in the Sales Invoice application for quoting invoicesto the customer. The Item would also be used in the Internal Use application when it is requested internally, or in the ServiceManagement application when it requires maintenance services, or would be used in the Customer Relations Managementapplication when customers are using the Item. The Item must contain accurate and up-to-date information that can bemaintained in the Item Master Data Maintenance Card.

3. Master Data Configuration


Where UUsed: [Manufacturing, SSetup, IItems] or [Order, IItems, MMaintain] or [Purchase, IItems, MMaintain] or [Invoice, IItems,Maintain] or [Inventory, IItems, MMaintain] or [Project, IItems, MMaintain] or [POS, IItems, MMaintain].

Following any of the above menu items will display the following Item Master Main Overview screen:

CHAPTER 3


In the Main Overview screen shown above, there are functional buttons, search and filter criteria and Overview Results of Items.These elements are described as follows:

SearchThis option performs search and filter functions based on user-selected search criteria and displays the results in the bottomoverview section.

Clear Clicking on this button resets the user-selected search criteria.

RowsThis field allows the user to key in number of rows to be displayed in the overview section of results. It has a default value of100 rows.

WarehouseThis option provides for the selection of a specific warehouse to obtain records of items that belong to the selected warehouse.By default, All is pre-filled to display the records of items belonging to all warehouses.

Filter• Start With

This option performs a search by characters starting with those entered by the user in the search criteria (Item Code & Description).

• ContainsThis option obtains search results that contain exactly the same characters entered by the user in the search criteria (Item Code & Description).

Item Code To obtain a record of the intended Item, enter the specific Item Code.

Description Enter the Item Description to obtain the intended record of Item.


Filter Options

Clicking on the Filter button extends the search and filter criteria that are described as follows:

Item AssortmentsItem Assortments are automatically displayed as search and filter criteria that allows the user to filter records of Items of aparticular Assortment.

Item Assortments are user defined and can be specified via menu path [System, General, Settings, Item Data Settings]. Theseuser-defined assortments are also displayed in the Extra tab of Item Maintenance Card, as shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 3


Item Status Dropdown List

Active "Active" can be selected in the status dropdown list to view item purchases that are active. Active items can be sold, purchased,delivered, received, and manufactured/assembled.

Blocked "Blocked" can be selected to view item purchases that are blocked. Blocked items cannot be used in any logistics planning andfinancial transactions, but can be used in product structure line, budget line and stock counts.

Discontinued "Discontinued" can be selected to view item purchases that are discontinued. Discontinued items cannot be used in purchasesbut can be used for sales. It also can be used in product structure line, budget line and stock counts.

FutureItem status "future" states that the item is to be used in the future, whereby the active date is defined as some future date.

Inactive "Inactive" can be selected to view item purchases that are inactive. Inactive items cannot be used in logistics planning andfinancial transactions. They also cannot be used in product structure lines, budget lines but can be used in stock counts.

Item AttributesThe Item attributes determine precisely when and how a particular item may be used. The following attributes are describedbelow.

SalesThe Sales attribute determines that the item can be used in the sales process (i.e. quotations, sales orders, sales invoices andPOS).

StockThis attribute determines whether or not quantities received and fulfilled are to be viewed for the item involved. Items can beseen as Stock or Costs. In both cases, the quantities can be retrieved. Items that are viewed as costs, but do not represent aphysical item, can now be excluded. All standard items are booked on a 'Purchase general ledger account' of any sub type atthe moment of receipt and are posted from this same general ledger account at fulfillment into a 'Fulfillment general ledgeraccount'.


Make This attribute indicates the presence of a Product structure (Bill of Materials) for this item, which can be used during theassembly, manufacturing or delivery process. Only items with structures can be produced.

BuyThis identifies items that can be purchased from a supplier. Only items that have one or more suppliers linked will have thisattribute marked. Both make and purchase attributes can be attached to the same item at the same time, thereby allowing adecision to be taken on a case-by-case basis whether to manufacture or purchase the item.

PartThis indicates that the Item is used as a part in a Product structure.

Batch This identifies the item as a batch item. Batch numbers are unique numbers linked to a group of items (= a batch of >=1 salesunits). Batch numbers can have a receipt date and a use date and, if applicable, a shelf life. A batch can be (temporarily)blocked. It is possible to link notes and electronic documents to a batch number, as well as item specific characteristics. Anitem cannot be both a serial item and a batch item.

SerialThis identifies the item as a serial item. Serial items are always used with the quantity 1 (one), as they are unique and un-divisible. A serial item can have serial numbers linked to it that can have an activation date and an end date, and can be(temporarily) blocked. It is possible to link notes and electronic documents to a serial number, as well as item specificcharacteristics. An item cannot be both a serial item and a batch item.

Service This identifies the item as a Service item. Service items are used in Services Management. Service items can be used for servicecontracts and maintenance services and service calls.

CHAPTER 3


Overview results and actions

Based on the user's selection on the Search & Filter criteria, the results are displayed. Actions can be performed on the existingrecords of Items. Actions such as Batch updates updates a selected range of Items' Information, Recode renames an Item Code,Copy, Delete an Item Record, Open, Retrieval of an Item's Maintenance Card or even create a New Item.

For information on each of these functional buttons shown above, refer to the table below:

Functional buttons Descriptions

Batch UpdatesThis enables the user to batch update item information. This is an integrated functionality used forStandard Items and also Extra Charges Item. For information see sub Section 3.8.4 - Batch Update Itemand Extra Charges Item.

Recode This enables the user to Recode Item. For information see Sub Section 3.8.3 - Recoding Item / MachineItem / Hour Item / Extra Charges Item.

CopyThis enables the user to Copy Create New item. For information see Sub Section 3.8.2 - Copy CreatingNew from Existing Item for Standard Item / Hour Item / Extra.

DeleteThis enables the user to Delete obsolete items. For information see Sub Section 3.8.1 DeletingStandard Item / Hour Item / Extra Charges item.

OpenThis enables the user to retrieve the Item Master Card. For information see Sub Section 3.1.1 - CreatingNew or Maintaining Existing Item.

NewThis enables the user to create New item. For information see Sub Section 3.1.1 - Creating New orMaintaining Existing Item.

Close This enables the user to close and exit from the current functionality.


1.1 Creating and maintaining items

At the Item Master Data Maintenance Card functionality, you define the item's information such as its pricing, its attributes,financial ledgers, its supplier's detail, warehouse locations, stock and availability information, its serial/batch identifications,its BOM structures and other related transactions or entries. This functionality consists of 10 interface tab screens whichidentify the kind of information being stored in the item maintenance functionality. This allows for additional information inmany fields.

Creating a New Item or Retrieval of existing Item Maintenance Card displays the same functional interface screen that allowsyou to enter and specify the above stated information within 10 different interface tab screens. The following Section explainswhat information can be found when retrieval of Item Maintenance is done or what is the required information for user's inputwhen creating an Item.

Details

Item Maintenance can be retrieved using the Open button functionality which displays the existing Item MaintenanceCard of the selected Item record.

A New Item can be created by clicking on the New button functionality which displays New Item Maintenance Card forusers input.

For either Creating a New Item or Retrieving existing Item, refer to the following example of Item Maintenance screen :

CHAPTER 3


Item's General Information

Header Fields

Item codeThis is an alphanumeric field. It is a Mandatory field that must be entered when defining items. This is the code that identifiesan item; the product used for purchase, sales, manufacturing, service management, CRM , et cetera.

DescriptionFree text field for description of an item being defined. This is a mandatory field which is required when you define an item. Thiscan be the full name of the item, in addition to its code, and gives it a meaningful label .

Search codeThis is an alphanumeric field of code which is optional. This is the short code used for searching an item. This value is pre-filledautomatically with value same as the item code, but you may change this with preferred search code.

Type

Drop down list box for selecting value of type of item.


• Type: StandardStandard type states that the item is a standard item that represents physical goods or service. Standard items can be purchased, sold or used for service depending on their defined attributes.

• Type: Bulk issueBulk issue type states that the item is used in product structures and its costs influences the costs of the main item in structure. Bulk issue items can only be used in the manufacturing process.

Status

Drop down list box for selection of the item's status. The Status of an item states what can and cannot be performed , whereascertain item statuses such as inactive, do not allow for financial transactions or logistics planning but can be used in stockcounts. The following are the Item Statuses:

• Active An item with active status can be sold, purchased, manufactured, received and delivered.

• Blocked An item with blocked status cannot be used for all standard transactions, but can be used in product structure lines, budgetlines or correction counts.

• Discontinued An item with discontinued status is only used for sales transactions, stock counts, as well as in product structure linesand budget lines, but cannot be a purchase transaction.

CHAPTER 3


• Inactive An item with inactive status cannot have financial transactions, or logistics planning such as sales and purchase. It can beused for stock counts.

• Future An item with future status can be used only for linking with e-Synergy system.

From & to dateThis is a date field with a lookup button that indicates an item's activated date of its status. For instance, an item's status isactive from 10th Jan 2002 till 10th Jan 2003. The Date field is from when the item is active and the To field is until when is theitem active. This field is only for reporting. The user is required to change an item's status if an item becomes inactive after thedefined period.

Item's Detailed InformationThe following Section consists of hyperlinks to information explaining the 10 different tab screens. Click on the respective tabscreen subject for relevant information:

Basics tab - Contains an Item's Basic Information such as Pricing, Basic Item Attributes, Item Assortments, Pictures, andDescriptions.


By clicking on the New functional button or the Open functional button, the Item Master Maintenance Card is displayed,showing the initial Basics tab screen, as shown in the example below:

The fields maintained in the basics tab screen for the user's input of standard basic information are described as follows:

General Information

Sales UnitThis is a character field with lookup button for selection of units of measure of the defined item based for sales. Unit can be inpieces, meters, days, kilograms, etc. It is a mandatory field, therefore an item must have a unit of measure. Units of measurecan be defined at menu path [System, Logistics, Units].

Sales Price Enter the Standard Sales Price of the Item. This is a decimal field for entry of price of defined item when it is being sold. Whensales orders are quoted with this item, they will display this price in the price field column of the item. There is an optionalfield for the cases where the item is not a sales item.

CHAPTER 3


Sales VAT Code Select the VAT percentage Code if the Item is applicable for Value Added Tax. Value added tax (VAT) code can be selected fromthe lookup button of this field. VAT can be inclusive or exclusive of the sales price. The defined value of the code is automaticallypre-filled in the sales order entry when the item is ordered. This is a mandatory field where taxable items must be assignedaccording to their tax codes. When an item is not taxed then you may define the tax code as zero percentage. VAT can be definedat menu path [System, General, Countries, Tax codes].

Cost Price Enter the Standard Cost Price of the Item being defined. This is a decimal field and is optional. When an item has its cost value,then its actual costs can be entered here. This value is used for the calculation of profit margins.

Markup / MarginThis is displayed as Markup or Margin setting (depending on the configured system) in Order settings via menu path [System,General, Settings, Order settings].This field is not editable. This is automatically calculated based on the formula for eithermarkup or margin.

Purchase Price This field is not editable, but is displayed per user defined Purchase Price in the Purchase/Sales tab screen.

Picture


A picture of the item can be inserted, allowing a quick look at the item . The folder icon next to the picture text is clicked, anda file browse screen is displayed for selection of an appropriate picture file. The open button is then clicked for completingthe attachment. To remove the picture, you may click on the delete icon.

Extra Description

An extra description for the item can be inserted via the extra description icon where a screen is displayed as shown above and

the insert icon is clicked to add a new extra description as shown above . The entered description can be saved by clicking onthe Save button and close to return to the previous screen.

CHAPTER 3


AssortmentsThe assortments filed group and categorize an item based on specific criteria. These Assortment criteria must be user-definedvia menu path [System, General, Settings, Item Data Settings] which is shown in the example below:

Basic Attributes

• TextItems that require variable additional text next to the item description or a predefined text which exceeds the item description can be marked with the attribute Text. Activating the text attribute will allow the text to appear on quotations, orders or invoices. The text can be modified during entry on a case-by-case basis. When selecting the attribute "text" the attribute "sales" is mandatory.

• DivisibleThis setting allows entry of the quantity of this item in decimals.


Text

Enter the text description in the provided text box.

Description Enter the short descriptions in the Description field. Description fields for foreign languages are provided when the DescriptionsList boxes in foreign languages are enabled via menu path [System, General, Settings, General Settings], as shown in theexample below:

Purchase / Sales tab — Allows viewing and linking Suppliers of the Item. This tab screen contains Integration with the E-PriceManagement for Sales Price and Purchase Price. This allows configuring Purchases Attributes and Sales Attributes.

CHAPTER 3


Clicking on the Purchase/ Sales tab of the Item Master Maintenance Card, system displays the Purchases/ Sales tab as shownin the example below:

There are a few Attributes fields related to the Purchase and Sales processes. These Attributes are described as follows:

Attributes: Sales

SalesThe Sales attribute determines that the item can be used in the sales process (i.e. quotations, sales orders, sales invoices andPOS)


No DiscountThis attribute allows you to enable or prevent sales pricelists to be entered for this item and enables/prevents a discount onthe item while entering a sales transaction.

Explode: FulfillmentIf the item has the Make attribute set, the explode at fulfillment attribute presents the components registered in the Bill ofMaterials of the item instead of the item itself at fulfillment. Also this attribute activates the possibility to add conditions to thefulfillment of the item. Instead of having each assembled item on stock, the individual parts are gathered or assembled at themoment of fulfillment. The individual parts and delivery conditions for the item can be registered in the Bill of Materials.

Service This indicates whether the item can be used in Service Management and determines if the item can be selectable in the ServiceCall.

From StockChecking From Stock indicates that the Item is NOT Back Order Item. This will not allow generating Sub-Orders for an existingProduction Order. Uncheck this to indicate that the item is Back Order Item and allow generating Sub-Orders for the Item fromthe existing Production Order. Enabling this does not allow user to quote order quantity more than the available quantity in theSales Order application.

Attributes: Purchase

BuyThis identifies items that can be purchased from a supplier. Only items that have one or more suppliers linked will have thisattribute marked. Both make and purchase attributes can be marked to the same item at the same time, thereby enabling todecide on a case-by-case basis whether to manufacture or purchase the item. This feature can only be used with an approved Supplier.Enabling this checkbox indicates that the Supplier linked must beapproved. This enables the Approved Supplier checkbox in the Supplier Linkage screen, which is discussed later in thisdocument.

CHAPTER 3


Functional Icons for Sales Item

Sales Prices

This icon allows for defining sales prices . This is an integration of Price Lists Management. Clicking on this icon displays thefollowing Price list management screen:

Reference date Select reference date of the defined sales price list.

Show • Default unit

Select Default unit to obtain a sales price list that is based on default unit.


• Sales unitSelect Sales unit to obtain a sales price list that is based on the sales unit.

CurrencySelect the Currency Code to obtain sales price list in the selected currency code. It is possible to activate the relevant currencycodes that are used/transacted in the business; then this drop down list shows all activated currency codes.

Sales price list details

Price managementThis displays the sales price list.

Type This displays the Type of price list. The following type is shown:

S- Standard sales price list.P- Price list.A- Price agreement

StuksThis displays the price. The price is derived from the defined sales price at the Basics tab of Item Master Maintenance Card.

DiscountThis displays the discount percentage. This is calculated based on the following formula:

100 - Price per Package * 100--------------------------------------

Default Item Sales price * Unit Factor

CHAPTER 3


Replacement Item

Replacement items can be linked to the defined item by clicking on the item structure icon as shown below:

When the insert icon, located at the top left corner in the Replacement items section is clicked, an item can be selected as thereplacement item by giving it a priority number.


Item The Item code is pre-filled here. This field is not editable.

Replacement item Select the replacement item here by clicking on the lookup icon.

PriorityEnter the Priority number here.

Click on the OK button to save the replacement item specification. Otherwise cancel the selection made by clicking on theCancel button.

Where used items can also be linked by clicking on the insert icon located at the bottom in Where used section. In this way,the relevant parent item can be linked to the retrieved or the newly defined item, as shown below:

After specification of the parent item click on OK button. Otherwise, to cancel or undo selection, click on the Cancel button.

CHAPTER 3


Variant

Variant can be structured by clicking on the variant icon where a relation condition selection screen is displayed as shownbelow:


Select the appropriate relation type and click on Select button. Selecting a relation type displays the Variant Creation screen asshown below:

This allows structuring additional accessories to an item that allows the user to select or deselect additionalaccessories/complimentary items when making entries to a request or activity. For instance, in the sales order functionality,quoting an item with variant items triggers the selection of additional/complementary items based on the defined variantstructure and conditions.

CHAPTER 3


Inserting Parts Items to the Relation Type Group

At this point, the user may want to add the Part items that are of Mandatory Relation Type. To do this, select the Mandatory group

(column) and click on the add icon, which then displays the following screen:-

Parts Item can also be inserted by clicking on the palm icon at the Relation Type group (row), which then displays the aboveItem lookup screen. Select the part item and click on the Select button. This then automatically inserts the selected part itemto the parent item under the Mandatory group.


Inserting New Relation Type Group

To add new Relation Type Group to the Parent item, select the Parent item and click on the Add icon, which then displaysthe Relation Types screen. The steps involved are the same as the ones described above. Next repeat the steps in inserting partitems to the newly created Relation type group.

To structure the entire complete variant to your specifications, repeat the steps described above to insert new relation typesand to insert part items to the inserted relation types.

See the diagram below the completed variant for the parent item - PC Set 001 :-

CHAPTER 3


Screen DetailsIn the Variant Creation screen, there are important details shown that are useful, not only when structuring a variant item, butalso when detailed information of the parts items relations are known prior to selecting the parent item in a request such asa Sales order. These fields of details are described as follows:-

Item Code The Parent Item Code and description is displayed at the header section.

Item This column displays the Parent Item code. This can be collapsed and expanded using the plus or minus sign (+/-) at the lefthand side of this field.

Group This column displays the Parts Item's Relation Type Group. This can be collapsed or expanded using the plus or minus sign (+/-) at the left hand side of this field.

Item Code This column displays the Part Item's Code. One Relation Type Group can have many Parts Items, and these are displayed in thiscolumn. Collapsing the Relation Type group also collapses the parts items.

Description This column displays the Part Item's Description.

QuantityThis column displays the default Quantity of the Part Item. Enter the appropriate Quantity that associates with the relation typecondition to the parent item.

Sales UnitThis column displays the Part Item's Sales Unit.

Sales Price This column displays the Part Item's Sales Price per quantity.


Sales AAmount This column displays the total amount per Part item by accumulated quantity. (Sales Amount = Sales Price * Quantity)

Functional icon for Purchase items

Purchase Prices

The Purchase prices functional icon allows defining price agreements for purchases per supplier. This is an integration with thePrice Lists Management.

Clicking on this icon displays the following price list management screen:

CHAPTER 3


The details of the above shown Purchase Price list management screen are as follows:

Reference date Select the relevant reference date to obtain the defined purchase price list.

Show Select from drop down list to obtain the purchase price list by the selected unit of measure:

• Default unitSelect this to view purchase price list by default unit.

• Sales unitSelect this to view purchase price list by sales unit.

Price managementThis displays the Purchase price list

Type This displays the types of defined Purchase price list. The following are the types:

S — Standard purchase price list.P — Price list.A — Price agreement

= 1 [Unit of measure] This displays the price amount based on the equivalent to 1 default unit of measure.

DiscThis displays the Discount percentage.

Stock = 1 StockThis displays the price amount based on the converted unit of measure as defined in the Item master card.


DiscThis displays the Discount percentage.

100 - Price per Package * 100-----------------------------------Item Cost Price * Unit Factor

Suppliers LLinkage ooverview ppanel

SupplierCreditor's account number and name.

Main supplier When this is checked, it indicates that it is the main supplier out of many suppliers of the defined item.

Approved supplier When this is checked, it indicates whether the selected supplier was approved by the management. Purchase from a supplierwho was not approved may not be possible

CHAPTER 3


Currency codeCurrency used by the supplier for the defined item. Purchases from the selected supplier would be in the defined currency.

Price This is the Supplier's price of the defined item per unit.

Purchase unitThis is the Unit of measure of the item when it is being purchased from the selected supplier.

PO sizeThe quantity of purchase order per the purchase order entry linked to the supplier. This would be the default value pre-filled inthe purchase order entry when the linked supplier is selected for the defined item.

Purchase Price (piece) Purchase price per piece as per entered in the Price field which will be the default value in the purchase order entry linked tothe supplier for the item.

VATValue added tax for the supplier for the defined item, that will be pre-filled in the purchase order entry linked to the supplier forthe item.

Supplier's item code Item's code defined as at supplier site. This code can be different from the defined item code.

Delivery Time This is the Number of days taken to receive the item after the purchase order entry.


Functional Icon for Supplier Linkage

Linking Supplier to the Item & Making entry / changes to the Purchases details

— Insert icon, to insert link of supplier to the defined item.

Clicking on the Insert icon shown above displays the following screen:

CHAPTER 3


Item Code Item code is pre-filled and it is dimmed, based on the created/retrieved Item Maintenance Card.

Supplier Select the Supplier (Account Payable/Creditor Account) by clicking on the lookup button. This is a mandatory field, an importantfield where the Supplier is linked to the Item.

Supplier's Item Code This field defaults to the user defined Item Code. This field must be changed according to the code used by the Supplier if adifference exists.

Bar Code If the Item has a specific Bar Code supplied by the Supplier, then enter the Bar Code characters here, otherwise this field canbe left blank.

Warranty periodEnter number of days for warranty of the Item.

Supplier's Purchases Details

Purchase unitSelect the Purchase Unit used in purchasing from the linked supplier. Example of Purchase Units can be "Box", "Piece", "Kg","Liter", etc. A correct Purchase Unit must be specified for accurate calculations to proceed on logistics transactions.

Conversion UnitThis defaults to value "1" which means purchased in 1 piece and sold in 1 piece. It is important to specify the correctConversion Unit when Purchase Unit and Sales Unit differ. For example: a box of chocolates is purchased which is then sold inpieces. The box contains 1 dozen pieces (12 pieces), therefore it is important that the conversion value to be entered with value"12" with Purchase Unit as "Box" and Sales Unit as "pieces", for accurate logistics calculations.


CurrencySelect the Currency used in Purchasing from the linked supplier. When no specific currency is selected, the default currency isused as specified in the Basics tab screen.

Price Enter the Purchase Price offered by the linked Supplier.

VAT Select appropriate Value Added Tax Code if the purchases from the linked supplier are subject to tax..

PO size Enter the default Quantity of Item when purchases are made to the linked supplier.

Time of DeliveryEnter the required Purchases Lead Time when purchases are made from the linked supplier.

After keying in all the details, click on the Save button . To close the screen, click on the Close button . To continue

linking more suppliers, click on the New button .

— To amend the linked information of an item by supplier, click on the Edit icon.

To make changes to the Purchase Details of already linked Supplier, click on the Edit icon shown above.

CHAPTER 3


Selecting a linked supplier record and clicking on the Edit icon displays the Items by Supplier screen as shown below:

The fields are the same as described above. User can make changes to the required fields of details. Click the Save button

to save the changes made and to close the screen click the Close .


Deleting the Supplier Link from the Item

— Delete icon, to delete the supplier link to the item.

To Delete the Supplier Link to an Item, select the already linked supplier record as displayed in the Suppliers tab screen, andclick on the Delete icon as shown above. This will prompt the following message :

Click on the Yes button to continue deletion. Otherwise click on the No button to cancel deletion.

Making specific Supplier the Main Supplier Status

— To select a supplier from the list as the main supplier of the defined item.

To make the linked Supplier the Main Supplier of the Item, select the already linked supplier record displayed in the Supplierstab and click on the above shown icon. Clicking on this "Main" icon automatically marks the selected supplier record as theMain Supplier. The Main Supplier is indicated with a green tick in the Suppliers tab screen, as shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 3


Accessing Supplier's Financial Information

— To retrieve the creditor's financial card.

To make the linked Supplier the Main Supplier of the Item, select the already linked supplier record displayed in the Supplierstab and click on the above shown icon. Clicking on this "finacial card" icon automatically retrieves the selected supplier 'sfinancial card as shown below:


Financial tab — This tab allows Linking of Financial ledgers, Item Groups, configuring INTRASTAT criteria and Asset Attributes.

Clicking on the Financial tab displays the Finance tab screen as shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 3


Financial fields, INTRASTAT criteria fields and Attribute fields maintained in this screen are described as follows:

Financial

Item Group The Item group, which is the classification for items defined, can be selected from the field lookup button where the item grouplookup screen is displayed.

Revenue Sales revenue G/L account, which is a Profit & Loss account, can be selected where it is automatically credited when sales aremade on the defined item.

StockStock G/L account can be selected where it is automatically credited when sales are made on this item and it is debitedautomatically when purchases are made on this item.

Cost of Goods Sold Cost of Sales G/L account can be linked where it is automatically debited when there are sales made on this item

Asset AccountAn Item may be linked to Assets, therefore it is important that the appropriate Asset G/L account is linked, so that every logisticstransaction that is an asset, such as purchasing an item, is then recorded in the linked Asset G/L account.

Attribute

AssetWhen the item has asset related transactions the item gets marked as an asset item.

Enter INTRASTAT dataIntrastat data is required when a country's legislation controls the shipping of items across borders of countries.

Statistical nr This field is not editable. This field indicates the class/category of the product being shipped across borders.


Net weightThis is an Editable field that requires input by the user. Enter the weight of the item based on the measurement unit used forthe item.

Statistical unitsThis is the quantity of items being shipped across bordersNote: The above fields may not be the same, as it differs from country to country based on each country's legislation.

Activity tab — Provides overview of all logistics and distribution transactions with filter options for intended results.

Clicking on the Activity tab displays the Activity tab screen as shown in the example below:-

CHAPTER 3


Following is the information on the Activity tab screen:

Transactions

Type Select the type of logistics order you intend to view from the drop down list.

Status• Open

Selecting this displays only logistics orders that are of Status Open.

• AllSelecting this displays all logistics orders regardless of Status.

Date: From & To Select a specific range of dates to obtain logistics orders that were entered within this selected range of dates.

Warehouse This button allows selecting one or many Warehouses, to obtain logistics orders belonging to the selected orders.

Refresh Clicking on this button displays logistics orders based on the user selected values in the filter criteria described above.

Receipts overview panel

Warehouse Select specific Warehouse from the drop down list to obtain the overview records of Receipts transactions that belong to thespecific Warehouse.


Inventory tab — Allows viewing and linking Warehouse and defining Stock level per Warehouse and Locations per Warehouse.This tab contains Inventory Attributes.

There is information on warehouses linked to Item displayed. These fields of information are as follows:

Attributes: Inventory tab

Batch This identifies the item as a batch item. Batch numbers are unique numbers linked to a group of items (= a batch of >=1 salesunits). Batch numbers can have a receipt date and a use date and, if applicable, a shelf life. A batch can be (temporarily)blocked. It is possible to link notes and electronic documents to a batch number as well as item specific characteristics. An itemcan not be both a serial item and a batch item.

CHAPTER 3


SerialThis identifies the item as a serial item. Serial items are always used with the quantity 1 (one) as they are unique andnotdivisible. A serial item can have linked serial numbers , can have an activation date and an end date and can be(temporarily) blocked. It is possible to link notes and electronic documents to a serial number as well as item specificcharacteristics. An item can not be both a serial item and a batch item.

Stock Controlled Checking this indicates that the Item is Make to Stock. Unchecking this indicates that the Item is Make to Order. Stock Controlleditems are produced to meet inventory levels in the warehouse, where they are kept in stock. Enabling this option also enablesthe "From Stock" field in the 'Purchases/Sales' tab screen of Item Master Card. Checking this also enables the "Order PolicyCode" field in the 'Manufacturing' tab screen of Item Master Card; for further information See - Item Maintenance -Manufacturing tab.

Shelf life Enter number of days for the shelf life at which the item can be stored.

Warranty pperiod ddays Enter number of days for warranty of the items stored in the warehouse.

Total Stock on Hand This field is not editable. Total Quantity of Stock is automatically displayed here by accumulation of stocks from all linkedwarehouses.


Bar codesBar codes can be defined for the item by clicking on this button. This can also be defined via the System settings at menu path[System, Logistics, Bar codes]. Clicking on the Bar code button displays the following screen:

Either clicking on the New button via the system settings menu path or clicking on the Insert icon located in the above screen,will display the Bar Code Maintenance screen as shown below:

There are 3 specific Bar code types implemented in the EG2003

CHAPTER 3


Warehouses overview panel

Warehouse The linked Warehouse code and name is displayed.

Date last counted Date of when the inventory count was last made.

StockThis is the Total quantity in stock.

To be received This is the Total quantity to be received into the warehouse, e.g. purchase orders yet to be received in the warehouse.

To be delivered This is the Total quantity to be delivered from the warehouse, e.g. sales orders yet to be fulfilled from the warehouse.

Available This is the Total available quantity based on quantity to be received and to be delivered.

Quantity Purchase This is the Total Quantity of Items being purchased .

Quantity Allocated SalesThis is the Total Quantity of Items already Allocated to Sales orders demand.

Quantity Manufacturing This is the Total Quantity of Items being manufactured .

Quantity Allocated Manufacturing The total Quantity of Items already Allocated to Production orders demand is displayed here.


Free StockThe total Quantity of Items that are free from allocation and available in stock is displayed here.

Sales UnitThe Item's sales based measure . It can be piece, kg, km, liter, etc.

PO levelThe default Item Quantity for Purchase order is displayed here.

Maximum This is the Maximum stock quantity that can be accommodated in the warehouse.

Delivery time This is the amount of time that it takes to be received from and into the warehouse for fulfillment of receipts.

Warehouse location This displays the location of the warehouse linked to the Item

Main warehouse Check box to indicate whether it is the main warehouse of a list of warehouses.

CHAPTER 3


Functional Icon for Warehouses Linkage

Linking & Making entry/Changes of Warehouse to an Item

— Insert icon, to insert the link of warehouse to the defined item.

Clicking on the Insert icon shown above displays the following screen :


Enter the details of Stock in the Warehouse being linked. The details required for input are as follows:

Item Enter the Item Code. Item Description is pre-filled based on the defined Item code in the Item Master Maintenance screen.

Warehouse Select the Warehouse that you wish to link to the Item.

Default: LocationSelect the default location of the selected Warehouse being linked to the Item.

Stock Details

Minimum PO levelEnter the minimum quantity per purchase order for the Warehouse.

Maximum Enter the Maximum quantity of an item that can be stored in the Warehouse.

StockThis indicates current stock value, which is the current quantity of items stored in the warehouse being linked. This field is noteditable; values are pre-filled by automatic calculation of current stock quantity.

Date last counted Displays the date when stock count was last performed.

Counting cycle This is the number of days taken to perform the stock count cycle of the Item.

CHAPTER 3


Orders Policy Code This field is enabled for selection when the "Stock Controlled" attribute is checked in the 'Inventory' tab screen of Item MasterCard. The Order Policy Code states how the Produce Quantity/Purchase Quantity is advised. The following are the various OrderPolicy Codes:

• Fixed Advice Quantity is calculated based on Shortage Quantity including Batch size (Make) and PO Size (Buy).

• Period Order Advice Quantity is calculated based on Shortage Quantity including Batch Size (Make) and PO Size (Buy) for the number of days defined in the Period Order setting. Selecting this option makes the Period (Days) field available for inputof number of days to be considered when quantity is being advised.

• Reorder PointThe Advice Quantity is calculated based on the Shortage Quantity including Batch Size (Produce) and PO Size (Purchase) and also includes the Maximum Stock Level per linked Main Warehouse. Selecting this option will require defining the Maximum Stock Level in the linked Warehouse in the Inventory tab screen of Item Master Card.


Sales Details

Time of DeliveryThis displays the Delivery Lead Time of Warehouse being linked.

Planner Select the Resource ID who is the Planner for the Inventory control for the Warehouse being defined.

After making the required entries, click on the OK button to complete the linking step. Otherwise to cancel the link

of Warehouse, click on the Cancel button.

— Edit icon, to amend the linked information of item by warehouse.

By selecting the already linked warehouse record and clicking on the Edit icon, the Items by Warehouse screen, as shown above,is displayed. Make the required changes in the warehouse linked details. The details of the fields are similar to those describedabove. After making changes, click on the OK button to save changes. Otherwise to undo changes and retain previous details,click on the Cancel button.

CHAPTER 3


Deleting Warehouse Link to an Item

— Delete icon, to delete the warehouse link to the item.

To delete the link of a warehouse, select the warehouse record displayed in the inventory tab screen, and click on the Deleteicon shown above. The following message is prompted:

To continue deleting the warehouse link, click on the Yes button. Otherwise to cancel deletion, click on the No button.

Making Linked Warehouse the Main Warehouse status

— To select a warehouse from the list as the main warehouse of the defined item.

Although there are number of warehouses linked to an item, it is important to state the Main Warehouse for the Item. Forfulfillment and receipts, the application's entry screen defaults to the Main Warehouse . This can be changed as required duringthe logistics process.

To state a specific Warehouse as the Main Warehouse, select the already linked warehouse code and click on the "Main" iconas shown above.


The linked warehouse is now made the Main warehouse, which is indicated with a green tick at the warehouse records line, asshown in the example below:

Accessing Financial Information of an Item per linked Warehouse

— To retrieve the Item's financial card.

CHAPTER 3


To view financial transactions of the warehouse already linked to the Item, select the warehouse record and click on theFinancial card icon as shown above. The financial Card per item is retrieved displaying financial transactions for the selectedwarehouse, as shown in the example below:


Accessing Warehouse Master Maintenance Card

— To retrieve warehouse maintenance screen.

Warehouse Master Information can be retrieved from the Item Maintenance functionality using the Maintain icon as shownabove. To view a specific Warehouse Maintenance Card, select the specific warehouse record and click on the Maintain icon asshown above. The Warehouse Master Maintenance Card is shown in the example below:

In the above screen of Warehouse Master Maintenance card, all basic information such as warehouse's locations, purchasesand sales inventory, inflow & outflow information, items details, serial/batch items details and warehouse user rightsinformation can be obtained quickly by the following respective tab screens.

CHAPTER 3


Perform Warehouse Transfer / Interbranch Transfer

— To move stock quantity of the defined item to a different warehouse.

Within the Item Maintenance Card, items can be issued/transferred to another warehouse. This can be done using the"Transfer" icon as shown above. Clicking on this icon displays the following screen:

For information on how to perform the Warehouse Transfer, See relevant sub section.


Serial / Batch tab - Allows viewing of existing Serials or Batches for the Item. New Serials/Batches of the Item could also bedefined.

This tab screen is retrievable in the Item Maintenance Card, as shown below:

The above screen lists only serial number of the Item, as the Item Attribute is "Serial". Two filter selections and various detailsare displayed in this screen. These fields are as follows:

Filter fields

Serial nnumbers/Batch nnumbers ((All && AAvailable)Radio buttons for selection of either All or Available.

• AllWhen All is selected it displays all serial items/batch items (numbers) regardless of whether it is already used for fulfillment or not.

CHAPTER 3


• AvailableWhen Available is used, it displays only serial numbers/batch numbers of items that are available, that is, still in stockand not used for other sales orders yet.

From & to (Range of serial numbers / batch numbers)Select a range of serial numbers to obtain their overview records

Lot Number (From & to)Select a range of lot numbers to obtain their overview records

WarehouseThis is a drop down list box for selection of the warehouse code. All is the default value when it displays all serial items fromall warehouse locations. When a specific warehouse is selected, then it only displays serial items from the selected warehouse.

Serial numbers/Batch numbers overview panel

Serial number/Batch numberNumber field of the serial, each is a unique identification of each serial/batch item.

DescriptionThis is the Description of the serial/batch items.

Received Quantity of item received. When a purchase receipt is made by registering the serial number/batch number, the total quantityreceived is shown here.

Used Quantity of item fulfilled. When sales orders are fulfilled with the specified item's serial or batch numbers, the total quantityfulfilled is shown here.


ReservedQuantity of item planned. When the serial/batch number is specified in the sales order entry of the item, but not yet fulfilled, itis considered reserved, and the total quantity reserved is shown here.

Available Quantity of the item available taking into consideration items received, items used and items reserved.

UnitThis is the Measure of the item for sales and purchase of the item. The unit can be piece, kg, kilometer, hour, box, dozen, etc.

Start dateSerial/Batch item's active date when it can be used. The start date indicates the actual creation date of the serial/batch items.This is an Extra field of information.

Due dateThe end date of the serial/batch items. This indicates the final date when it can be used.

StatusStatus indicates whether the serial/batch item is still active or already sold. There are 2 possible statuses, is Active and Sold.Active indicates that the item is still in use, was received or reserved and is available. Sold indicates that it was received, usedand not available.

ClassificationThis is an Item number classification. Serial item's classification is serial, and batch item classification is batch. Items withunique numbers with only 1 quantity are called serial, for example, a batch of 10 tins of green paint will have one batchnumber.

Warehouse This displays the Warehouse code of the Serial/Batch numbers

CHAPTER 3


Functional Icons

Creating Serial/Batch numbers using the Insert button

— Insert icon to create serial numbers for the item.

Clicking on the above shown Insert icon displays the following screen, which allows the user to create a serial number for thedefined item.


In the serial number insert/creations screen, there are number of fields that require user input. These fields are as follows:

Number Enter the Serial/Batch Number of the Item.

Description Enter the Serial Item's Description.

Blocked This is a checkbox to block any logistics and financial transactions on the Serial Item . If you wish to block the Serial Item beingcreated, check this box.

General tab fields

Item code Item code is pre-filled based on the defined Item Code in the Item Maintenance Card.

Start-date Start Activation date of the Serial Item is pre-filled with current creation date. You may change the start date of the serial itemto the preferred date.

End date This defaults to no date. You may select specific End date of the Serial Item being created.

Supplier Pre-selected with the Main Supplier's Account Code and displays the pre-selected Supplier's Account Name. You may changeto the correct Supplier Code accordingly.

Warehouse Pre-selected with the Main Warehouse Code and displays the pre-selected Warehouse Name. You may change to the correctWarehouse Code accordingly.

CHAPTER 3


Location Pre-selected with the Location as defined in the Main Warehouse and displays the pre-selected Location Description. You maychange this to the correct Location accordingly.

Quantity Received This is not editable; it automatically displays the received quantity of the serial item per purchase receipts made.

Quantity Used This is not editable; it automatically displays the used quantity of the serial item per internal use requests.

Quantity Available This is not editable; it automatically displays the available quantity of the serial item per current available stock quantityexcluding requests such as sales orders quantities yet to be delivered.

Picture icon Picture of the serial item can be inserted for user's quick view of the serial item.

NotesShort notes can be attached to the Serial Item as extra information or a reminder by clicking on the Notes icon.

AttachmentDocuments of the Serial Item, such as digital copy of the instruction manual of the Serial Item can be attached by clicking onthe Attachment icon.

Supplier: Info

Type, StatusThis displays the selected Account's Type and Status. In the example above, the Account selected is Supplier type with ActiveStatus.

AddressThis displays the Address details of the selected Account.


City, CountryThis displays the City and Country of the selected Account.

Contact, Phone This displays the Contact Person's Name and Phone Number of the selected Account.

Activities tab fields

The Activities tab screen displays existing activities and also allows the user to create new activities. There are also filter optionsthat allow the user to filter out certain activities. Filter options contained in this screen are as follows:

Type Select from drop down list the Activity Type to view activities of that type.

StatusSelect the Activity Status to view activities with a specific Status.

PrioritySelect from drop down list the Activity Priority to view activities of a certain priority.

CHAPTER 3


Created (date range) Select a date range from the calendar lookup button to view activities that were created within a specific range of dates.

Communications overview panel

Created This displays the Date of when the activity was created.

Type This displays the Activity Type.

Description This displays Activity Description.

ContactThis displays Activity's Contact Person's Name.

Resource This displays the Resource Name who entered the Activity.

StatusThis displays Activity Status.

Start date This displays Activity Start Date.

End date This displays Activity End Date.

PriorityThis displays Activity's Priority.


Extra tab fields

The fields in the Extra tab screen are user-defined free fields that can be done at menu path [System, General, Free fields]. Thefree fields reflected here in the extra tab screen are the ones defined for the Assets table.

CHAPTER 3


Making changes to the Serial Item Details

— Edit icon to amend serial numbers of the item.

Selecting a record of a Serial and clicking on the Edit Icon shown above, displays the Serial Number screen as shown above.

Make the required changes in the Serial Number screen. The details are the same as described above.

Manufacturing tab - Allows viewing existing BOM structure and creation of New Bill of Material for the Item. Where Used BOMitems could also be replaced here.

Below is an example of Manufacturing tab screen in the Item Master Maintenance Card:

The Item defined may have BOM structure of its own. If there is then it is displayed here. Creation of an item's BOM is alsopossible with the use of the create icon in the side of the display panel.


Attributes: Manufacturing

Make Selecting this indicates that the item is of "Make", which is produced in the Production. This can be an 'End Product'. Thisattribute indicates the presence of a Product structure (Bill of Materials) for this item, which can be used during the assembly,manufacturing or delivery process. Only items with structures can be produced.

PartChecking this indicates that the item is a "Part" item, used in the Production, for example an assembly of 'parts'; to produceone end product. This indicates that the Item is used as a part in a Product structure.

LevelThis displays the Highest Level of the Item in any other Product Structures (BOM - Bill of Material). If the item does not exist inany BOM, then its Level is "0". If the item is used in a BOM at the first level as part item, then its Level is "1".

BOM overview panel

Main versionThe Check box field is automatically checked for the initially created BOM structure. The BOM structure can be checked as themain version by clicking on the Select: main version button.

VersionThis displays the Version number of the displayed BOM.

DescriptionThis displays the Description of the BOM.

Effective dateThis displays the effective date of the BOM.

Expiry dateThis displays the Expiry date of the BOM

CHAPTER 3


Batch QuantityThis displays the Batch Quantity of the BOM.

Calculated costs price This displays the calculated costs price.

Warehouse This displays the Warehouse of the BOM.

Cost center This displays the Cost center of the BOM.

StatusThis displays the Status of the BOM.

Lead time This displays the Lead Time (delivery time) of the BOM.

Where Used overview panelThis panel displays the BOM structure where the defined item is being used.

Assembled item Code of the main item assembled for which the defined item is used.

VersionThis displays the Version of Where-Used BOM.

DescriptionThis displays theWhere- Used BOM version as defined in the BOM creation screen.

StatusThis indicates the Status of the Where-Used Bill of Material.


QuantityThe Where-Used BOM batch quantity is defined at the header of the BOM creation screen.

UnitThe measure of BOM main item by default value of the initial item's unit measure defined in the BOM structure.

Actions with Functional icons

Functional icons at BOM overview panel

— Create new BOM structure icon.

— Edit icon for amending BOM structure.

— Delete icon for deleting BOM structure.

— icon to check BOM line as the main structure.

Functional icons at Where used overview panel

— Edit icon to amend Where Used BOM structure.

— icon to add defined item to a BOM structure.

For information on how the above actions can be performed, please see Section- Maintain BOM.

CHAPTER 3


Documents tab - Attaches documents to the item.

See the example below, the Doc. (Document) tab of the Items Master Maintenance Card:

In the Documents tab, existing documents are displayed in the panel, grouped by certain criteria. There are also functional iconsthat enable the user to perform some of the basic actions such as zooming into each group line of for viewing a list ofdocuments, creating new documents to the item, editing existing documents displayed in the documents tab and deletingexisting documents:

Group by


• None If this is selected, the system displays all records of existing documents without grouping. See the example below, where a list of document records are displayed:

• Type When this is selected, the system displays records of existing documents grouped by Document Type. See the example below, where documents are grouped by Document Types:

• Date When this is selected, the system displays records of existing documents, grouped by Creation Date. See the example below, where documents are grouped by Creation Date:

CHAPTER 3


Overview of display panel

Created This field displays the Document's Creation Date.

SubjectThis field displays the Document's Subject.

Security levelThis field displays Document's Security Level.

Order This field displays the Order Number if there is an order linked to the document.

Our Ref. This displays the Internal Reference Number, if there are Transactions linked to the document. This is an Entry number whichis auto-generated uniquely for each logistics transaction.

Your Ref. This displays the External Party's Reference Number, if there are any Transactions linked to the document. This can beCustomer's Purchase Order Number or Supplier's Sales Order Number.

Allocated This is a checkbox that indicates the Document Status. If the checkbox is checked, it indicates that the document is Allocated.

Matched This is a checkbox that indicates the Document Status. If the checkbox is checked, it indicates that the documents are Matched.

Description This field displays the Document Type Description. This field is displayed when the documents are grouped by Document Type.

TotalThis field displays the Total Number of Document per Group criteria.


Actions with Functional IconsSome basic actions can be done using the functional icons. These functionalities are described as follows, including hyperlinksto documents with detailed discussions.

Inserting New documents to the Item

- This enables the user to create new documents to the Item.

Editing Document Details

- This enables the user to edit existing documents that are linked in the Document tab of Item Master Card. Clicking onthis displays the Document Creation Entry screen.

Deleting existing documents

- This enables the user to delete existing documents that are no longer relevant.

Zoom In overview

- This icon is enabled when documents overview is grouped by Type or Date. This is enables user to zoom into list recordsof documents that are grouped.

Analysis tab - Allows the user to obtain analysis information such as Quantity and Amount Sold and Purchased within a rangeof periods. Also provides logistics financial summary.

CHAPTER 3


The analysis tab is contained in the Item Maintenance Card, as shown in the example below:

Filter fields

Warehouse Drop down list box for selection of warehouse code. A default value of All is pre-selected where it displays statistics of an item'slogistics by period for all the warehouse. When a specific warehouse code is selected, then it displays logistics statistics of theitem for the period but is limited to the selected warehouse code.

Financial yearDrop down list box for selection of the financial year. The current year is the default selection, and it displays logisticsinformation for all 12 periods of the selected year.


Analysis overview panel

Period This displays Period number of the selected financial year.

Qty (Sold) This displays the total quantity of item sold for the period.

Amount (Sold)This displays the total amount of item sold for the period.

Qty (Purchased)This displays the Total quantity of the item purchased for the period.

Amount (Purchased) This displays the total purchased amount of the item for the period.

ResultsThis displays the total quantity resulting from budgeted sales, after deducting total quantity sold and adding total quantitypurchased.

CHAPTER 3


Planned: SalesThis displays the total amount of planned sales (budgeted sales).

Totals panel

Qty (Sold) This displays the total quantity of item sold for the selected financial year.

Amount (Sold)This displays the total amount of item sold for the selected financial year.

Qty (Purchased)This displays the total quantity of item purchased for the selected financial year.

Amount ((Purchased) This displays the total purchased amount of the item for the selected financial year.

ResultThis displays the total quantity of total budgeted sales deducting total items sold and adding total purchases for the selectedfinancial year.

Budget SalesThis displays the total budgeted sales that are ordered, but not yet fulfilled.


Extra tab - Allows user to enter more information on the Item which requires prior definition of Free fields and Item Assortments.

Below is an example of Extra tab screen:

In the Extra tab screen, there are also pre-fixed fields that are optional for input depending on the user's requirements. Thesefields are as follows:

Resource An Item may have to link to a Resource to indicate that the item is handled or used by the resource in charge. This is an optionalfield, but it defaults to the resource that created the Item.

Free Values2 Free values fields are available for the user to input extra information on an item. These fields are fixed and are not userdefined elsewhere such as the free fields.

CHAPTER 3


Free FieldsSee the hyperlinked document above for details on the free fields. The above screen gives some examples of free fields of typetext, number, date and checkboxes that were defined into meaningful fields. These meaningful fields can then be input withrelevant information.

Defining Extra Free Fields

Introduction

Free fields allow users to define them into meaningful fields which are then reflected in the Extra tab screen of the ItemMaintenance Card, Asset Maintain Card, Project Maintenance Card, Resource Maintenance Card, etc. This then allows the userto input more information in the Extra tab screen. These free fields are defined as follows: The extra tab contains extra fieldsfor text, numbers, date and check boxes where you can enter extra information to the hour item which is not defined in thebasics. Below is the screen of the extra tab where extra details of the hour item are entered.


Define Extra LabelsTo define labels for the extra fields, so that you can enter extra information, go to menu path [System, General, Free fields]. Thefollowing screen is displayed:

To view free field for items maintenance, select Item from the Table drop down list. Similarly, you can view free fields in theResources Maintenance or Asset Maintenance, then select the respective table from the Table drop down list.

These free fields do not mean "extra fields in the extra tab screen", therefore you can define these extra fields into meaningfullabels on which you can later enter information when defining the item.

CHAPTER 3


You can define any number of extra fields for your own convenience. After free fields are defined with meaningful labels, youwill notice that defined labels are displayed accordingly in the extra tab screen. See in the diagram below an example of extratab field where fields are defined with meaningful labels:

By doing this, you have extra choices to key in more information of hour item being defined, as shown in this example .

Log tab - Allows the user to obtain log information of who accessed the Item Maintenance Card, when, and what informationhas been changed.


See the screen below for an example of Log tab screen:

The log tab screen displays all changes to the item information with the dates and times of the changes.

Field name This displays the field name that was changed.

Old valueThis displays the previous value of the field before the change.

New valueThis displays the new value of the field after the change.

Full nameThis displays the Full name of the resource who changed the field value.

Date / TimeThis displays the Date and time of when the changes were made.

CHAPTER 3


2. Maintaining machines

Introduction

Machines are Assets in a company. Machines are basically used in production as tools to perform daily tasks. It is importantthat you keep records of the machines used in the manufacturing environment. Each machine has its unique serial number andeach of them has information such as property type and most importantly financial asset information such as its depreciationvalue, purchased value and current value. Machines services information such as the planning of jobs and capacity should alsokept in the record. All these are done at the Machine Maintenance functionality of E-Manufacturing.

To Maintain Assets of Machines, go to menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Machines] which displays the following screen:

The above details of the screen are described as follows:


SearchClick on this button to execute the search & filter process based on the user selected search criteria.

Clear Reset the user selected search criteria to the default values.

RowsEnter the number of rows of records to be displayed in the results section.

Filter: Starts with Click on this option to perform the filtering of records that "Starts with" the entered characters in the search criterion.

Filter: ContainsClick on this option to perform the filtering of records that "contains exact" characters entered in the Search criterion.

Search Criteria

Serial Number Enter the Machine's Serial Number to search a known serial number of a machine.

Description Enter the Machine's Description to search a known description of a machine.

Item Enter the Machine's Item Code for searching records of the machine serials that have that Item code.

Group Select Machine Group for filtering records of machine serials that are in the selected Machine Group.

Resource Key in the Resource's Name for filtering the records of machine serials that are of in the charge of the entered Resource, andwhich the entered Resource is responsible for.

CHAPTER 3


Status

Active Active Status can be checked to view Asset items that are Active. Active Asset Items are those that are currently in use.

Depreciated Depreciated Status can be checked to view Asset items that are fully depreciated.

Blocked Blocked Status can be checked to view Asset items that are blocked for Depreciation.

Sold Sold Status can be checked to view Asset items that are sold to customers.

Inactive Inactive status can be checked to view Asset items that are not in use.


Based on the user selection on the above described search criteria, results are displayed at the bottom Section for overview.The results of machine serials records can be selected for performing various actions such as performing depreciationcalculation, writing off an asset which has been traded in, performing recoding of serial numbers for the machines, selling anasset, deleting an asset which is wrongly defined, retrieving an asset maintenance details, or even defining a new machineserial. All these can be done by selecting the functional buttons maintained in this functionality.


2.1 Creating and maintaining machines

Machine item can be created by clicking on the New button. The machine maintenance screen is displayed. Machine items areidentified with unique serial numbers, therefore there can be 10 assembly machine items and each and every assemblymachine is identified with a unique serial number. Enter the machine serial number and description at the header section. Seethe example below:


CalculateThis enables the user to calculate budgeted depreciation for the Asset. For information see sub Section3.3.2 - Calculate Machine Item.

Write off This enables the user to write off an Asset. For information see sub Section 3.2.4 Write off Machine Item.

Recode This enables the user to Recode an Asset Serial Item. For information see sub Section 3.8.3 - RecodingItem / Machine Item / Hour Item / Extra Charges Item.

Sell This enables the user to Sell the Asset. For information see sub Section 3.2.3 -Selling Machine Item.

DeleteThis enables the user to Delete an obsolete Asset. For information see sub Section 3.2.5 - DeletingMachine Item.

OpenThis enables the user to Retrieve Machine Item Master Card. For information see sub Section 3.2.1Creating New or Maintaining Existing Machine Item.

NewThis enables the user to Create New Machine Item. For information see sub Section 3.2.1 Creating Newor Maintaining Existing Machine Item.

Close This enables the user to exit and close the Maintain Machine functionality.

CHAPTER 3


Serial number Enter the machine's serial number.

Description Enter the machine's Description.

StatusThe default status for the machine is active. The following are the various statuses of machines.

Active An active machine serial allows the machine to have depreciation transactions and allows all transactions without restrictions.

DepreciatedDepreciated status of machine serial states that it is completely depreciated and actual depreciation has already been alreadyrealized.

Inactive Inactive status of a machine serial does not allow for depreciation transactions for that machine serial.

Blocked A Blocked status of a machine serial does not allow any transactions.

ParentYou may link the machine to a parent machine item at the parent field by selecting the parent machine item from the lookupscreen.


The following are descriptions of tab screens of the machine's maintenance screen, and how you can enter information andobtain information in the available tab screens:

General tabThe General tab is the default tab which is displayed when you retrieve a machine's maintenance screen , as shown below.

The kind of information that can be stored in the General tab screen is described as follows:

Investment, Date Total amount invested for the machine serial is entered at the investment field. The Date when you invested in the machineserial is selected in the Date field. The amount is used as the basis of calculating the depreciation. The investment date defaultsto the Start date of depreciation; to indicate a later depreciation date, it has to be selected and changed.

Property type How the asset was obtained can be selected from the drop down lists. For example, was the machine serial purchased?. Theavailable property types in the drop down lists are "Purchased", "Leased", "Rented", "Maintenance", "Leasehold", "HirePurchase", "Produced" and "Others"..

CHAPTER 3


Picture You can insert a picture of the machine by clicking on the folder icon. This provides the user with quick view of the machineserial item's picture.

AttachmentHere you can insert documents such as instructions on how to use the machine. Such documents can be attached by clickingon the paper clip icon. this allows user to quickly retrieve documents related to the machine serials.

NotesNotes can also be entered in the available Notes space by clicking on the Note icon.

General Ledger AccountsThis Section allows the user to link relevant G/L accounts for Asset and Depreciation. Specifying the Depreciation Method, thebasis of how depreciation is applied and the machine's residual value is also calculated here.

Group Specify the Asset Group of the defined machine serial item. This would be the financial asset grouping of the defined asset -machine serial. The Financial Grouping of an Asset can be defined at menu path [Assets, Assets, Asset Group], prior to theselection made here.

AssetHere, you can select the G/L Account in the Fixed Asset section of the Balance sheet. Each depreciation transaction that takesplace is credited to this G/L Account. A specific G/L account with the machine name can be defined at the menu path [Finance,General Ledger, Chart of GL] prior to the selection made here.

Depreciation (P&L) Here you can select the G/L Account in the P&L section of Expenses . Each depreciation transaction that takes place is thendebited to this G/L account. A specific G/L account with the name "Depreciation [machine-name]" can be defined at the menupath [Finance, General Ledger, Chart of GL] prior to the selection made here.


Depreciation Method Each company has its own way of depreciating assets that complies with the company's business process and any externalparty legislation. Therefore, it is important that the correct depreciation method is selected. The depreciation method is the wayassets are depreciated. The depreciation method can be defined at menu path [Assets, Assets, Depreciation Methods] prior tothe selection made here.

Basis, Periods, CostsThese are criteria displayed per the selected Depreciation method. These criteria are specified when the user creates aDepreciation Method at the menu path [Assets, Assets, Depreciation Method].

Start Date, End date This is the duration of Depreciation for the Machine serial asset . Select the Start date of Depreciation and End date ofDepreciation.

Calculate Clicking on this button automatically calculates the Budgeted Depreciation Amount for the entire selected periods ofDepreciation.

Residual Value This is the value of the machine serial asset at the last moment when it is completely depreciated.

Advanced SectionThis Section is displayed when the Advanced functional button is clicked. The following are the advanced informationselections:

Cost UnitThis selects the Machine Serial's Cost Unit which is used for distributing costs over usage and depreciation.

Item Code This links the relevant Standard Item Code of the Machine Serial Item. For example the Item: "Assembly Machine, quantity: 10".Each unit of 10 will have unique "Serial number" linked to Item Code: "Assembly Machine".

CHAPTER 3


QuantityEnter the Quantity of Machine Serial which is defined. Usually it is 1 for one machine serial.

Current: In Use

Resource This indicates the Resource who is in-charge and/or uses the defined machine. This can be changed when a transfer of aresource takes place by clicking on the Change button.

ProjectThis indicates at which Project the Machine serial is being used . This is automatically updated when there is change in usageof the machine serial at a different project.

Cost Center This indicates the Cost Center who is held responsible and/or uses the defined machine. This automatically changes when atransfer of cost center takes place by clicking on the Change button.

Location This indicates the Location of the Machine .

WarehouseThis indicates the Warehouse to which the machine serial is being delivered/received. This is automatically changed when themachine serial is used at a different warehouse.


Transactions tab

The Financial Transaction of Depreciation is shown in the Transaction tab of the Machine Maintenance screen. This provides anoverview of budgeted depreciation, actual depreciation, accumulated depreciation, its actual Book Value at current period andso on. From such an overview, the user may decide to revalue or sell the asset. This would be the information basis for obtainingthe financial status of an asset and would be used for decision making.

Clicking on the Transaction tab at the Machine Maintenance screen shows the following :

CHAPTER 3


The information displayed on the Transactions tab is as follows:

InvestmentThis displays the Investment value of the machine serial.

Revaluation This displays the Revaluation value of the machine serial.

Total: InvestmentThis displays the Total Investment value of the machine serial.

Cumulative depreciationThis displays the Cumulative depreciation value of the machine serial.

Book valueThis displays the Book value of the machine serial.

DepreciationThis displays the current Depreciation value of the machine serial.

Book valueThis displays the current Book value of the machine serial.

Link Asset with Asset Purchase Transaction

The user may choose to link the above transaction to an existing transaction entry of purchases or production of the asset by

clicking on the insert icon, at the right hand corner of the top transaction tab section.


Clicking on this icon displays the transaction screen of assets and automatically filters the specified Asset's G/L Account in thespecified Asset Group. Clicking on this icon displays the following screen:

Note that the Asset G/L account is pre-selected in the G/L account field tor obtain its purchase or production transactions. Atthe bottom the transaction entries are displayed. Select the appropriate transaction and click on the Select button.

Clicking the Select button links the purchase transaction of the machine and updates the Investment value of the assetmachine.

CHAPTER 3


At the bottom Section of the Transaction tab, Budgeted Depreciation and Actual Depreciation are shown periodically percalculated budgeted depreciation for the period (Start date & End date) specified in the General tab screen.

Budgeted Depreciation is calculated automatically when the Calculate button is clicked in the General tab screen. The budgetedcalculation is done based on the specified Depreciation Method and the specified Start date and End date.

Actual Depreciation can be calculated each time based on the period by clicking on the Depreciation button.

The budgeted and actual details can be viewed, edited and deleted and new budgets can be manually created using thefollowing buttons, at the right hand corner of the bottom section:


Create Budgeted Depreciation Manually

To create new budgets, click on the insert icon, and the following screen is displayed:

The required data in the above shown screen are as follows:

DateEnter the date of the budget at the Date field.

Costs: QuantityEnter the budgeted quantity at the Costs Quantity field.

CHAPTER 3


Costs: AmountEnter the budgeted amount at the Costs Amount field.

Revenue: QuantityIf the asset is being sold, then enter the quantity at the Revenue field, otherwise this field can be left blank.

Revenue: AmountEnter the Amount of the machine serial being sold, if this is a sale.

Details

Resource Select the Resource who is entering the budgeted costs and/r budgeted revenue to the machine serial.

Debtor If the machine serial is being sold, the select the relevant debtor account here; otherwise this can be left blank.

Creditor If the asset machine serial is being purchased, then select the Creditor account for which Supplier the Asset was purchased.

ProjectSelect the Project, if the asset's budgeted costs/revenue is related to any project.

Warehouse Select the appropriate fulfilling warehouse code here.

Cost center A default cost center is pre-filled here to distribute costs/revenue across cost centers . You may change this to the relevant costcenter

Cost unitA default cost unit is pre-filled here for accounting for the appropriate cost unit of the asset. This may be changed accordingly.


DescriptionEnter the description into the entered budgets.

To save entries, click Save. To define more budgeted depreciation, use the New button and repeat the abovesteps. To close this screen, click on the Close button.

Editing Budgeted Depreciation

To edit or view details of an existing budgeted depreciation, click on the Edit icon, which displays the following screen:

To view details of Depreciation, select the Depreciation line and click on the Edit icon. This will display the Budgets screen asshown in the Create Budgeted Depreciation manually section.

Make the necessary changes in the displayed budgets screen and click on the Save button.

CHAPTER 3


Deleting Budgeted Depreciation

To Delete a budgeted depreciation line, select the budget line and click on the Delete icon. The following screen isdisplayed:

Select the desired budget line and click on the Delete icon. The following pop up message is displayed:

Click on the No button to cancel deletion. Otherwise, click on the Yes button to confirm deletion. Clicking on the Yes buttonautomatically deletes the selected budgeted depreciation.


Children tabChild Machines of a Parent Machine can be viewed, or Child Machines can be linked to Parent Machines in the Children tabscreen functionality. Child machines are components of a parent machine or machines used in conjunction with a parentmachine. How child machines can be linked to the parent machine in the Children tab screen of the Machine Maintenance Cardis explained below:

CHAPTER 3


Linking components of Children Machine to Parent Machine

To link a machine component to a parent machine, click on the insert icon. A new Machine Maintenance Screen isdisplayed, as shown in the example below:

Take note that the Parent field is automatically pre-filled with the Parent Machine Serial Item. Also the same Asset Group andDepreciation Method of the Parent Machine is pre-filled automatically. It makes sense that the component children of a ParentMachine should also be of the same asset group and same depreciation method as the Parent Machine.

Viewing & Editing component of Children Machine

To view or make changes to the child machine serial, select the child machine line and click on the edit icon at the righthand side of the screen. The child machine serial's maintenance screen is displayed, where you can obtain detailed informationof the child machine or even make the necessary changes. Note that the Asset Group and Depreciation Method should bemaintained according to the Parent Machine.


Deleting component of Children Machine

You may choose to delete a child machine serial by selecting the child machine line and click on the delete icon at theright hand side of the screen. The following pop up message is displayed:

To cancel deletion, click on No. To continue deletion, click on Yes.

Planning tabThe calendar lookup of a machine serial is very useful because you can obtain information about its availability and capacityfor the day. On this screen you can do planning for the machine serial by generating capacity on a daily, weekly or monthlybasis. With the capacities generated on this screen, it would be useful when machine planning is done for MRP via menu path[Manufacturing, Planning, Machine Planning].

The planning tab screen is as shown in the screen shot below:

CHAPTER 3


Create Machine Planning by Generating Capacity

To generate capacity for a day, place your active pointer by the date in a particular month and click on the Generate iconat the left hand side of the screen. A pop up screen is displayed, where you can key in the number of hours of capacity, theduration dates and select a machine hour item as shown in the screen below:

Serial number The serial number of the machine is automatically pre-filled here.

Item The Item code of the machine is automatically pre-filled here.

Warehouse The Warehouse code of where the machines output is delivered is also pre-filled with the default warehouse code.

Output Select an Hour Item at the Output field.


QuantityEnter the number of hours at the Quantity field.

From & to (date range) Select the duration of capacity being generated at the Date range from and to fields.

Include

SaturdayCheck this to include capacity generation for Saturdays.

SundayCheck this to include capacity generation for Sundays.

Then click on the generate icon. After the system completes generating the machine capacity planning, a pop up message isdisplayed notifying that the capacity generation is completed, as shown in the screen below:

Click on the OK button and click on the Close button to close the Machine Capacity generation screen.

CHAPTER 3


Creating Capacity Planning for One Selected Day

To create Capacity for only one selected day, select the day across date and month. Click on the insert icon. The samePlanning screen is displayed as shown above. But the date range is pre-filled with the one day selected .

Key in the number of hours and select the machine hour item. Click on the Generate button and repeat the above steps.

Viewing & Editing Existing Capacity Planning

To view already generated machine capacity planning, select the specific date and click on the edit icon. The followingscreen is displayed:

Enter the Number of hours and click on the Save button. After saving, close the above screen by clicking on the Close button.


Deleting Existing Capacity Planning

To delete an existing machine capacity planning, select the specific date and click on the delete icon. A pop up messageis displayed to confirm deletion as shown in the example below:

Click on the No button to cancel deletion. Click on the Yes button to confirm deletion which immediately deletes the selectedplanning.

Detailed Machine Capacity Planning Overview

At the bottom of the section, the machine hour item that was selected during the capacity generation is listed . To view details

of the machine hour item, click on the edit icon. To delete the link of the machine hour item to this machine serial,

click on the delete icon. Note that deleting the machine hour item linked at the bottom, will also automatically deleteall capacity generated for this hour item at the top Section of the planning screen.

CHAPTER 3


Extra tabThe extra tab screen allows you to predefine extra free fields at the system settings via menu path [System, General, Free fields].When these free fields are defined, the extra field in the extra tab screen gives you the options for meaningful fields of entryfor extra information of a machine serial. The following is the extra tab screen where some extra fields are already defined withmeaningful fields:

In this screen you can enter even more information that you like to keep record of. For instance, the machine serials validitydate, its alternate serial number, Where Used production codes, performance job code, extra texts descriptions about themachine serial, the machine's performance in hours, etc.


Prior Step Defining Free Fields for Extra tab

To define extra free fields in the Extra tab screen into meaningful fields that best suit your internal processes and information,go to menu path [System, General, Free Fields]. The following screen is displayed:

In the above Free fields main screen, select "Asset" from Table drop down list, which retrieves all free fields available for theAsset Machine.

CHAPTER 3


There are User fields, User Number fields, User Integer Field and User Date Field, as shown above. Select the type of free fieldthat you wish to define and click on the Open button. The following free field customization screen is displayed:

Enter the Field Name which is a meaningful field name at the Customize field. Click the Save button. After defining, click on theClose button. To delete the already defined meaningful field, click on the Delete button. Note that the hard coded free field isnot deleted, only the defined meaningful name is erased.

The defined meaningful field names as defined are reflected in the main Assets Free Fields screen at the Customize column.


There are some actions that can be done from the main Assets Free Fields screen as explained below:

Refresh Clicking on the refreshe screen will give you the latest customization made by the user.

Open Clicking on this allows user to customize/define meaningful fields to the selected free field as explained above.

Delete It is even possible to erase the already defined/customized meaningful field name from the main screen, by clicking on thisbutton.

Close To exit from the Free Fields functionality, click on this button.

CHAPTER 3


Log tabThe log tab screen is where you can obtain information of who accessed the maintenance screen, what changes were made anddate and time the changes were made. See the screen below and the example of a log screen:

This screen gives you an overview of changes in Machine information by displaying the old value and the new value of the fieldwith the dates and who made the changes. The logs of changes can be filtered using the following commands:

Search Clicking on this filters records of changes based on the selected filter criterion.

Clear Clicking on this resets the selected filter criterion.

RowsEnter the number of rows to be displayed at the results.

Resource Filter criterion for selecting Resource ID to obtain records of changes made by a selected Resource.


2.2 Calculating for machines

Budgeted Depreciation can be automatically calculated prior to realizing actual depreciation. However the Calculate button isnot enabled when there are no prior "financial transactions" created per the specified "investment value" for the assetmachine. Budgeted Depreciation is calculated based on the specified Depreciation Method, Asset Group and Duration ofDepreciation and Residual Value. Therefore it is important that the relevant information is specified in the MachineMaintenance screen. It is even possible to automatically calculate budgeted depreciation within the Machine MaintenanceCard, as the Calculate button functionality is also in the Maintenance Card.

DetailsThe Calculate functional button is in the Main Overview screen, as shown in the screen below:

CHAPTER 3


The Calculate button is in the Machine Maintenance Card, as shown in the screen below:

Creating Financial Transaction

After the Investment amount, Asset Group, Asset Depreciation Method and relevant important details are keyed in, click theSave button to save the newly entered details. This will prompt the following message:

This is a message prompt asking if the financial transaction should be created for the Investment value.


Note: Clicking on the NO button does not create financial transaction and therefore the budgeted depreciation cannot begenerated, so the Calculate button remains disabled. Click on the Yes button to start creating a financial transaction per theentered Investment value. Clicking on the Yes button displays the following screen:

Creation of transaction entries, as shown on the above screen, should be entered with appropriate values as in the following:

JournalSelect the appropriate Journal where the transaction entries should be created.

CreditorSelect the Creditor who supplied the Asset Machine, and to whom the cost (investment) is paid .

VAT Select the Value Added Tax Code if there is any.

Resource Select the Resource who is registering the financial entry.

Cost Center Select the Cost Center which consumes the Asset Machine.

CHAPTER 3


Cost UnitSelect the appropriate Cost Unit to which the machine's cost should specifically be registered.

Our ReferenceEnter the Our Reference number which is the relevant PO number.

Your Ref. Enter the Supplier's Reference Number which is the SO number.

Description Enter the Description for the financial entry being transacted.

After keying in details, click on the Yes button. You will then be prompted whether you would like to calculate budgeteddepreciation automatically, without clicking the Calculate button, as shown in the screen shot below:

Click on the No button to calculate budgeted depreciation at a later time (by clicking on the Calculate button).


Clicking on the Yes button performs the budgeted depreciation calculation. The performance of calculation is shown at the topleft corner of the screen, as shown below:

The above steps are executed in the same manner when budgeted depreciation is calculated using the Calculate button which is in the Machine Maintenance Screen.

Calculate Budgeted Depreciation using Calculate button in the Machine Main Overview screen

1. Select an Asset Machine record from the Main Machine Overview screen.

2. Click on the Calculate button , which then displays the following screen:

Click on the OK button to continue calculation of budgeted depreciation for the selected Machine. Otherwise, click on theCancel button to exit from performing the depreciation calculation.

CHAPTER 3


Clicking OK performs the budgeted depreciation calculation. Upon completion, the following confirmation message isprompted:

2.3 Selling machines

Assets such as Machines that are fully depreciated, or no longer in use, may not necessarily be kept even though they still havevalue and are usable. Such machines can be traded in or sold to customers or vendors or even to employees. The managementdeciding to sell the asset can generate the sales order upon agreement by the purchaser, and precede with the relevant financialentries and write off the asset.

DetailsThe selling step of an asset machine can be done using the Sell functional button which is in the Machine Main Overviewscreen, via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Machine] and [Assets, Assets, Maintain].


Selecting a record of an asset machine from the Machine Main Overview screen and clicking on the Sell button displays the following screen:

The required input details are as follows:

Asset

Item CodeThe Machine Serial's Item Code is automatically pre-filled based on the selected record on the Machine.

CHAPTER 3


Serial Number The Machine's Serial Number (Code) is also automatically pre-filled based on the selected record of the Machine.

Book Value The Book Value is the value calculated [(Investment value - Residual value) - Accumulated Depreciation], in the selectedMachine record and is displayed here. Another field for the currency used for the displayed Book Value amount is alsodisplayed here.

Write OffCheck this box to concurrently write off the Asset Machine by writing equivalent balances ( Book value = 0 or Book value =residual value) to the Depreciation Cost G/L account and Accumulated Depreciation G/L account.

P&LSelect an Expenses category account for entries of the sales being made. This is the Disposal G/L account under the expensescategory.

Date The current date of the sale is pre-filled automatically. This can be changed to an alternative date.

JournalSelect an appropriate Journal. It is usually the General Journal that is automatically pre-filled.

Our Reference Our Reference Number is also automatically pre-filled by automatic generation of entry number.

Description Enter the description for the entries of Write off and Sale.

Sales Order

Ordered bySelect the customer who is purchasing the asset machine.


Your reference This is the Machine's Code which is automatically pre-filled. This can be changed to an alternative code, or per the customer'spurchase order number.

Description Enter the description of the sales order being generated.

Resource Select the Resource who is responsible for the sale of an asset.

Warehouse Select the Warehouse Code which is used for the fulfillment/delivery of the sales order.

Delivery Date Select the Delivery Date for when the asset machine being sold will be delivered to the customer. Usually this is pre-filled withthe current date which can be changed accordingly.

Sales VAT Code If the Asset machine being sold is taxable, then select the appropriate tax percentage by selecting the VAT Code.

AmountThe amount is pre-filled as the Book Value of the Asset Machine. This can be revalued prior to selling an asset machine.Therefore, the sales amount can be changed accordingly. The currency used for this amount is also displayed automatically.

After inputting these details in the fields , click on the Generate Sales Order button. Clicking on the Generate button displaysthe following report showing financial entries transacted in selling and writing off an asset machine:

CHAPTER 3


Basically these are the entries transacted by writing off through sale of an asset. The Amount of Machinery Asset G/L accountis written of with the Disposal Asset G/L account which sets the Asset G/L account value to zero.

Closing this financial entries report prompts a message which allows the user to open the already generated sales order, asshown in the screen below:

Click on the Close button to retrieve the sales order at a later time. To retrieve the generated sales order now for processing,click on the Open button. This retrieves the sales order entry screen, as shown in the screen below:

Steps of processing the sales order are then done accordingly. For information on steps involved in Sales order, please refer toLogistics Product Manual.


2.4 Writing off machines

An asset can be written off to set the Book Value to zero value, which sets its status as fully depreciated. An asset can also bewritten off when the asset is fully depreciated or it is no longer usable, as in the case of an obsolete machine. An asset beingsold can also be written off; this will be discussed later in the "Maintain Machine - Sell button" functionality document. Writingoff an Asset Machine writes equivalent balances in the Depreciation Cost G/L account and the Accumulated Depreciation G/Laccount of an asset.

The budgeted depreciation calculation must be done before an asset is written off. Selecting an asset record that was notcalculated with the budgeted depreciation disables the Write Off button.

DetailsTo write off an asset, select an asset record from the Machine Main Overview screen, and click on the Write Off button

, which then displays the following screen for the user's input:

CHAPTER 3


The following are the required fields for input, as shown in the above screen and described below:

JournalSelect appropriate Journal for the entries of writing off the asset.

Date Select the date of when the asset being written off.

Description Enter the description for the the entries of writing off an asset.

Click the OK button. To discontinue writing off the selected asset, click on the Cancel button.

Clicking on the OK button automatically writes off the selected machine and it is no longer displayed in the Machine MainOverview screen. To view the written off asset check the search Status criterion to Depreciated, which filters the fullydepreciated records of assets/machines.


See the screen below which shows the entries created in the Depreciation Cost G/L account and Accumulated Depreciation G/Laccount:

The above entry can be viewed via menu path [Assets, Assets, Cards]...select the written off asset machine and click on theDisplay button, which shows the financial transaction. Select the depreciation financial transactions and click on the Our Ref.button.

2.5 Deleting machines

Records of assets that have already been sold since they are no longer used, or written off since they are obsolete or fullydepreciated, need not be kept in the system. Keeping numerous old records only increases the database size and makes itmore difficult to search for correct records. Therefore, these old assets records maintenance can be deleted. Prior to deletion,please note that these old assets records can be archived into the history database, available for future reference.

CHAPTER 3


Details

Delete button is in the Machine Main Overview screen. Selecting an asset machine record from this screen and clicking on the

Delete button prompts the following message:

The message is prompted to advise the user that the process takes some time, and gives the user the option not to continue..The process takes time because the machine serial item is applied in many other integrated functional entries and transactions,such as purchases, orders, planning, depreciation and so forth. Therefore deletion of an asset item requires deletion in all ofthe areas where it was applied, and therefore takes time.

Click on the No button to discontinue deletion. Click on the Yes button to continue. The following prompt will be displayed ifthe select machine serial item contains financial entries that already exist:

Click on the No button to discontinue. Click on the Yes button to continue despite containing financial entries.


Clicking on the Yes button automatically deletes the entire record of the selected asset machine serial item. Once deletion iscompleted, the following confirmation is displayed:

Click on the OK button to close the confirmation message. Note that the deleted record of the asset machine serial item is nolonger present in the Machine Main Overview screen.

3. Maintaining hours

Introduction

Labor Hours are used not only internally by employees for performing daily duties in various areas and departments, but hoursare also used in maintenance services at customer's sites, on production floors for man hours in handling machines and inproducing products and are also used for human resource planning for labor capacity. Besides labor hours, machine hours arealso required for planning and determining machine's capacity in performing specific jobs such as assembling, molding, fixing,etc. to manufacture a complete product.

These different types of labor hours and machine hours that are used in performing jobs vary from department to departmentwithin the required capacity and are job basedspecific requirements, and must be defined, maintained, updated, recorded,planned and applied or realized accordingly. To do that, the Hour Maintenance functionality has been introduced.

The Hour Maintenance functionality can be triggered via menu path [Manufacturing, Means, Hour] or [Projects, Items, Hours]or [Services, Items, Hours] or [Human Resource, Planning, Hours] or [Payroll, Components, Hours].

CHAPTER 3


Triggering any of the above menu paths, displays the following screen:

The above example of Main Overview screen of Hour Item Maintenance functionality contains a number of search & filterselections, displays records of hour items and contains functional buttons for performing various actions. These are as follows:

Search & Filters

SearchThis is a functional button, and when it is clicked, it performs a search & filter based on the last search selection made by theuser.

Clear When the Clear functional button is clicked, it resets/clears all users search selection to the default values.


RowsThis field allows the user to key in a number of rows of records to be displayed at the bottom overview of search results. Thedefault value is 100, so it will display 100 rows of search results of Hour items at the bottom overview section.

Warehouse This is a drop down list box that allows selecting a specific warehouse to view hour item records belonging to the selectedwarehouse. The default value is pre-selected to "All" which displays hour item records of all warehouses.

Filter Clicking on this button expands to more filter options. Re-clicking this button hides the extra filter options. The following are theadditional filter options:

Item AssortmentsAs shown in the example above, the additional filter options are displayed with the user defined Item Assortments. Selectingspecific Item Assortments displays hour items records of the selected Assortments.

StatusThe following defined statuses can be checked to obtain hour item records that have the selected status(es).

Active The status of an active item is be checked to view hour items that are active. Active items can be sold, purchased, delivered,received, and manufactured/assembled.

Blocked The Blocked Status is checked to view hour items that are blocked. Blocked items cannot be used in any logistics planning andfinancial transactions but can be used in product structure line, budget line and stock counts.

Discontinued The discontinued status is checked to view hour items that are discontinued. Discontinued items cannot be used in purchasesbut can be used for sales. They can also be used in product structure line, budget line and stock counts.

CHAPTER 3


Future The Future status is checked to view hour items that are being used in integrated environment with the e-Synergy. Such houritems are to be used in the future.

Inactive The Inactive status is checked to view hour items that are inactive. Inactive items cannot be used in logistic planning andfinancial transactions. They also cannot be used in product structure lines or budget lines, but can be used in stock counts.

Filter (Starts with) Selecting this option, launches a search by the initial characters that 'starts with', the characters that are entered by the userin the search criteria.

Filter (Contains) Selecting this option launces a search by the exact characters contained, as they are entered by the user in the search criteria.

Item code This is a text field for the user's input that allows searching for the hour item record as entered here in this field. This is the fieldof Item Code.

Description This is a text field for Item Description that is keyed in for searching the intended hour item record.



At the bottom Section of overview, records of hour items are displayed based on the either the default search selection or theuser's search selections. These records can be maintained and retrieved using the available functional buttons. Use the Openfunctional button to retrieve and access the Hour Item Maintenance screen .

In addition, a quick update of Hour Item's Coding can be performed within this functionality. Creating hour items that containthe same information as the existing hour items by copying saves a lot of time compared to creating hour items manually.Obsolete or not used hour items can be deleted automatically; and therefore records of hour items are more easily managed.The user can even create a New hour item using this functional button. Finally, quit the Hour Item maintenance functionality byclicking the Close functional button.

Please refer to the table below for more information:


Refresh This enables the user to refresh the overview screen for latest results based on the lastselected search criteria.

Recode This enables the user to Recode the Hour Item. For information see sub Section 3.8.3 -Recoding Item / Machine Item / Hour Item / Extra Charges Item.

Copy This enables the user to copy create new Hour item. For information see sub Section 3.8.2- Copy Creating New from Existing Item for Standard Item / Hour Item / Extra Charges Item.

Delete This enables the user to delete obsolete hour item. For information see sub Section 3.8.1 -Deleting Standard Item / Hour Item / Extra Charges Item.

Open This enables the user to retrieve the Hour item Master Card. For information see subSection 3.3.1

New This enables the user to create New Hour Item. For information see sub Section 3.3.1

Close This enables the user to exit and close from the Maintain Hour Item functionality.

CHAPTER 3


3.1 Creating and maintaining hours

Hour items must be defined, maintained and coordinated for effective monitoring of hours performed not only by employees inan organization but also by machines that do the production in an organization. When this feature is used, an overview of thesevarious hour items can be obtained. To create hour items you use the Maintain Hours functionality where you define hour itemsfor labor and machines with their attributes and specifications such as cost price and sales price.

To create a new hour item, click on the New button or to retrieve an existing hour item, click on the Open button

. Clicking either creates a new hour item or opens an existing hour item and displays the Hour Item Maintenance screenas shown in the example below:


The above shown hour item maintenance screen consists of a header cection and sections of 7 tab screens that are explainedas follows:

Header section

Hour Code Enter the Hour item Code. In the example above, Hour code "ASSEMBLAGE' is defined.

Description Key in the Hour item Description. In the example above, the Description is 'assemblage'. Thus, this hour item is used inassembling activities.

Created byBy default, the resource who created the hour item is displayed.

The appropriate item type must be selected according to the defined hour item. Ther 2 hour item types are as follows:

Labor Hour This is an hour item type which is performed by employees (resources). An example of labor hours is "Consultation hours".

Machine Hour This is the Machine hour item type which is performed by machines (assets).

In the example above, Assemblage hours are performed by employees, thus the hour item type Labor hour has been selected.

CHAPTER 3


Status

The default status of created hour items is active. You can deactivate an hour item by selecting the inactive status from the dropdown list.

Active This is the status of a hour item is where you can makes sales, purchases, manufacture, receive and deliver.

Blocked Blocked hour item status is used to enter BOM structure line for production, but it is blocked for all standard transactions.

Discontinued This hour item status can be used in sales, stock count and BOM structure but cannot be used in purchases of an item.

Inactive This hour item status can only be used in stock counts and cannot be used in planning of logistics, transactions and productionstructure line.

Future This hour item status is for internal use, where it can be linked with e-Synergy.


From & To

The the date field from and to is used in defining the validity of the hour item as to how long it can be used in activities.

For detailed explanation of each tab screen contained in the Hour Item Maintenance screen, see the respective tab screenexplanation that follows below:

Basics tab - Defines and maintains Hour Item's Sales & Cost pricelist, Business Unit (Warehouse), Hour item assortments,descriptions and Where - Used information.

CHAPTER 3


Basics tab is the initial tab that is displayed every time you open the hour item maintenance screen or when you create a newhour item. Basic details of an hour item are defined here. Fields and features of the basics tab screen are explained below:

Sales Pricelists

In the Basics tab, the default pricelists are selected. At the top Section at Pricelists, you can enter the sales price by the sales

unit selected for the default price lists. You can also define a pricelist by clicking on the Insert icon next to the pricelistsbox. The following screen is displayed:

The details of the above sales price definition screen are :


Item Item Code and Item Description is automatically displayed based selected Item Maintenance card.

Sales Price Enter the Sales Price of the Hour Item.

UnitSelect the sales unit from the lookup screen and enter unit's quantity. In the example for hour item "Assemblage", sales priceis 80.00 and sales unit is "uur".

Valid Select the validity of the hour item from date and to date by clicking on the lookup button. This would be the validity of theduration of days the hour item's pricelist is used.

Cost price This is not editable; this is displayed based on the cost price definition at the cost price field which is explained in the following.

MarkupThe markup percentage is automatically computed based on the sales price and cost price that was defined.

After defining a pricelist, click on the Save button. To close the above shown Pricelist definition screen, click on Close.

Define the following details for costing, tax and unit:

TaxesIf the defined hour item is taxable, select the appropriate tax code by clicking on the lookup button.

Cost Price Enter the cost price of the hour item.

Sales UnitEnter the Sales unit which can be a day, an hour, a minute, a second, amonth, or years .

CHAPTER 3


AssortmentsThere are also assortments which you can select as a criterion for the defined hour item. Before these assortments are selected,you must first define the assortments via menu path [Inventory, Items, Assortments] or via menu path [System, General,Settings, Item data Settings/.. Assortments]. The following screen is displayed:

In the above example, there are some assortments defined. To define an assortment, enter an assortment name, for example,

"Production" instead of assortment 1. Next, click on the Tool icon next to the assortment text field. The following screen isdisplayed:


On this screen you can define lists of properties for the defined assortment. To do this, click on the Insert icon on the leftnext to the properties box.. The properties specification screen is displayed, as shown in the below:

CHAPTER 3


In the Assortments: Properties screen, enter the property by defining the property code and description and click the Savebutton. You can repeat entering the complete lists of properties by clicking the insert icon and repeating the steps and thensaving. After all entries have been made, return to the assortment list by clicking the close button.

Notice that when an assortment list is defined, a green tick is shown next to the assortment text field, as shown in the aboveexample. After completion, click the save button and close.

You can see the defined assortments in the extra tab screen, as shown in the example below:

With these kinds of assortments, you can define hour items with more specific criteria which give more detailed informationabout an hour item.


Business UUnitThe business unit box displays one or more warehouse(s) which is where the hour items can be used.

To link a warehouse to the Hour item, click on the insert icon displayed at the top right corner of the business unit panel.The following screen is then displayed:

The above Items per warehouse screen where you can link warehouses to an hour item, contains a number of details that arerequired for input. These details are as follows:

CHAPTER 3


Item Item Code and Item Description are automatically displayed here based on the retrieved hour item maintenance card or newlydefined hour item. This field is not editable.

Warehouse At the Warehouse field, select the warehouse that you wish to link to the hour item by clicking on the lookup button. Prior tothe selection of a specific warehouse, the warehouse must be defined via menu path [Inventory/WarehouseManagement/Warehouses].

Default: Location If there are locations in the selected warehouse, select the appropriate default warehouse in the Default: Location field.

Stock details

Minimum PO levelAt the Stock section, key in Minimum PO level, which is the least quantity of hour item suggested the purchase order is entered.

Maximum Key in the Maximum level, that is the maximum stock level of the hour item in the warehouse location.

StockThis field is not editable. This is automatically calculated based on the available stock by logistics transactions that are donedaily .

Date last counted This field is not editable. It automatically displays the date when last the stock count was performed. This applies more tophysical items rather than to hour items supplied by resources (employees/ contractors/vendors/agents)


Counting Cycle

Order Policy Code

Sales DetailsTime of deliveryKey in the lead time taken to deliver/fulfill when a request is entered for the defined hour item.

Planner Select the Resource ID who is the planner in the linked Warehouse.

Editing Item by Warehouse

Editing or making changes to the details of a warehouse already linked to the hour item can be done using the Edit icon

. This then displays the Items by Warehouse screen as shown in the example above. The screen details are the same asdescribed above.

Deleting Item by Warehouse

Deleting the link of a warehouse already linked to the hour item can be done using the Delete icon. Clicking on the deletebutton prompts a message as shown below:

Click on the No button to cancel deletion. Click on the Yes button to confirm deletion. This then automatically deletes the linkof the selected warehouse.

CHAPTER 3


Project ((Where UUsed)The Project (Where-Used) box displays where and on which project is the hour item is being used.

When there are transactions of the hour item within a project, then the project code and project description will be listed here.

The user may retrieve the relevant project maintenance card by clicking Edit icon displayed at the right hand corner ofthe Project (Where used) panel. Clicking on the edit icon displays the following example of the Project maintenance card, asretrieved for the above displayed project code:

Retrieving the Where-Used Project's Financial Card within the hour item's maintenance card is also easyily done by clicking on


the Project Financial card icon, which displays the following example of financial card for the above shown project:

CHAPTER 3


TextTo key in more detailed descriptions such as notes or remarks in the hour item maintenance card, the text panel is alreadyavailable, as shown below:

Description iin mmultiple llanguages

Enter Descriptions in the respective Description [Language] field, which will be understood by relevant parties.


Purchase / Sales tab - This tab screen allows for the configuring of sales and purchase attributes and links relevant supplierslinked to the hour item.

Attributes: Sales

Sales: (Can be used in sales transactions) Checking this states that the hour item can be used in sales transactions. If it is unchecked, it is impossible to be used in sales.

No discount: (Not allowed to give discount)Checking this states that the hour item cannot be given a discount. If it is unchecked, a discount can be given to the hour item.

CHAPTER 3


Attributes: Purchase

BuyChecking this states that the hour item is a purchase (buy) item. If it is unchecked, entering purchase orders for the hour itemis not allowed.

Requires approved supplier Checking this states that the supplier linked to the hour item can be approved. This enables the Approved supplier checkbox inthe hour item supplier linkage screen.

VariantClicking on this Variant icon launches the Variant Item creation screen. For information see Section 3.6 & Section3.6.1 onMaintain Variant and Variant Item Creation.

Suppliers Linkage overview panel

SupplierCreditor's account number and name.

Main supplier When this is checked, it indicates that it is the main supplier out of many suppliers of the defined item.

Approved supplier When this is checked it indicates whether the selected supplier was approved by the management. Purchase from a supplierwho was not approved may not be possible.

Currency ccodeCurrency used by the supplier for the defined item. Purchases from the selected supplier would be in the defined currency.

Price This is the Supplier's price of the defined item per unit.


Purchase unitThis is the Unit of measure of the item when it is being purchased from the selected supplier.

PO sizeThis is the quantity of the purchase order as per purchase order entry linked to the supplier. This would be a default value pre-filled in the purchase order entry when the linked supplier is selected for the defined item.

Purchase PPrice ((piece) Purchase price per piece as entered in the Price field which will be the default value in the purchase order entry linked to thesupplier for the item.

VATValue added tax for the supplier for the defined item. This will be pre-filled in the purchase order entry linked to the supplier forthe item.

Supplier's item code Item's code defined at supplier site. This code can be different from the defined item code.

Delivery Time This is the Number of days taken to receive the item after the purchase order entry.

CHAPTER 3


Functional Icon for Supplier Linkage

Linking Supplier to the Item & Making entry/changes to the Purchases details

— Insert icon, to insert link of supplier to the defined item. Clicking on the icon button shown above displays thefollowing screen:

Item Code Item code is pre-filled and it is dimmed, based on the created/retrieved Item Maintenance Card.

Supplier Select the Supplier (Account Payable/Creditor Account) by clicking on the lookup button. This is a mandatory field, an importantfield where the Supplier is linked to the Item.


Approved Supplier This is enabled when the 'Requires approved supplier' at the Purchase Attributes is checked. When this is enabled, it can bechecked to indicate that the supplier being linked is an approved supplier.

Supplier's Item Code This field defaults to the user defined Item Code. This must be changed according to the code used by the Supplier if adifference exists.

Bar Code If the Item has a specific Bar Code supplied by the Supplier, then enter the Bar Code characters here, otherwise this field canbe left blank.

Warranty PeriodsEnter the Number of warranty days allocated to the supplier being linked.

Supplier's Purchases Details

Purchase unitSelect the Purchase Unit used in purchasing from the linked supplier. Example of Purchase Units can be "Box", "Piece", "Kg","Liter", etc. The correct Purchase Unit must be specified for accurate calculation of logistics transactions.

Conversion UnitThis defaults to value "1" which means purchased in 1 piece and sold in 1 piece. It is important to specify the correctConversion Unit when Purchase Unit and Sales Unit differ. For example: a box of chocolates is purchased which is then sold inpieces. The box contains 1 dozen pieces (12 pieces), therefore it is important that the conversion value to be entered with value"12" with Purchase Unit as "Box" and Sales Unit as "pieces", for accurate logistics calculation.

CurrencySelect the Currency used in Purchasing from the linked supplier. When no specific currency is selected, the default currency isused as specified in the Basics tab screen.

CHAPTER 3


Price Enter the Purchase Price offered by the linked Supplier.

VAT Select appropriate Value Added Tax Code if the purchases from the linked supplier are subject to tax..

PO size Enter the default Quantity of Item when purchases are made to the linked supplier.

Time of DeliveryEnter the required Purchases Lead Time when purchases are made from the linked supplier.

After keying in all the details, click on the Save button . To close the screen, click on the Close button . To continue

linking more suppliers, click on the New button .

Editing Supplier Linkage

— Edit icon, to amend the linked information of item by supplier.

To make changes to the Purchase Details of already linked Supplier, click on the Edit icon shown above.


Selecting a linked supplier record and clicking on the Edit icon, displays the Items by Supplier screen as shown below:

The fields are the same as described above. The user can make changes to the required detail fields . Click the Save button

to save the changes made and to close the screen click the Close Button.

CHAPTER 3


Deleting the Supplier Link from the Item

— Delete icon, to delete the supplier link to the item.

To Delete the Supplier Link to an Item, select the already linked supplier record as displayed in the Suppliers tab screen, andclick on the Delete icon as shown above. The following message is prompted:

Click on the Yes button to continue deletion. Otherwise click on the No button to cancel deletion.

Making specific Supplier the Main Supplier Status

— To select a supplier from the list as the main supplier of the defined item.


To make the linked Supplier the Main Supplier to the Item, select the already linked supplier record displayed in the Supplierstab and click on the above shown icon. Clicking on this "Main" icon automatically marks the selected supplier record as theMain Supplier. Making the Supplier the main supplier is indicated with a green tick in the Suppliers tab screen, as shown inthe example below:

CHAPTER 3


Accessing Supplier's Financial Information

— To retrieve the creditor's financial card.

Financial Information of a Supplier which is already linked to the Item and can be accessed by using the Card icon shown above.To obtain an overview of financial transactions of the linked Supplier, select the linked supplier record displayed in theSuppliers tab screen and click on the Card icon. This automatically retrieves the Financial Card per Supplier Account, as shownin the example below:

Financial tab - This is an important configuration for specifying relevant financial general ledger accounts to the respectivefinancial settings to account costs, revenue, realization and salary payment of the hour item.


Below is an example of the financial tab screen of an hour item master card:

Financial details of this tab screen are as follows:

Financial General Ledger Links

This is the financial Section is where you link appropriate financial group and G/L accounts for Revenue, Salary Payment andRealizations. These are as follows:

CHAPTER 3


Group Select the appropriate Financial Group for the hour item being maintained/defined. Each Financial Group is individuallyspecified with relevant G/L accounts, as shown in the screen below:

Revenue For Revenue, select the appropriate G/L account such as 'Revenue Sales' in the Profit & Loss section.

SalaryFor Salary Payment, select the appropriate G/L account such as 'Gross Wages' in the Profit & Loss section.


RealizationsFor Realizations, select the appropriate G/L account such as 'Realizations' in the Profit & Loss section.By having selected appropriate General ledger accounts for the respective settings, every time there are financial transactions,for example when the hour items are realized, Gross Wages G/L account is credited and G/L account for Realizations is debited.See the example of financial entries below, when hour item Software Development is realized:

Activity tab - This tab screen provides an overview of all planning and logistics transactions that have taken place for the houritem. This tab functionality is similar to the Standard Items, for information see Section 3.1.1 — Creating/Opening StandardItem - Activity tab

Resources tab - Linking relevant Resources to the Hour Item. This is enabled when Hour item is a Labor Hour.

The resources tab is the screen shown below, which indicates that there are already some employees linked to the hour item.

CHAPTER 3


Linking Resource to the Hour Item

To view records of resources or link resources who provide and realize the defined hour item, use the resources tab screen. Inthe example above, there is already number of resources who provide the hour item "Software Development". Notice that eachresource has its own cost per hour. Every time the hour item is realized then cost of resources performing the hour item is takeninto account.

— To link a new resource to this hour item click the Add icon. The following screen is displayed where you can selectresources to link to the hour item. To link a resource, select the resource and click on the Select button.


Linking All Resources to Hour Item

— To link all resources to the hour item, click on this button. The system automatically adds all the resources to thehour item. Clicking on the Add All icon then prompts the following message:

Click on the No button to cancel linking all resources. Click on the Yes button to confirm linking all resources to the hour item,which then displays the following progress of the linking process:

Within seconds, the progress screen disappears and all resources are automatically linked to the hour item in the resourcestab screen.

CHAPTER 3


Editing Resource's / Hour Details

— To edit the already linked resource per hour item, you can make use of this button by selecting the particular resourceand click on this icon. This displays the following screen:

The above shown screen is where details of hours per resources details can be defined, by specifying appropriate selections tothe settings. These details are as follows:

Item Code Item Code and Item Description is automatically displayed here based on the defined Hour item in the maintenance card. Thisfield is not editable.


Resource Resource ID and Resource Name is automatically displayed here based on the selected record of resource linked to the houritem. This field is not editable.

Supplier Item Code Key in the Supplier's Item Code which is a term recognized by the suppliers. This may be different from the defined Item codewhich is used internally.

Bar code If there is any specific Bar Code for the hour item being linked to the resource, then enter the Bar Code number.

Purchase UnitSelect the Purchase Unit used which may vary for each resource. Enter the quantity of purchases correlating to the selectedpurchase unit. Note: The Sales unit is not editable and is displayed based on the defined sales unit in the Basics tab screen.

CurrencySelect the currency code being used for the hour by resource, which also may vary for each resource.

Price Enter the Price per Unit for the hour item being purchased from the resource. This also varies for each resource.

PO size Key in the default Purchase Order Size which will be specified automatically when the purchase order entry is done for theresource.

After entering correct details of hour by resource, click on the Save button.

To continue linking more resources to the hour item and simultaneously specify hour by resource details, click on the Newbutton. To exit from the hour/resource screen, click on the Close button.

CHAPTER 3


Delete the Resource Linkage from Hour Item

— To delete/un-link a resource, select a resource and click on this icon. This then prompts the following message:

Click on the No button to cancel deletion of the link. Click on the Yes button to confirm deletion of the link, which thenautomatically deletes the link of the selected resource.


Obtaining Resource's Financial Card

— To view financial details of a resource, you can easily select a resource and click on this icon. Below is an exampleof the Resources Financial Card which can be accessed from within resources tab screen:

Machines tab - Linking relevant Machines to the Hour Item. This is enabled when Hour item is a Machine Hour.

CHAPTER 3


Below is an example of Machine tab screen, which has already been linked to machine assets:

When you define an hour item of the machine type, then the machine tab screen is enabled, ready for you to define machinesserials (assets) to the machine hour item. Before the machine serial is linked to the machine hour item, the machine item andthe machine serial must be defined in the machines maintenance screen via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Machines] and[Manufacturing, Setup, Item]. For information on Machines and Standard Items, see relevant Sections.


Linking New Machine Serial (Asset) to the Hour Item

To link machine serial (asset) to the machine hour item, click on the Add icon on the left hand corner of machines panel.This displays the machine lookup screen as shown in the example below:

Select the relevant machine record and click on the Select button, which then automatically creates the link to the machine houritem.

Deleting the Machine Linkage

— To delete or unlink the already linked machine from the machine hour item, select the machine record in the machinetab screen and click on this delete icon. This automatically deletes the link of the selected machine serial item.

Document tab - This tab enables the user to attach relevant documents to the hour item.

CHAPTER 3


Below is the Document tab screen of the hour item master card:

The Document tab is a similar functionality to the Items Master Card Document tab. See Section 3.1.1 on Creating/OpeningStandard Item - Document tab for relevant information.

Analysis tab - Analysis Overview of Hour Item Statistics.


Below is an example of the Analysis tab screen that shows the logistics and financial information by period

There are selection fields and display details shown in the above Analysis tab screen. These details are as follows:

Selection Fields

Business UnitTo obtain analysis information of a specific warehouse, select the business unit which is the warehouse. By default the businessunit pre-selected is "All" which displays analysis information for all warehouses/business units.

Financial Year To obtain analysis information of a specific financial year, select the financial year from the drop down list. The default financialyear is the current financial year.

CHAPTER 3


Display Fields

Period This column displays all financial periods for the selected financial year in rows.

Quantity (Sold) This column displays the Hour Item's Quantity Sold for each period.

Amount (Sold) This column displays the Hour Item's Total Amount Sold for each period.

Planned: SalesThis column displays the Hour Item's Planned Sales Orders Amount for each period. (This is Sales Orders entered but yet to becompleted).

Totals Fields

Quantity (Sold)This field displays Hour Item's Total Quantity Sold for the entire financial year. (Accumulated Quantity of all Periods).

Amount (Sold)This field displays Hour Item's Total Amount Sold for the entire financial year. (This is the Accumulated Quantity of all Periods).

Budget (Sales)This field displays the Hour Item's Planned (Budgeted) Sales Orders Amount for the entire financial year. (This is the PlannedSales Orders Accumulated Amount for all Periods).


Functional button

New BudgetThis allows user to define budgets to Revenue and Costs for the Hour Item. Clicking on this button displays the following screen:

To specify Budgets for Revenue and Costs to the hour item, there are fields that must be entered or selected for correctallocation to the defined budgets to the projects, account, cost center and other relevant details. These details are as follows:

ItemItem Code and Item Description are automatically displayed. This field is not editable.

Budget SScenario Select a Budget Scenario for the current financial year. Prior to selecting this, the Budget Scenario must be defined byspecifying the financial year via menu path [System . Finance, Budget Scenario].

CHAPTER 3


Date Select the date for the budgets being defined.

CostsEnter the Budgeted Costs Quantity. Specifying Quantity field automatically pre-calculates the Budgeted Costs Amount. The G/Laccount for Costs is pre-filled based on the "Realizations G/L account" specified at the Basics tab and this field is not editable.

Revenue Enter the Budgeted Revenue Quantity. Specifying the quantity field automatically pre-calculates the Budgeted Revenue Amount.The G/L account for Revenue is pre-filled based on the "Revenue G/L account" specified at the Basics tab and this field is noteditable.

Budget Allocation Details

Resource Select the Resource who entered the Budgets.

Debtor Select the Debtor Account to whom the budgets are allocated .

ProjectSelect the Project to which the budgets are allocated .

Warehouse Based on the selected Project, the Warehouse is automatically pre-filled.

Cost Center Select the Cost Center to which the Budgets are allocated .

Cost UnitSelect the Cost Unit of the Cost Center to which the budgets are allocated .


Description Enter the Description for the defined Budgets.

After making relevant entries and selection, click on the Save button. To continue creating more budgets for allocation to otherprojects and accounts, then click on the New button. To exit from this screen, click on the Close button.

Extra tab - Maintains extra information and hour item's assortments. The extra tab contains extra free fields for text, numbers,date and check boxes where you can enter extra information to the hour item which are not defined in other tab screens.

Below is the screen of the extra tab with extra free fields that are undefined:

CHAPTER 3


Define Extra Labels

To define labels for the extra fields so that you can enter extra information, go to menu path [System, General, Free fields]. Thefollowing screen is displayed:

To view free fields for items maintenance, select "Item" from the 'Table' drop down list. These free fields do not make sense asin "extra fields in the extra tab screen", therefore you can define these extra fields into meaningful labels into which you canlater enter information when defining the hour item.


You can define any number of extra fields for your own convenience. After free fields are defined with meaningful labels, youwill notice that defined labels are displayed accordingly in the extra tab screen. See diagram below for an example of extra tabfield where fields are defined with meaningful labels:

By doing this, you have extra choices to key in more information of an hour item being defined, as shown in the example above.

CHAPTER 3


Log tab — Keeping Logs of changes with timestamp.

The log tab is the screen that tracks changes made in the value fields for the hour item. Below is the log screen example oflog for an hour item:

The following are the details that are displayed in the Log tab screen:

Field NName This displays the Field Name that was changed/amended.

Old value This displays the old value of the field, before the change.

New value This displays the new value of the field, after the change.


Full Name This displays the Resource Name who made the changes.

Date / TimeThis displays the Date and Time when the changes were made.

4. Maintaining extra charges

Introduction

Extra Charges are not physical items or parts. Extra charges are a kind of "Phantom"; they cannot be seen and they serve ascharges for miscellaneous costs during sales or productions. Extra Charges to Sales or Productions must also be recorded andincluded in the Order lines and BOM structure lines, so that they can be accounted for. Therefore, not only standard items orpart items should be maintained, but there should also be maintenance of various types of extra charges within the system. Inthe Exact Globe 2003 system, via the E-Manufacturing module, the Extra Charges Maintenance functionality is used, whichrecords and maintains not only extra charges but it also gives the user access to Payment Conditions and Shipping Methods.Payment Conditions and Shipping Methods are also a kind of "Phantom" item that are charged to customers. PaymentConditions are charged for the purpose of Sales Payment Collections and Shipping Methods are used for Collection of ShippingCosts charged by the Shipping company.

The following explains the Extra Charges Items Maintenance functionality. Take note that the Extra Charge Item's MaintenanceCard is similar to the Standard Item's Maintenance Card consisting of tab screens that have been explained in the ItemMaintenance Card documents. These are explained later in the Open or New functional button. For information, please see therelevant Sections.

CHAPTER 3


Following via menu path [Manufacturing, Means, Extra Charges], the Extra Charges Maintenance functionality is triggered asfollows:

In the Main Overview screen there are search and filter fields, overview records of extra charge items and functional buttons.These are as follows:

Search & Filter

Search Click on this button to execute the search & filter process based on the latest search input and selections.

Clear Click on this button to reset all of the user's search input and selections and set search criteria value to default value.


RowsThis is the number of rows to be displayed at the display panel that shows overview of extra charge items records. The numberof prefilled rows defaults to '100'. You may key in the desired number of rows you wish to view.

Warehouse Select from drop down list, specify the Warehouse to view extra charge items that belong to the selected Warehouse. There isno default selection, which means it displays extra charges items of all warehouses.

Filter Click on the Filter button to obtain in-depth filter options. Clicking on the Filter button displays the following filter options:

Item AssortmentsUserdefined Item Assortments are displayed as the in-depth filter options. Item Assortments can be defined via menu path[System, General, Settings, Item Data Settings] or [Inventory, Items, Assortments].

StatusSelecting a specific status displays extra charges with the selected status. One or more statuses can be checked to view theintended records of Extra charges items.

Active Extra charges items with an 'Active' status can be sold, purchased, delivered, received, and manufactured/assembled.

Blocked Extra charges items with a 'Blocked' status cannot be used in any logistics planning and financial transactions but can be usedin product structure line, budget line and stock counts.

Discontinued Extra charges items with a 'Discontinued' status cannot be used in purchases but can be used for sales. They can also be usedin product structure line, budget line and stock counts.

Future Extra charges items with a 'Future' status are to be used in future for integration with e-Synergy, a complete businessmanagement and collaboration web based application.

CHAPTER 3


Inactive Extra charges items with an 'Inactive' status cannot be used in logistic planning and financial transactions. They also cannotbe used in product structure lines, or budget lines but can be used in stock counts.

Attributes


Make This attribute indicates the presence of a Product structure (Bill of Materials) for this item, which can be used during theassembly, manufacturing or delivery process. Only items with structures can be produced.

BuyThis identifies items that can be purchased from a supplier. Only items that have one or more suppliers linked will have thisattribute marked. Both make and purchase attributes can be marked to the same item at the same time, thereby enabling theuser to decide on a case-by-case basis whether to manufacture or purchase the item.


SerialThis identifies the item as a serial item. Serial items are always used with the quantity 1 (one) as they are unique and indivisible.A serial item can have serial numbers linked that have an activation date and an end date and can be (temporarily) blocked. Itis possible to link notes and electronic documents to a serial number as well as item specific characteristics. An item can notbe both a serial item and a batch item.


Filter: Starts with Selecting this option allows a search by characters that start with, as they are entered at the search criteria.

Filter: ContainsSelecting this option, allows a search by characters that contain exactly the search criteria as entered.

Item Code Enter the Item Code to search Extra charges record per entered Item code.

Description Enter the Item Description to search Extra charges record per entered Item Description.

Overview Records at Display Panel

There are records of Extra Charges items displayed at the Overview display panel per selected search criteria. These records aredisplayed with details in columns as follows:

Item Code This displays Extra Charges Item Code. It also displays Payment Condition Code and Shipping Method Code.

Item Description This displays Extra Charges Item Description.

CHAPTER 3


StatusThis displays Extra Charges Item Status as follows:

SalesA checkbox that indicates whether the Extra Charges Item is a 'Sales' item.

BuyA checkbox that indicates whether the Extra Charges Item is a 'Buy' item.

Make A checkbox that indicates whether the Extra Charges Item is a 'Make' item.

SerialA checkbox that indicates whether the Extra Charges Item is a 'Serial' item.

Sales price of sales package This displays the Sales price per Sales Package.

Main Warehouse This displays the Extra Charge Item's Warehouse Code which is 'Main'.

Actions with Functional ButtonsManaging Extra Charges Items is made simple and easy with the use of following functional buttons. Click on the respectivefunctional button to obtain the document that provides detailed explanation of its functionality.


Refer to table below for referral information:

4.1 Creating and maintaining extra charges

Creating new Extra Charges item is done using the New functional button, which displays the Extra Charges Item Maintenancescreen, similar to the Item Maintenance Card that was described earlier. But note that creating extra charges item can only bedone following via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Extra Charges] and even when it is similar to the Item Maintenance Card,extra charges cannot be created via the Standard Item Maintenance menu path. To retrieve the Extra Charges Item Maintenancecard for maintenance and overview, use the Open functional button .


Batch updates This button enables the user to Batch Update the Extra Charges Item. For information see sub Section 3.8.4 - BatchUpdate Items & Extra Charges Item.

Recode This button the enables user to Recode Extra Charges Item. For information see sub Section 3.8.3 - Recoding Item/ Hour Item / Extra Charges Item.

Copy This button enables the user to Copy Create New Extra Charges Item. For information see sub Section 3.8.2 - CopyCreate New from Existing Item for Standard Item / Hour Item / Extra Charges Item.

Delete This button enables the user to delete obsolete extra charges item. For information see sub Section 3.8.1 - DeletingStandard Item / Hour Item / Extra Charges Item.

Open This button enables retrieval of the Extra Charges Item Master Card. For information see sub Section 3.4.1 -Creating New and Opening Existing Extra Charges Item.

New This button enables creation of the New Extra Charges Item. For information see sub Section 3.4.1 - Creating Newand Opening Existing Extra Charges Item.

Close This button enables the user to exit and close from the Maintain Extra Charges Item functionality.

CHAPTER 3


The details contained in this screen are similar to Item Maintenance Card, please refer to Item Maintenance Card Sub Section3.1.1 for more information.


Even though it is similar there are some differences as follows:

AttributesThere is one attribute which differs compared to the Standard Item Maintenance Card. These are described as follows:

Print (Order)Checking this allows printing of the Extra Charges item in the Sales Order.

Applications using the Extra Charges Item

SALES ORDER ENTRY

Extra Charges items are charged as extra charges to customers. When Extra charges items are specified in the Sales Order, the"Sales Price" of the Extra Charges Item is picked as the amount charged to the customer in the Sales Order. This is whether theExtra Charges Item is of Sales item or not. Extra Charges can be entered via the Specific button in the Sales Order Entry screen. Clicking on the Specific button displaysthe following screen:

Extra Charges Item can be entered at the Item column or selected from the lookup screen by pressing the PF5 key. Entering theExtra Charges Item can then be calculated by clicking on the Calculate button. Clicking on the OK button then closes the Specificscreen. The calculated Extra Charges is then displayed at the Totals Section of the Sales Order Entry screen:

CHAPTER 3


COMMISSION INVOICE

This is used for Commission charges paid to sales employees. Extra Charges Items can be automatically applied to the salesorders or entered manually to the sales orders for generating commission invoices. The "Sales Price" of the Extra Charges Itemis picked as the Commission Invoice Amount. If the Extra Charges Item contains a defined Sales Price and the Percentage is defined at the Extra tab screen, then theCommission Invoice Amount is calculated based on the Percentage defined. Formula = Sales Order Net Amount * Percentage.


E-PRODUCTION BOM

These are Extra Charges used in the Bill of Material for extra charges to costs of manufacturing. The "Percentage" at the Extratab screen of the Extra Charges Item Maintenance Card is picked to calculate the Extra Charges to the Costs of Manufacturing.The following screen is the example of defined BOM where extra charges item is specified:

The cost price of the Extra Charges item is automatically calculated based on the Formula - Extra Charge Cost Price = Total CostPrice * Percentage defined.

5. Maintaining bills of material (BOM)

Introduction

Bills of Material allow you to structure a finished item (parent item) with its parts (child item). Child items could be physicalparts, labor hours or machine hours that are used to assemble or make a complete finished item. Bills of material not onlyprovide you with an overview of which parts are required in assembling or making a parent item but also gives you the costprice calculation for the cost of goods manufactured. Bills of Material are essentially important to structure the required rawmaterial, capacity, required labor hours & machine hours that allow sequential process identification in producing the finishedproduct.

CHAPTER 3


Bills of Material can be created and maintained in the BOM maintenance screen via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, BOM]which displays the following screen:

The above screen details are as follows:

Search This is a functional button that allows searching and filtering of the intended BOM records based on the user selected searchcriteria.

Clear Clicking on this will reset all selection made on the search criteria..

RowsThis allows the user to key in 'Number of Rows' for BOM records to be displayed at the bottom results section.


Search Criteria

Warehouse This allows selection of a Warehouse from the drop down list, to obtain the BOM records that belongs to the selectedWarehouse.

Filter: Starts With When you select this, the system filters the BOM record that "Starts with" the entered value in Item Code and Description.

Filter: ContainsWhen you select this, the system filters BOM record that "Contains" the exact characters entered in the Item Code andDescription.

Item Code Enter the BOM Item Code for quick search of the BOM Item that you wish to view.

Description Enter the BOM Item Description for easy search of the BOM Item that you wish to obtain.

Filter Clicking on this button expands the search options, that displays "Status", "Type", "Attributes" search criteria for in detailedsearching. These are described below:

Status

Active The status of an active item can be checked to view item purchases that are active. Active items can be sold, purchased,delivered, received, and manufactured/assembled.

Blocked The status of a blocked item can be checked to view item purchases that are blocked. Blocked items cannot be used in anylogistics planning and financial transactions but can be used in product structure line, budget line and stock counts.

CHAPTER 3


Discontinued The status of a discontinued item can be checked to view item purchases that are discontinued. Discontinued items cannot beused in purchases but can be used for sales. They also can be used in product structure line, budget line and stock counts.

Inactive The status of an inactive item can be checked to view item purchases that are inactive. Inactive items cannot be used in logisticplanning and financial transactions. They also cannot be used in product structure lines or budget lines but they can be usedin stock counts.

Type

Standard An item of the Standard type can represent either physical goods or a service. The item can be purchased, processed and/ordelivered, depending on the attribute of the item. An item can have multiple attributes.

Labor hour An item of the Labor Hour type represents a unit of time for labor with a resource, a cost price and a sales price attached.

Machine hour An item of the Machine Hour type represents a unit of time for a production tool with an asset and a cost price attached.

Phantom An item of the Phantom type is used for registering a logical group of items, activities or costs. A number of Phantom Items arepredefined. They are related to Payment Conditions and Shipping Methods.

Bulk issue When the item is part of a Product structure, the bulk issue type determines how the cost price of this item will influence thecost price of the main item during assembly or production. An item of the "bulk issue" type can only be used in productstructures.

Contract item Contract items are related to Service management.


Item AttributesThe Item attributes determine precisely when and how a particular item may be used. The following attributes are described.


No discountThis attribute allows you to enable or prevent sales pricelists to be entered for this item and enables or prevents a discount onthe item while entering a sales transaction.

StockThis attribute determines whether or not quantities received and fulfilled are to be viewed for the item involved. Items can beseen as Stock or Costs. In both cases the quantities can be retrieved. Items that are seen as costs but do not represent aphysical item can be excluded. All standard items are booked on a 'Purchase general ledger account' of any sub account at themoment of receipt and are posted from this same general ledger account at fulfillment on to a 'Fulfillment general ledgeraccount'.

From StockEnabling this attribute determines that the related item cannot be fulfilled in the case of insufficient stock . It is not possibleto create a purchase order based on the sales order with the back-to-back-order functionality.

TextItems that require variable extra text next to the item description or a predefined text which exceeds the item description canbe marked with the attribute Text. Activating the text attribute will allow the text to appear on quotations, orders or invoices.The text can be modified during entry on a case-by-case basis. When selecting the attribute "text" the attribute "sales" ismandatory.

Divisible This enables entry of the quantity of this item in decimals.

CHAPTER 3


Make This attribute indicates the presence of a Product structure (Bill of Materials) for this item, which can be used for assembly,manufacturing or the delivery process. Only items with structures can be produced.

BuyThis identifies items that can be purchased from a supplier. Only items that have one or more suppliers linked will have thisattribute marked. Both make and purchase attributes can be marked to the same item at the same time, thereby enabling theuser to decide on a case-by-case basis whether to manufacture or purchase the item.

SerialThis identifies the item as a serial item. Serial items are always used with the quantity 1 (one) as they are unique and indivisible.A serial item can have serial numbers linked, can have an activation date and an end date and can be (temporarily) blocked.It is possible to link notes and electronic documents to a serial number as well as item specific characteristics. An item can notbe both a serial item and a batch item.


Explode at fulfillmentIf the item has the "make" attribute set, the "explode at fulfillment" attribute presents the components registered in the Bill OfMaterials of the item instead of the item itself at fulfillment. Also this attribute activates the possibility to add conditions to thefulfillment of the item. Instead of having each assembled item in stock, the individual parts are gathered or assembled at themoment of fulfillment. The individual parts and delivery conditions for the item can be registered in the Bill of Materials.

PartThis indicates that the Item is used as a part in a Product structure.

AssetWhen the item has assets related transactions the item gets marked as an asset item.



Based on the above selected search criteria, records of BOM items are displayed at the bottom Section of the above shownscreen. The displayed BOM records can be selected for performing functions such as retrieval of its maintenance screen,deletion of existing BOM item, Copying of existing and Creation of New BOM.

Refer to table below for referral details on the respective functional buttons:


Copy This button enables Copy Creating New BOM from existing BOM. Forinformation see sub Section 3.5.3 - Copy Create New BOM.

Open This button enables retrieval of the BOM Creation / Master screen. Forinformation see sub Section 3.5.1 Creating New or Opening Existing BOM.

Delete This button enables deleting obsolete BOM item. For information see subSection 3.5.2 Deleting an Existing BOM.

New This button enables Creating New BOM Structure. For information see subSection 3.5.1 Creating New or Opening Existing BOM.

Close This button enables the user to exit and close the Maintain BOM functionality.

CHAPTER 3


5.1 Creating and maintaining BOM's

You may create a bill of material structure for an existing parent item or just create a new parent item from the item lookupscreen. It is important that correct product structure is created. This is the Bill of Material that contains not only the part itemsbut also takes into consideration the sequence, batch quantity, number of days, conditions per part item, quantity per part itemand relevant instructions, et cetera. Use the Bill of Material creation screen to structure and maintain these elements for an EndProduct.

DetailsVia [Manufacturing, Setup, BOM], click on the New button. The Bill of Material creation screen is displayed as shown below:

Details of the above Bill of Material creation screen are as follows:


Item At the Item field, select the parent item from the item lookup screen by clicking on the lookup button.

Version Enter the version of the BOM structure. If the BOM being created is the main BOM, then the box Main version is checkedautomatically. This check box is not editable, but it is automatically updated based on the version of BOM being created. If theversion is the 2nd version of a BOM, then the Main version check box is automatically unchecked.

InstructionsThe instructions paper clip button allows you to attach documents containing instructions for the BOM being created.

Effective Date The effective date of BOM is pre-filled with the current date; you may change this.

Expiry Date You may also select an expiry date of the BOM structure. After the date of expiry, the structured BOM will not be valid.

StatusThe status of BOM is automatically updated to Active.

Drawing Number Key in Drawing code/No for the BOM structure being defined.

Batch QuantityEnter the batch quantity, which is by default '1'.

Cost Price Cost Price of the Bill of Material is automatically calculated and is displayed here.

Cost Center The Cost Center to which the BOM cost allocation is distributed.

CHAPTER 3


Sales Price This is the Sales Price as quoted in the Parent Item.

Lead Time This is the amount of Time taken to complete the Parent Item of the BOM.

Click on the following link to perform the respective steps of BOM creation:

Structure tab - To create BOM structure

Introduction

The structure tab screen is used for creating BOM structure. This screen is also retrieved to obtain an overview of the existingBOM structure. The default screen that is displayed on the BOM creation screen is the structure tab screen, see diagram below:


Details required and used in the Structure tab are as follows:

Condition

AlwaysThe condition "Always" indicates that the selected child item is fixed and is always present in order to make the parent item.

PhantomThe condition "Phantom" is an item that has its own BOM structure , which is then exploded in the production order when theparent item is ordered.

Once per DeliveryThe condition "Once per delivery" indicates that the item is used every time the parent item is delivered.

Once per DebtorThe condition "once per debtor" means that the item is used once for each debtor. It must be a standard item and cannot be aphantom item.

Waste The condition "Waste" is the item that will not be used in making the parent item but it is measured for efficiency of theproduction process.

Steps for BOM Structure creation

1. To enter the parts of a BOM structure, select the appropriate condition.

2. Select item by pressing PF5 key and press tab key to the next line. Take note that Items must be defined prior to selectingthem in here. Note that the items criteria such as item type, item status, item attribute are all pre-filled, based on the item'smaster data.

3. Quantity of items selected defaults to 1. You may key in the actual quantity required to produce the parent item. The systemautomatically calculates Items cost price based on the price per quantity defined in the Item master data and by the actualrequired quantity entered.

CHAPTER 3


4. Select the cost centre by pressing PF5 key.

5. Key in the Days No, in which the items will be used in the entire BOM.

6. The extra column is where you can enter extra meaningful information to each item line of the BOM structure, by clicking onthe icon at the extra column.

7. You can also attach documents for each item in the BOM structure by clicking on the paper clip button. Any additional notesor remarks can be entered in the notes screen when you click once in the Notes cell for each item line of the BOM structure.

After complete creation click the Save button.

Planning tab - To view BOM sequential planning based on the BOM structure.


Introduction

The planning tab shows you an overview of what is planned in the Bill of Material structure. See the diagram below, an exampleof the planning screen:

The quantity planned for parent item is 10, entered at the top, thus the planning for each of the parts (child items) for Productionday is calculated automatically and is based on the quantity of child parts entered in the Bill of Material structure. The planningshows the quantity of each item in the BOM throughout the Days. In addition to the quantity planned, you may also enter

different quantity at the 'Quantity' field for an overview of planning. Remember to click on the 'Refresh' button aftermaking a new entry. It is possible to view planning of only a specific Item Type. To do this, check the desired Item type checkbox, but by default all Item types are checked.Planning can be viewed in different scales, either by 'Daily', 'Weekly' or 'Monthly'. To obtain such planning overview, click on

the Scale buttons - 'Plus/Minus' sign . Clicking the Advanced button will display the advanced information at the bottom of the planning. The advanced screen

CHAPTER 3


displays cost price calculation for the Bill of Material structure. See diagram below:

This screen displays sales price and its total costs which then shows a detailed portion of cost price. To hide this portion ofdisplay, you can click on the Simple button.

Production tab - This is to view the Where Used of the BOM structure.


Introduction

The production tab displays which production orders the Bill of materials are used on. This is basically an overview of Where-Used of existing BOM. See the diagram below as an example:

In the example, it shows that the Bill of Material is used in project 'PRO0400003771' with its description, production number,request number, quantity and amount. Note: The request number shown is the Production Order Number which is equivalentto the Project number, because the Project is generated for every Production order. The Production Number is internallygenerated by the system.

To open the project/production order click on the Edit icon next to the order line on the top right hand corner.

Extra tab - For entering extra information to the BOM structure.

CHAPTER 3


Introduction

The extra tab field contains lists of extra free fields that you can define in the system settings into meaningful fields. You canlater access this extra tab to fill values in the defined extra free fields. Below is an example of defined extra free fields of theextra tab screen:

The above extra field shows that you can enter more detailed information of a BOM structure when you define these extra fieldsinto meaningful fields as shown above.


To define free fields into meaningful fields go to menu path [System, General, Free Fields]. At the free fields maintenancescreen, select Structures at the Table drop down list box. The system displays all free fields for the structures table, the tableused in BOM structures free field. Select the field and click on the Open button. The following screen is displayed:

Key in the meaningful field name at the customize field and click on the Save button. The new definition of a free field is nowdone. To define more free fields, repeat these steps.

After complete creation of the BOM, a number of actions can be performed from the functional buttons. These are explainedindividually for the respective functional buttons as follows:

— Clicking on this button allows the retrieval of the Item Maintenance screen of the Item specified in the BOM structure, for quick reference of Item information.

— Clicking on this button allows the retrieval of the Sub-Assembly (Child BOM structure) from the main assembly item(Main BOM structure). This displays the similar BOM creation screen shown above.

— Clicking on this button saves the entry and selections made for the New BOM structure creation or the changesmade in an existing BOM structure.

CHAPTER 3


— Clicking on this button allows the creation of another NEW BOM structure.

— Clicking on this button allows the user to exit from the BOM creation screen.

5.2 Deleting BOM's

Maintenance of BOM Items must be done in order to keep only BOM items that are active and those that are regularly used toavoid selection of inaccurate BOM Item during planning of a Production. Housekeeping can be done by deleting unwanted BOMitems; those that are obsolete and those that are not at all in demand by customers.


DetailsThe Delete functional button in the Main overview of BOM via [Manufacturing, Setup, BOM] is as shown in the screen below:

CHAPTER 3


To start, from the displayed records, select the BOM Item to be deleted. Next, click on the Delete button. The following screenis displayed, that shows the details of the selected BOM item:

In the above screen, details of the selected BOM Version, an indication of whether it is the Main BOM and its Description aredisplayed.


To start deleting, select the displayed version record, and click on the Delete button. A pop up dialog message is displayed, asshown below:

To cancel deletion, click the No button. To confirm deletion, click the Yes button. Once Yes is clicked, the selected version isimmediately deleted.

Note: The Main Version of a BOM Item cannot be deleted. The following error message is displayed when the user chooses todelete a Main Version:

CHAPTER 3


5.3 Copying to create new BOM's

The Copy functionality allows creation of new version of existing BOM structure. The newly copied version is saved in theexisting BOM Parent Item Code, which the new version is copied from. The newly created BOM version can be selected from thedrop down list at the 'Version' field in the BOM creation screen.

A new version BOM can be structured after the copy is done by making changes to the changes in the structure.


Below are descriptions of how to copy create a New version of an existing BOM :

Details

At menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, BOM] the Copy functional button is as shown in the screen below:

From the shown records of BOM Parent Items, select the BOM item that you wish to copy for a new version.

Next, click on the Copy button. The following screen is displayed:

CHAPTER 3


In the above screen, the BOM Parent Item Code and Description are displayed per the selection made. Select the existingversion that you wish to copy from the drop down list.

The New version number is automatically generated with the next sequence number. Enter the Description for the new copy of BOM version.

Finally, click on the Copy button in the above screen. Otherwise, to cancel and exit, click on the Close button.

Now the selected BOM Parent Item is copied to the New version, and the following screen is displayed:

In the above displayed screen, changes to the structure can be done at the Structure tab, and its new planning can be viewedat the Planning tab desired by the user.


6. Maintaining Variant

Introduction

Variant functionality of E-Production of Exact Globe 2003, allows you to construct part items with various item relations, forinstance relations such as mandatory parts and optional parts for generation of Bill of Material that will produce the ultimateproduct for customers. Variant also allows you to select alternative part items in producing a complete product, in case thereare insufficient stocks. Additional complementary products can also be sold together with what was ordered by the customerwith the use of various options to select using the Variant functionality. For example, selecting the Variant item in the Sales orderentry line displays the selection screen to select additional accessories or complementary products, which is an integrationusing the Variant functionality. Variant functionality is most useful for producing a product that best suits specific customerrequirements (custom-made products compared to standard products).

The Variant functionality can be triggered via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Variant], which displays the following screen:

CHAPTER 3


In the Main Overview screen of Maintain Variant functionality as shown above, there are fields for selection and functionalbuttons for users to perform various actions. These are as follows:

Searching and Filtering

Search Clicking this button executes a search & filter process and displays results at the made available panel based on the users lastselection or input in the search criteria.

ClearClicking this button refreshes all selections and input and sets search criteria values to default values.

RowsThis is the result's number of rows (records) to be displayed in the results panel. The number of rows defaults to "100" whichdisplays 100 rows of variant item records.

Filter: Start With Selecting this executes search & filter by the character which starts with information that iskeyed in by the user in searchcriteria.

Filter: ContainsSelecting this executes search & filter by character that exactly contains information which is keyed in by the user in searchcriteria.

Item Code Enter the Item code that you wish to search for. Keying in specific Item Code filters the record of the intended Item.

Description Enter the Item Description that you wish to search for. Keying in specific Item Description filter the record of intended Item.

Display panelIn the display panel, records of Variant Items are displayed based on either the default search selections or the user's searchselections. Each record is displayed with some basic details by columns. These details are described as follows:


Item Code This displays the Variant Item's Code.

Description This displays the Variant Item's Description.

Condition This displays the Variant Item's Condition.

SalesThis is a checkbox that indicates if the Variant Item is a Sales item. Those Variants that are Sales items are shown checked.

Purchase This is a checkbox that indicates if the Variant Item is a Purchase item. Variants that are Purchase items are shown checked.

StockThis is a Checkbox that indicates if the Variant Item is a Stock item. Variants that are of Stock items are shown checked.

SerialThis is a checkbox that indicates if the Variant Item is a Seria iteml. Variants that are Serial items are shown checked.

Picture This is a checkbox that indicates if the Variant item contains a Picture. Variants that contain pictures are shown checked.

Sales Price This displays the Variant Item's Sales Price.

Warehouse This displays the Variant Item's Warehouse Code.

CHAPTER 3


Actions with Functional Buttons

Functional buttons within the Maintain Variant functionality make it easy to manage and maintain these variant items. Users areallowed not only to defined new variants, but are also allowed to amend parts items contained in the Variant item, such asreplacing parts or adding new parts. Besides these, making changes to the structure and conditions of the variant items is alsopossible. Even obsolete variants can be automatically removed from the record using the functional button.

Please refer to the table below for referral details on the respective functional button:


Replace This button enables the user to replace part items in the Variants. For information see sub Section3.6.4 Replacing Item at Existing Variant.

Add This button enables the user to add Item to Variants. For information see sub Section 3.6.3 - AddingItem to existing Variant.

Delete This button enables the user to delete obsolete variant. For information see sub Section 3.6.2Deleting existing Variant.

Open This button enables retrieval of the Variant Item Master screen. For information see sub Section3.6.1 Creating New or Opening existing Variant.

New This button enables the user to Create New Variant Item. For information see sub Section 3.6.1Creating New or Opening existing Variant.

Close This button enables the user to exit and close the Maintain Variant functionality.


6.1 Creating and maintaining variant items

New Variant items can be created but prior to this, the parent item and its part items must exist before you can construct avariant of a parent item. You may create parent items and parts items in the Maintain Items via menu path [Manufacturing,Setup, Items] or [Order, Items, Maintain] or [Purchase, Items, Maintain] or [Invoice, Items, Maintain] or [Inventory, Items,Maintain] or [Service, Items, Maintain]. The following Section describes how the Variant Item can be created:

Following via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Variant], click on the New button at the Main Overview screen ofMaintain Variant functionality. The following Item lookup screen is displayed:

From the item lookup screen select the Parent Item and click on the Select button.

CHAPTER 3


If the parent item is not in the lists, then you may create a new parent item by clicking on the New button from the Item lookupscreen.

After selecting the Parent item and clicking on the select button, you then proceed with the Relation Types selection screen asshown in the example below:

This lists all available relation types, whereby you may select the appropriate relation type for the Parent Item's Part Items.

User may also choose to create new types of item relations by clicking on the New button from within this screen.


Selecting the Parent item and the appropriate Relation type displays the following screen:

CHAPTER 3


Inserting Parts Items to the Relation Type Group

Now the user may want to add the Part items that are of Mandatory Relation Type. To do this, select the Mandatory group

(column) and click on the add icon, which then displays the following screen:

Parts Items can also be inserted by clicking on the 'palm icon' at the Relation Type group (row), which then displays theabove Item lookup screen. Select the part item and click on the Select button. This then automatically inserts the selected partitem to the parent item under the Mandatory group.


Inserting New Relation Type Group

To add a new Relation Type Group to the Parent item, select the Parent item (top highest column cell) and click on the

Add icon, which then displays the Relation Types screen.

The steps involved are the same as the ones described above. Next repeat these steps in inserting part items to the newlycreated Relation type group.

To structure the entire complete variant as you desire, repeat steps described above to insert new relation types and to insertpart items to the inserted relation type.

See the diagram below for the completed variant for the parent item - PC Set 001:

CHAPTER 3


Screen Details

In the Variant Creation screen, there are important details shown that are useful not only when structuring a variant item, butare also useful when detailed information of the parts items relations need to be known prior to selecting the parent item in arequests such as Sales order. These details are as follows:

Item Code The Parent Item Code and Item Description is displayed at the header section.

Item This column of row displays the Parent Item code. This can be collapsed and expanded using the plus or minus sign (+/-) at theleft hand side of this field.

GroupThis column displays the Parts Item's Relation Type Group. This can be collapsed or expanded using the plus or minus sign (+/-) at the left hand side of this field.

Item Code This column displays the Part Item's Code. One Relation Type Group can have many Parts Items, and these are displayed in thiscolumn. Collapsing the Relation Type group also collapses the parts items.

Description This column displays the Part Item's Description.

QuantityThis column displays the default Quantity of the Part Item. Enter the appropriate Quantity associated with the relation typecondition to the parent item.

Sales UnitThis column displays the Part Item's Sales Unit.

Sales Price This column displays the Part Item's Sales Price per quantity.


Sales AmountThis column displays the total amount per Part item by accumulated quantity. (Sales Amount = Sales Price * Quantity)

Actions with Functional buttons

There are functional buttons that allow the user to execute functional actions just to manage the variant item. For information,click on the respective functional buttons, and that will bring you to the relevant documents for each function.

See the table below for referral details for the respective functional buttons shown above:


Recipe versionsThis button enables the user to view Recipe Versions. For information see sub Section 3.6.1.1Obtaining Overview of Recipe Versions.

ItemThis buttons enables the user to retrieve the Item Master Card. For information on Item MasterCard see sub Section 3.1.1.

Generate BOMThis button enables the user to generate BOM using the Variant. For information see subSection 3.6.1.2 Generating Bill of Material using Variant.

CopyThis button enables the user to Copy create New variant. For information see sub Section3.6.1.3 Copy Creating New Variant from an Existing Variant Item.

Close This button enables the user to exit and close the Variant Creation / Master screen.

CHAPTER 3


6.1.1 Obtaining overview of recipe versions

A Variant Item could be used at many requests and activities, each with different selections of parts items, which then make adifferent version of the Variant Item. These different selections of versions can be viewed using the Recipe version functionality.

Details

You may obtain the product variant's version by clicking on the Recipe Version button after retrieving the productvariant. See the example of overview of recipe version displayed for this example:

To expand for detailed view of the version, select the version and click on the Plus (+) sign at the left hand side of the versionfield. This then displays the detailed overview which displays all selections of parts items, as shown below:


The Recipe version screen displays details as follows:

Item This displays the Parent Item's Code.

Version This displays the Version Number, Date and Time the version was selected or used in activities such as the BOM.

Main vversion This is a checkbox that indicates which version among the listed is the 'Main' version.

Condition This displays the Part Item's selected Condition.

Item This displays the Part Item's Code.

After viewing, exit from the Recipe version by clicking on the Close button.

6.1.2 Generating a bill of material using variant

Variant Item is not only used in requests such as sales orders or for selections of part items, but it can also be used to generatea unique Bill of Material which you desire from within the Variant Maintenance/Creation screen. The following explains thesteps on how to Generate Bill of Material accordingly.

Details

To generate a Bill of Material for a customer specific requirement, retrieve relevant product variant from [Manufacturing, Setup,Variant].

Open the product variant using the Open functional button.

CHAPTER 3


Make the selection of required parts items from the options in the variant.

Enter the required quantity of parts items in the variant screen.

After complete selections, click the Generate: BOM button. A pop up screen is displayed showing the date and time of creation.To confirm generation of the BOM, click on the generate button.

The system automatically generates a unique Bill of Material based on the selections you made in the variant screen. You mayretrieve the generated BOM via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, BOM]. See the example of a BOM created based on theselections made in this example:


6.1.3 Copying to create a new variant

Copy Creating New Variant from the existing variant item can be useful, since the user need not manually create a new variantthat consists of similar part items of an existing variant item. The following explains the steps of how to copy create New Variantitem by copying the existing variant item.

DetailsYou may copy a product variant to a new product variant using the Copy functionality. To do this, retrieve the product variant

screen, and click on the Copy button. A pop up screen is displayed as shown in the screen below:

FromSelect the product variant that is being copied at this field from the variant lookup screen by clicking on the lookup button.

To Next select the item that the variant is copied to at the To field from the item lookup screen by clicking on the lookup button.You may create a new item, where you want to copy to, by clicking on the New button in the item lookup screen.

After making selections at the From and To fields, click the Copy button. The system automatically copies the selected productvariant in From field to the item in the To field. Close the pop up screen. Close the variant screen and return to the main pageof variant screen where you will notice that a new item of product variant is listed with the same variant structure.

CHAPTER 3


6.2 Deleting existing variant items

Housekeeping such as deleting obsolete variant items can be done using the Delete functional button.

Details

To Delete the Variant Item record, select the record line at the Main Overview of Maintain Variant and click on the Delete

button. The following message is prompted as shown below:

Click on the OK button to close this message.


6.3 Adding items to an existing variant

Manually inserting additional part items to each existing variant item is time consuming and error prone, as it involves manysteps of retrieval, selection and insertion These steps can be automated using the Add functionality, in which it takes only onetime selection and just one button click, even without having to retrieve each Variant's Maintenance Card. The followingdescribes the steps on how additional part items can be added to the Variant Item.

DetailsYou may add additional part items to a couple of existing variants with the Add button functionality. It will be difficult to add theitem one by one into each and every required product variant and it would take a number of lengthy steps. To make this easier,

you can use the Add icon functionality in the Main Overview of Maintain Variant via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup,Variant]. Click on the Add icon which displays the following screen:

In the above screen there are details required for user's input and selection that are:

Add details

Item Code Select the Part items that you want to insert to the existing product variant at the item code field by clicking on the lookupbutton.

CHAPTER 3


Group Select which Relation Group of the Variant Item you want to add the item to. In this example, relation group Optional wasselected.

QuantityKey in the Quantity of Item that you want to add to the Variant Item.

Variant detailsAt the variant section, it is required to select which Variant Item the user wishes to insert in the additional item.

Item Group Select the Variant Item's Item Group which you want to add the selected Item to. Check on the 'All' box to select all Variant Itemsfrom all Variant Item's Item Group.

Item Select the Variant Item which you want to add the selected item to in the item field from the variant lookup screen by clickingon the lookup button. User may choose one or more Variant Items by selecting a range of Variant items in the From field and Tofield. User may also choose all Variant Items by selecting the All checkbox.


After making the required entries and selections, click on the Add button, which then displays the following screen:

In the above screen, lists of selected Variant Items are displayed. You may choose to add to one Variant Item by selecting VariantItem record or to all product variants by clicking on the Select all button.

After selection, click the Add button. This then prompts a message to confirm Adding the part item to the selected Variant item,as shown in the example below:

Click on the Yes button to continue addition or No to cancel the addition process. Clicking on the Yes button, automatically addsthe selected part item to the selected Variant Item(s).

CHAPTER 3


After the add process is executed , a report is displayed acknowledging the add process, as shown in the example below:

Click on the Print button to obtain a hardcopy of this report. Clicking on the Print button sends the report to the printer for ahardcopy print. Click on the Close button to close this report screen.

You may view the inserted part item by retrieving the respective product Variant Item .


6.4 Replacing an item in an existing variant

Automating the manual steps for changing new part items to the existing Variant item is useful and saves time. The user neednot perform the retrieving and updating steps one by one for each variant item that requires a change of part items. One ormore variant items can be automatically changed with just few selections and one click to make changes for the replacement ofpart items using the Replacement functionality.

DetailsYou may also choose to replace or change a part item of a variant to a new part item. To do this click on the Replacebutton contained in the Main Overview screen of Maintain Variant via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Variant].

CHAPTER 3


Details required for the user's input and selections are described as follows:

Change Data details

Item Code Select the Part item which is in the existing product variant that you want to replace or change by clicking on the item lookupbutton, which then displays the Item lookup screen.

ReplacementSelect the item that you want to replace with at the replacement field, by clicking on the lookup button, which then displays theItem lookup screen.

Factor The factor defaults to 1. This is the Quantity of the New Replacement Item to the Variant.

Variant detailsAt the variant section, the user is required to select at which variant the part items should be changed or replaced.

Item Group Select the Variant Item's Item group where you want to replace the item .

Item Select one or more Variant Item(s) where you want the replacement to take place.


Next click the Replace button. A pop up screen displays the lists of selected product variants, as shown in the example below:

In the above screen, the lists of variant items that were selected for the replacement or change are displayed.

You may individually select one product variant line by clicking on the line or select all product variants by clicking on the Selectall button.

After selecting which variant item you wish to change or replace its part item from the above lists, click on the Replace button.A message is prompted, whether to confirm replacement as shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 3


Click on the Yes button to continue replacement or No to cancel replacement. Clicking on the Yes button, executes thereplacement of the old item to the new part item to the selected range of product variants. The updated part item is thenreported accordingly and a report after replacement is displayed, as shown in the example below:

Click on the Print button to obtain a hardcopy of the report. The displayed report will be sent to the default printer for thehardcopy. To close the above shown report, click on the Close button. The changes on the replaced item can be viewed by retrieving the respective product variants maintenance card.


7. Maintaining scenario's

IntroductionCalculating Costing for Make Items to provide intended costing for the production run would be tedious and inconsistent in thecase of calculating costing for End Product (BOM Parent Item) with various pricing sources. The pricing details are normallyinformation defined during the Item and BOM creation and will need to be updated periodically within a production run casescenario showing how l the make item's costs should be calculated within the production condition. The basic "Calculate"functionality of E-Calculate provides costing calculation, but the measures accounted for are limited to standard cost pricingwith the entered quantity. To obtain accurate costing would require taking into account many areas of Item Configuration suchas the Sales Price per Item, Cost Price Per Item, Pricing of Parts Items, Calculated Costs Price in the BOM, Total Cost Price perBatch Quantity, Purchase Price per Supplier, Total Pricing per exploded BOM, etc. The manual work for these sources of pricingcan be eliminated and automated by configuring specific "Scenario" templates, which provide the best way to calculate Costingof End Product according to the internal business processes and strategies.

By triggering menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Scenario] the following Scenario Main Overview screen is displayed:

CHAPTER 3


Search selections and displayed results in the above shown screen are as follows:

Search Clicking on this button executes the search & filter process and displays the results on the display panel based on the user'slatest selection in the search & filter criteria.

Clear Clicking on this button clears all users' selection on the search & filter criteria and resets search & filter criteria value to defaultvalue.

RowsThis determines the number of rows of records to be displayed in the display panel. The value defaults to "50", displaying 50rows of records in the display panel.

Filter: Starts with Selecting this option processes the search & filter execution, based on the initial character entered in the search & filter criteria.

Filter: ContainsSelecting this option processes the search & filter execution, based on the exact characters entered in the search & filter criteria.

ScenarioEnter the Scenario Code to obtain the record of the an intended scenario Code . By default, none is entered, which displays allrecords regardless of Scenario Code.

Description Enter the Scenario Description to obtain the record of the intended scenario Description . By default, none is entered, whichdisplays all records regardless of Scenario Description.


Display Panel

Scenario Displays Scenario Code.

Description Displays Scenario Description.


Maintenance of the Scenario templates can be done with the following functional buttons. Besides creating and updatingscenario template configuration, housekeeping of obsolete records is also simple with the use of the Delete functionality. It iseven possible to copy create new Scenario templates using the Copy functionality. For information on the above functionality, see the following respective Sections below:

Refer to the table below for referral detail for respective functional buttons shown above:


Copy This button enables Copy creating New Scenario. For information see sub Section 3.7.3 CopyCreating New Scenario from existing Scenario.

Delete This button enables the user to delete obsolete Scenario. For information see sub Section3.7.2 Deleting existing Scenario.

Open This button enables the user to retrieve Scenario Creation / Master screen. For informationsee sub Section 3.7.1 Creating New and Opening existing Scenario.

New This button enables the user to Create New Scenario. For information see sub Section 3.7.1Creating New and Opening existing Scenario.

Close This button enables the user to exit and close the Maintain Scenario functionality.

CHAPTER 3


7.1 Creating and maintaining scenario's

Creating or Updating a Scenario template can be done via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Scenarios] by clicking on the Newbutton to create a New Scenario template or by clicking on the Open button for retrieval and update of existing Scenariotemplate. Creating a Scenario template and Retrieving an existing Scenario template brings up the consistent interface of theScenario Configuration screen. The Scenario template created is to be used in conjunction with the Batch Update functionalityof E-Calculate application via menu path [Manufacturing, To be processed, Calculate]. The E-Calculate functionality consists oftwo functionalities, Batch Update and Calculate. Calculate functionality provides costing based on the Quantity to be producedin the production run, which is different from the Batch Update functionality. See the relevant Section for information on BatchUpdate functionality and Calculate functionality.

DetailsClicking on New button displays the brand new Scenario Template screen, where the Open button displays the existing ScenarioTemplate screen, which consists of the same interface and fields shown in the screen example below:


Details required for creating or maintaining Scenario Configuration are as follows:

Scenario Enter the Scenario Code being created. An existing record Scenario Code is not editable.

Description Enter the Scenario Description.

Maximum number of levels

• AllSelecting this option allows cost calculation throughout all levels of BOM (Bill of Material).

• 1 Selecting this option allows cost calculation only by "One" level up the BOM (Bill of Material)

Explode: Stock Controlled This is a checkbox.. Checking it allows cost calculation by exploding the BOM for stock controlled Items. Unchecked is vice versa.

Round off to: Batch QuantityThis is a checkbox. Checking it allows cost calculation by rounding off quantity of item to Batch Quantity of Bill of Material.

CHAPTER 3


Round off to: Purchase Order

• None Selecting this option does not round off by any purchase order criteria when calculating costs.

• Purchase UnitBy selecting this option, cost calculation is done based on rounding off by Purchase Unit.

• Purchase Order Size By selecting this option, cost calculation is done based on rounding off by default Purchase order size.

Make/Buy

• Produce Selecting this option determines that the cost calculation is done for Make Items (Items that are being produced).

• Purchase Selecting this option determines that the cost calculation is done for Buy Items (Items that are being purchased).


Item Price: Buy

Allows for determining which pricing should be used when calculating costs for Buy Items.

• Cost Price Selecting this allows accounting an Item's Cost Price when calculating costs for Buy/Purchase Items.

• Purchase price (Main supplier) Selecting this allows accounting on Main Supplier's Purchase Price of the Item when calculating costs for Buy/Purchase Items.

• Sales price Selecting this allows accounting on an Item's Sales Price when calculating costs for Buy/Purchase Items.

Item Price - Make

This determines which pricing should be picked when calculating costs for Make/Produce Items.

• Cost Price Selecting this allows accounting on an Item's Cost Price when calculating costs for Make / Produce Items.

• Calculated cost price (Main version) Selecting this allows accounting on an Item's calculated cost price as per Main BOM version, when calculating costs for Make/Produce Items.

CHAPTER 3


• Sales price Selecting this allows accounting on an Item's Sales Price when calculating costs for Make/Produce Items.

Margin %This is the Margin percentage to markup the new calculated cost price.

After configuring the intended Scenario, click on the Save button. To close the Scenario template screen, click on the

Close button. To continue creating more configurations of Scenario, click on the New button.

7.2 - Deleting scenario's

Housekeeping of configurations that are no longer needed as time passes and with changes in methods and strategies ofaccounting costs can be easily done by using the Delete functional button.


DetailsVia menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Scenarios], the Delete functional is maintained as shown in the screen example below:

Selecting the unwanted scenario record and clicking on the Delete functional button, prompts the following message:

Click on No button to discontinue deletion. Click on Yes button to continue with deletion of the selected record.

Clicking on Yes button system automatically deletes the selected record from the system.

CHAPTER 3


7.3 Coping to create a new scenario

Copy Creating New Scenario setup can be done using the Copy functional button. This is useful when there is a need to createa New Scenario which has the same configurations as an existing one. With the Copy functionality, repeated configurationscan be eliminated.

DetailsVia menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Scenarios], the Copy functionality is maintained as shown in the following screenexample:


Clicking on the Copy button after selecting the specific Scenario record, displays the following screen:

Scenario This displays the selected record's Scenario Code. Erase this and enter the New Scenario Code being copy created.

Description This displays the selected record's Scenario Description. Erase this and enter the New Scenario Description being copy created.

The newly entered Scenario Code and Description is shown in the screen example below:

CHAPTER 3


Next, click on Save button. The system saves the newly copy created Scenario. The newly created Scenario record is shown inthe display panel as shown in the screen example below:

8. Related Common Functionalities

8.1 Deleting Standard Item / Hour Item / Extra Charges item

Items that are obsolete or no longer used in any transactions, regardless of logistics, financials, inventory or distribution can beremoved from its records within the Exact Globe 2003. Removing the record of an item can be done using the Delete functionalbutton.


Where-Used: The Delete functional button is applied within the:• Maintain Item - [Manufacturing, Setup, Items]• Hour Item - [Manufacturing, Setup, Hours]• Extra Charges Item - [Manufacturing, Setup, Extra Charges]

The Delete button is contained in the Main Overview screen of Item Maintenance as shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 3


The Delete function is also available in the Hour Item Maintenance, as shown in the example below:


The Delete functional button for Extra Charges Item is in the Main Overview screen as shown below:

CHAPTER 3


Clicking on the Delete button prompts the following message:

Click on the No button to cancel deletion. Click on the Yes button to continue deletion.

Clicking on the Yes button automatically deletes the selected record of standard item/hour item.

When the selected item/hour item/extra charges contain transactions or logistics planning such as sales orders or purchaseorders or used in BOM structures, then the following error message is displayed. In this case, it is not possible to delete theitem/hour item/extra charges containing planning or transactions.

To print the displayed error message, click on the Print button. To close the above example of an error message, click on theClose button.


8.2 Coping to create new items

New Items can be created using the New functional button maintained in the Main Overview screen of Item Maintenance, butit is quicker and simpler to use the Copy functional button to create New Items, especially if the New item being created containssame details of the Item being copied from. This would be the case when the Copy items are purchased from the same Supplierwith same price quotes and attributes or when the Copy items are stored and inventories are handled in the same warehouse. Copy functionality not only allows copying all same details of an Item being copied from but also allows specifying if you wouldlike to copy its extra descriptions, attachments and BOM structures. Copy functionality is applied in the Maintain Standard Itemand in the Hour Items that are discussed in the following paragraphs. Also note that the Copy functionality is also available forcopying existing BOM structures for making available different versions of BOM structures for the parent BOM item, with slightlydifferent features. For information on Copying BOM, see the relevant document.

Where-Used: The Copy functional button is integrated within:• Maintain Item - [Manufacturing, Setup, Items]• Hour Item - [Manufacturing, Setup, Hours]• Extra Charges - [Manufacturing, Setup, Extra Charges]

CHAPTER 3


The Copy functional button is contained in the Main Overview screen of Item Maintenance via menu path [Manufacturing,Setup, Items] is as shown in the example below:


The Copy function is also available in the Main Overview screen of Hour Item Maintenance via menu path [Manufacturing,Setup, Hours] as shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 3


The Copy functionality in the Maintain Extra Charges item via menu path [Manufacturing, Setup, Extra Charges] is enabled whena specific type of extra charges other than payment condition and shipping method is selected, is as shown in the screenexample below:


Selecting an Item to be copied and clicking on the Copy button, displays the following screen:

There are mandatory fields that require user input. These fields are described as follows:

New: Item Code This field is initially pre-filled with the selected Item's Code. This must be keyed in with the New Item code being copied to.

Description The description of the item is also pre-filled with the selected Item's description. You may change this accordingly.

Search Code This also defaults to the selected Item's Search Code. Changing the "New: Item Code" automatically updates the Search code.You may change this accordingly.

Supplier's Item Code This defaults to the selected Item's Supplier's Item Code. Changing the "New: Item Code" automatically updates the Supplier'sItem Code. You may also change this according to the Supplier's identification of the new item being copied.

CHAPTER 3


CopyThis Section allows the user to select what should be copied from the selected Item. The following describes the selectionoptions:

AttachmentsChecking this copies the attachments contained in the selected Item being copied to the new item.

Extra description Checking this copies the extra description contained in the selected Item being copied to the new item.

Main Supplier Checking this copies the Main Supplier linkage contained in the selected Item being copied to the new item.

Main Warehouse Checking this copies the Main Warehouse linkage contained in the selected Item being copied to the new item.

BOM Checking this copies the BOM contained in the selected Item being copied to the new item.

After inputting required fields and selecting required options, then click on the OK button.


Clicking on the OK button launches the New Item's Maintenance Card, as shown in the screen below:

Note that the new item is copied with same information as the selected Item being copied from. Click on the Save button to save the new copied item.

Also note that closing the new item's maintenance screen without saving does not complete copying the new item.

Therefore, you will not see any records of the new item. To be safe, click on the Save button or OK when the message is promptedasking you to save the newly created data.

CHAPTER 3


8.3 Recoding items, machines, hours, extra charges

The renaming of Machine's Code or any other Standard Item's Code or an Hour Item can be done using the Recode functionalbutton. Recoding is required for keeping correct and up-to-date naming for the Machine Serials or the Standard Items or theHour item. For example, in case the codes of machines are different from the supplier's or the customer's codes, the recodingcan be done that best suits their interpretation. This also confirms correct up-to-date identification of an Item or Hour Item orthe Machine serial item. Another example would be if an hour item's code is being used for resources with a specialized jobfunction, then it can be renamed/recodee to best suit the resource's interpretation and job specification, or when internal re-organization takes place.

Where-Used: The Recode button can be found at:• Maintain Items - [Manufacturing, Setup, Items]• Maintain Machine - [Manufacturing, Setup, Machines] • Maintain Assets - [Asset, Asset, Maintain]• Maintain Hours - [Manufacturing, Setup, Hours]• Maintain Extra Charges - [Manufacturing, Setup, Extra Charges]

Note that Exact Globe is an integrated environment, where any of the Items Maintenance, Machine Maintenance or Hour ItemMaintenance can also be accessed via other modules such as Sales Order, Purchases, etc.


Selecting an item which is either a standard item, machine item, hour item or extra charges item at Main Overview screen and

clicking on the Recode button displays the following message:

The above message is shown asking whether the user wants to continue the recoding as it may take some time. This is becausethe item is applied in many other transactions and entries in an integrated environment, so recoding may have to update thenew code of the item applied in many other integrated areas.

Click on the No button to discontinue recoding. Click on the Yes button to continue recoding, which then displays the followingscreen:

In the above Recoding screen, enter the New Code to the Item being recoded. The Old code of the Item is automatically pre-filledby the selected Item record.

Click on the Cancel button to discontinue recoding, which is another exit point in case theuser decides not to perform recodingor mistakenly selected the wrong Item to recode.

CHAPTER 3


To continue recoding, click on the Recode button that starts the recoding process. The progress of recoding process is displayedas shown in the screen below:

Note that the applied Machine Serials in the Sales Order lines are also updated with the New Code. When the recoding processis completed, the following confirmation is displayed:


Click on the OK button to close the above shown confirmation message. Note that the recoded Item Code is automaticallyupdated with New Code as shown in the Items Main Overview screen below:

8.4 Batch update

Frequent information updates to one or more items may take a lot of time since it involves numerous updating steps if it is donemanually. Furthermore, searching & finding correct items to perform updates on in a large database of records of items wouldalso cause difficulty . Besides the time and difficulty involved, these can easily be errors in updating wrong information orupdating wrong item records. All these can be eliminated using the Batch Update functionality contained in the Item MasterData Main Overview screen. Batch Update allows selection of correct item records and allows the user to input the intendedinformation that user wishes to update.

CHAPTER 3


Details The Batch Update functional button is maintained in the Main overview of Items as shown in the screen below:

Clicking on the Batch Update button in the Main Overview screen of Item Maintenance screen shown abovetriggers the Batch Update functionality.


Selecting a record of item or extra charges item and clicking the Batch Update functionality displays the following screen:

The selections details contained in the above shown screen are as follows:

Data Selection

Item data Selecting this option allows changes/updates to be done on Items Data, which displays Item Data Change Fields.

Stock data Selecting this option allows changes/updates to be done on an Item's Stock Data, which displays Stock Data Change Fields.

CHAPTER 3


Range

Item code (range/All checkbox) This defaults to the All box which makes changes/updates to all the items. To only change/update details of a specific rangeof items or of one item, select the item code at "from and to" of Item Code field.

Make item This is a checkbox. When selected, it only updates Items that are Make/Assembled types among the selected range of Itemsas in the Item Code field. Selecting an Item that is not a Make item, and checking the Make item box, will not update theselected Item.

Item group (range / All checkbox) This defaults to the All box which allows updates/changes of details to all item groups. To only change/update details ofspecific Item group, select the desired item group(s).

Warehouse (range/All checkbox) This defaults to the All box which allows updates/changes details of items that belong to all warehouses. To onlychange/update details of items that belong to a specific warehouse, select one warehouse or a range of specific warehouses.

Last sale (range/All checkbox) This defaults to the All box which updates details of items that was last sold within all date ranges per user-defined financialperiods/years. To only update items that were last sold within a specific date or date range, select the desired date range here.

Supplier This defaults without any selection and so it updates items regardless of Supplier. To update only items that were supplied byspecific supplier, select the desired Supplier here.


Status

Active Select Active to update items that are active.

Blocked Select Blocked to update items that are blocked.

Discontinued Select Discontinued to update items that are discontinued.

Future Select Future to update items with a future status .

Inactive Select Inactive to update items that are inactive.

Type

CHAPTER 3


AllSelect All to update items of the Standard, Bulk Issue, Labor hour, and Contract types.

Standard Select Standard to update items with the standard Type .

Bulk Issue Select Bulk Issue to update items with the Bulk Issue type.

Labor Hour Select Labor Hour to update items with the Labor Hour type.

ContractSelect Contract to update items with the Contract type.

Assortments

Item Assortments that are user defined are also displayed to update items of specific Item Assortments.

Change

Item Data


Details that the user wishes to change are in the Change Section that allows the user to select the desired fields forchange/update. These details are as follows:

Cost price Marking the Cost price Checkbox allows changing/updating the Cost price of the item. This enables the New field for cost price.Select the appropriate pricing basis from drop down list and key in the percentage of change.

StatusMarking the Status checkbox allows changing/updating the Status of items. This enables the New field for Status. Select thenew Status from drop down list.

Item group Selecting the Item group checkbox allows changing/updating the Item grouping of the selected items. This enables the Newfield for Item Group. Select the new Item group you wish to update with, for the selected items by clicking on the lookup button.

UnitSelecting the Unit checkbox allows changing/updating the Unit used for the selected items. This enables the New field for Unit.Select the appropriate Unit of item that you wish to update with for the selected items.

Description Checking the Description box, allows changing/updating the Item Description for the selected items. This enables the New fieldfor Description. Key in the new Description you wish to update with for the selected items.

Type Checking the Type box, allows changing/updating the Item Type for the selected items. This enables the New field for Type.Select the new Type from drop down list to update the selected items with new Item type.

Stock Controlled Checking the Stock Controlled box, allows changing/updating the Item Attribute if it is Stock controlled for the selected items.This enables the New field for Stock controlled flag. Select Yes to update/change items selected as Stock controlled or selectNo to update/change items selected as Not Stock Controlled.

CHAPTER 3


Counting cycle Checking the Counting Cycle box allows changing/updating the Item's Inventory (Stock) Counting cycle. This enables the Newfield for Number of days of counting cycle. Enter the number of days taken for item's stock count.

Requires approved supplier Checking this box allows checking or un-checking the Requires approved Supplier box in the Supplier tab screen. This enablesthe New value field for this option. Select Yes to check this box or select No to uncheck this box.

AssortmentsIt is also possible to update the Items Assortment that is user defined. Select the appropriate Assortments that you wish toupdate with for the selected Items. Item Assortment fields are maintained in the Extra tab screen of Item Master MaintenanceCard.

After making appropriate selections and inputs of what is to be updated/changed, click on the Show list button.Clicking on the Show list button automatically updates the desired changes and generates a report on what has been changed.

See the example below of a report generated in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet showing a list of all changes made:


9. Routing and operations[Manufacturing, Setup, Routings and operations]

9.1 Prior setting- Enable system setting for routings and operations[System settings, Manufacturing Settings, Routings and Operations]

The routing functionality is used in the manufacturing module to provide greater control by having proper instructions andcontrols setup at each operation. To enable this functionality, the setting for routing must be set to enable:

Once the option is set to ON (ticked), the master setting for work centers, operations and routings are available via the menupath [Manufacturing, Setup, Routings and operations].

CHAPTER 3


9.2 Work centers setting[Manufacturing, Setup, Routings and operations, Work centers]

A work center is a physical work place or assembly line on the shop floor. In Exact Globe 2003, it will be used in routing tomeasure the required quantities for machines and labor hours with the prior settings in this master setting.

To set up a production routing, a work center must first be created. Before creating a work center, a default work center called'DF001' must be created. It may or may not be used later for setting up a routing.


In the above main overview screen, there are functional buttons (called Search & Filter) that search and filter criteria andperform overviews of work centers. These elements are as follows:

SearchThis is a button that performs search & filter based on the search criteria and displays the results in the bottom overviewsection.

Clear Clicking on this button resets the search criteria.


Selecting this option performs a search by characters using the first few characters in searching for work centers or descriptions.

• ContainsSelecting this option performs a search by characters that exactly contain the characters entered, when searching for work centers or descriptions.

CHAPTER 3


Work center You can obtain a record of a work center by entering the specific work center.

Description You can obtain a record of work center by entering the description of the work center.

Buttons in work center main overview:

9.2.1 Duplicating a Work Center

Copy: the function of this button is to duplicate a record for work center. By selecting the intended work center and clicking onthis button, a pop up window is immediately displayed .

NewEnter the new work center code; the name of the selected work center code is the default in this column.

DescriptionThe description of the new work center is default in this column.


DetailsAfter entering the necessary data click on the OK button. The new work center will be created. To cancel the action,

select Cancel button

9.2.2 Deleting a Work Center

Delete: The function of this button is to remove an existing work center which has not yet been used in a routing setting. Thisbutton is always disabled when selecting a default work center.

Details

This button is only enabled if there is a work center selected. Click on this button to remove a selected work center. A messagebox is prompted for confirmation:

To continue the deletion, select the Yes button. To cancel it, click on the No button. If the work center has not yet

been used in any routing, the work center is deleted after selecting the Yes button. But if it has been used in routing,another message is prompted to indicate the failure of record deletion.

CHAPTER 3


Click on the OK button and go back to the main screen of the work center. If you click on the E-mail button,Microsoft outlook is launched for sending an e-mail to a related party with the message "Can't delete: TEST, use in: Routings"

9.2.3 Opening a Work Center

Open: this button is used to open an existing work center for editing or viewing . The interface is shown below:


Work Center A unique work center code.

Description The work center description.

Machine hour Machine hours used in this work center. Only active machine hours can be selected.

Labor hour Labor hours used in this work center, Only active labor hours can be selected.

Labor/Machine ratio Number of labor hours required per machine hour. In other words, how many labors are required for each machine hour.

Labor hour (Setup) Labor hours used for setting up a machine. This is information only and does not need to be used in any functionality of ExactGlobe 2003 in batch 360.

Setup quantityThe quantity to setup the machine before it can be started for an operation. This is information only and does not need to beused in any functionality of Exact Globe 2003 in batch 360.

BlockThis sets the work center to a block or unblock status.

CHAPTER 3


Details

Click on the Save button. The edited work center is saved to the database. Click on the New button to continue

creating new work centers. After finishing the necessary entries, click the Close button to exit from the maintaining workcenter screen.

9.2.4 Creating a New Work Center

New: The function of this button is to create a new record for a work center. The system launches the same screen as the Openbutton. Besides the default work center, there are many more work centers which can be created depending on the work centersset up in the production lines of the company. The naming of a work center is crucial and so it must be meaningful enough toindicate the actual process done or the name used in the production plant.

9.2.5 Closing a Work Center

Close: exits to the Exact Globe 2003 main screen.

9.3 Operations[Manufacturing, Setup, Routings and operations, Operations]

Operations are the production processes needed to produce an item. Therefore it is also a prerequisite condition for setting upa routing.

As in a work center, a default operation is also created called "DFOP001". It may or may not be used for setting up a routing ata later stage.


In the above main overview screen, there are functional buttons (called Search & Filter) that search and filter criteria andperform overviews of work centers. These elements are as follows:

SearchThis is a button that performs a search & filter based on the search criteria and displays the results in the bottom overviewsection.

Clear Clicking on this button resets the search criteria.

Filter • Start With

Selecting this option performs a search by characters using the first few characters in searching for operations or descriptions.

• ContainsSelecting this option performs a search by characters that exactly contain the characters entered, when searching for operations or descriptions.

CHAPTER 3


Operation To obtain a record of an operation, enter the specific operation.

Description Enter the operation description to obtain the intended record of operation.

Buttons in operations main overview:

9.3.1 Deleting Operations

Delete: The function of this button is to remove an existing operation which has not yet been used in routing.

Detail

This button is only enabled if there is an operation selected. Click on this button to remove a selected operation. A message boxis prompted for confirmation:


To continue the deletion, select the Yes button. To cancel it, click on the No button. If the operation has not yet been

used in a routing, the operation is removed after selecting the Yes button. But if it has been used in routing, then anothermessage is prompted for the failure of the record deletion and the related routings will be listed.

Click on the OK button to go back to main screen of the work center. If you click on the E-mail button thenMicrosoft outlook is launched for sending an e-mail to related party with the message "Operation: PACKING - Not deleted. Usedin: Routings - BYCYCLE-I, BYCYCLE-II, BYCYCLE-V"

CHAPTER 3


9.3.2 Opening Operations

Open: this button is used to open an existing work center for editing or viewing . The interface is shown below:

OperationA unique operation code.

DescriptionAn operation description.

BlockThis sets the operation to block or unblock status.

Instruction A text column is provided for entering additional instructions for the particular operation.


Details

After clicking on the Save button, the edited operation is saved to the database. Click on the New button to

continue creating new operations. After finishing the necessary entries, click the Close button to exit from themaintaining operation screen.

9.3.3 Creating New Operations

New: The function of this button is to create a new record of operation. The system launches the same screen as the Openbutton. Besides the default operation, many more work centers can be created depending on the operations running in theproduction. The naming of an operation is crucial and must be meaningful enough to indicate the actual process done or thename used in the production plant.

9.3.4 Closing Operations screen.

Close: to exit to the Exact Globe 2003 main screen.

CHAPTER 3


9.4 Routing master setting[Manufacturing / setup / routings and operations / Routings]

Routing is used to define step relationships for each operation with a particular work center. A Bill of Material (BOM) will thenpopulate the routing data based on the setup.

The system will create a default routing "DFR001" for the existing BOM version where users can create an unlimited number ofrouting a used on the shop floor for a specified make item.

In the above main overview screen, there are functional buttons (called Search & Filter) that search and filter criteria andperforms an overview of the work centers. These elements are as follows:


ClearClicking this button resets the search criteria.



Selecting this option performs a search by characters using the first few characters in searching for routing or description.

• ContainsSelecting this option performs a search by characters that exactly contain the characters entered, routing or description.Operation To obtain a record of a routing, enter the specific routing.

Description Enter the routing description to obtain the intended record of routing.

BlockShows records in the following statuses:All: blocked and unblockedYes: blocked

Buttons in routing main overview:

CHAPTER 3


9.4.1 Copy creating New Routing setup

Copy: the function of this button is to duplicate a record for routing. By selecting the intended routing and clicking on thisbutton, a pop up window is displayed .

NewEnter the new routing code. The name of the selected routing code is default in this column.

DescriptionEnter the description of new routing. The name of the selected routing description is default in this column.

Step relation This checked box is an option to include step relations while duplicating routing.

Detail

After entering the necessary data, click on the OK button. The new routing is created. Select the Cancel button tocancel the action. Once the new routing is duplicated, a routing maintaining screen is displayed:


Click on the Save button after successfully creating or editing the necessary setting and click the Close button

exit to the main overview screen of routing. To continue creating new routings, click on the New button.

9.4.2 Deleting a Routing Setup

Delete: removing an existing routing which has not yet used been in BOM setting. This button is always disabled when selectinga default routing.

CHAPTER 3


Details

This button is only enabled if there is a routing selected. Click on this button to remove a selected routing. A message box isprompted for confirmation:

To continue the deletion, select the Yes button. To cancel it, click on the No button. If the routing has not yet been

used in any BOM, the routing is allowed to be removed after selecting the Yes button and a window message pops up:

Click the OK button to confirm the routing is has been deleted successfully. But if it has been used in routing, thenanother message is prompted to indicate the failure of the record deletion and a window message shown:


Click on the OK button and back to main screen of routing. If you click on the E-mail button, Microsoft outlookis launched for sending an e-mail to a related party with the message "Can't delete: BYCYCLE-V. Used in: BOM"

9.4.3 Opening existing Routing Setup

Open: this button is used to open an existing work center for editing or viewing . It consists of two tabs, "Basics" and "Steprelation".

CHAPTER 3


Columns in routing header:RoutingsA unique routing code.

DescriptionA routing description.

BlockSets a routing to block or unblock status.

Columns in "Basics" tab: StepDefines steps in routing sequentially where the smallest number will be earliest step and then follows with larger numbers forsubsequent steps.

Work centerA production line carries a specific process in the specific step of a routing.

OperationAn operation runs in a work center for a particular step of a routing

Operation: Description The description of a selected operation which is retrieved from operation master data.

ThroughputThe output per hour for each step of routing.


Columns in "Step relation" tab:

Step Defining a relation for each step defined in the "Basics" tab.

Predecessor A dependent or "upstream step" is required for each current step.

Dependency typeThe key factor to determine the start or end time of each step and the following step for execution:FS: Finish-to-Start - current step can only start if the predecessor step is in completed status.SS: Start-to-Start - both the predecessor step and current step are started concurrently.FF: Finish-to-Finish - current step can not finish until the predecessor step is finished.SF: Start-to-Finish - current step can not finish until predecessor step starts.

CHAPTER 3


Lag Th time needed to start up the following step; therefore it is used to compute the start time of the next step.

Lag typeLag time is calculated either by hour or percentage.

Details

After clicking on the Save button, the edited routing is saved to the database. Click on the New button to

continue creating new routings. After finishing the necessary entries, click the Close button to exit from maintainingrouting screen.

9.4.4 Creating a New Routing Setup

New: The function of this button is to create a new record of routing. The System launches the same screen as the Open button.Besides of the default routing, there are many more routings that can be created depending on the routing creating in theproduction. The naming of routing is crucial and it must be meaningful enough to indicate the actual process done or the nameused in the production plant.

9.4.5 Closing and Exiting the Routing setup.

Close: exits from the routing main screen


9.5 Bill of material (BOM)

After a routing is successfully created, it will be able to be used in BOM for populating the planned hours in a step relation.

RoutingWhen creating a new BOM version, routings are available to be selected from the BOM header. For certain circumstances, thedefault routing "DFR001" is recommended for selection if the completed routing is not yet ready or proper routing will be startedin near future. The selected routing can not be changed and the populated hours in BOM lines can also not be changed l.

Batch The batch quantity per production run.

CHAPTER 3


ItemHour items are shown in these columns once routing is selected in the BOM header. Components or part items are enteredimmediate after the related labor/machine hours for particular steps. This is to show that the components will be used duringthe specified hour.

StepStep values are automatically retrieved from the routing master data for hour items. Whereas components are attached toparticular hour items, steps must be specified manually.

QuantityThe system will automatically fill in the required quantity based on the routing master data which has the following formulas:

Machine hour: Batch quantity / (divided by) step throughput defined in the routing master data.Labor hour: Batch quantity / (divided by) step throughput * (multiplied by) machine/labor ratio defined in the work centermaster data.

From day/To dayWith the prior setting of the routing, a quantity value will auto populate after running the calculation The default From day/Tovalue will be displayed. Hour items are counted based on 24 hours, and the first beginning step is always started at time00:00:00 in the BOM. However, the From day/To day in a production order is calculated based on the company's workingschedule.

Example: Labor hour Lab01 requires 25 hours and total lead time in BOM are 2 days, from day 1 to day 2. But in a production order,assume that the working schedule is an 8 hour day, the total lead time for the production order is 4 days.


9.6 Production order entry

After defining the BOM for a make item or a finished good, production orders are ready to be created when the requirementsare met. In the production order, no routing needs to be selected; it is retrieved based on the make item and BOM versionselected. Start/end time and start/end date for the make item and BOM line items will then be calculated based on theproduced quantity and working schedule.

Make item start time and start dateThe start time and date of a make item refers to the earliest start time and date in BOM lines.

Make item end time and end date The end time and date of a make item refers to latest end time and date in BOM lines.

Routing The routing used in the particular BOM version of a make item is listed in every BOM line.

CHAPTER 3


StepSteps are shown in every BOM line and they are used for grouping purposes.

BOM lines - Start time, start date, end time and end dateThe system computes the planned quantity of labor/machine hours based on the number of required quantity and the workschedule.

Example: Lab01 = 25 hours from day 1 to day 2.Lab02 = 8 hours from day 2 to day 2.Example in a production order - Work schedule is 09:00 - 13:00 and 13:30 - 17:30 - Lead time is 5 days: Lab01 = 4 qty start date = 01/04/2005 start time = 09:00 and 01/03/2005 end time = 13:00.Lab01 = 4 qty start date = 01/04/2005 start time = 13:30 and 01/03/2005 end time = 17:30.Lab01 = 4 qty start date = 02/04/2005 start time = 09:00 and 02/03/2005 end time = 13:00.Lab01 = 4 qty start date = 02/04/2005 start time = 13:30 and 02/03/2005 end time = 17:30.Lab01 = 4 qty start date = 03/04/2005 start time = 09:00 and 03/03/2005 end time = 13:00.Lab01 = 4 qty start date = 03/04/2005 start time = 13:30 and 03/03/2005 end time = 17:30.Lab01 = 1 qty start date = 04/04/2005 start time = 09:00 and 04/03/2005 end time = 10:00.Lab02 = 3 qty start date = 04/04/2005 start time = 10:00 and 05/03/2005 end time = 13:00.Lab02 = 4 qty start date = 04/04/2005 start time = 13:30 and 05/03/2005 end time = 17:30.Lab02 = 1 qty start date = 05/04/2005 start time = 09:00 and 05/03/2005 end time = 10:00.9.6.1 Changing the start time of a production order (BOM) Production orders are able to be changed in the planned schedule from time to time even after they have been authorized orreleased, without changing production order status. This option is available through the menu path [Manufacturing, Entries,Release]. Production orders displayed in this menu path must be in an authorized or released status.


Upon selecting the Sorting sequence button, a pop up window is displayed which allows for changing the start time of theselected production order. Once it is successfully rescheduled, then the planned hours in the production order will be alsoadjusted accordingly.

9.7 Overviews/reports

There are a few overviews or reports which are able to provide information about routing used in either production orders or theBOM setting.

CHAPTER 3


9.7.1 Production order Report

Production order - menu path [Manufacturing, Reports, Production orders]This overview is used to provide the general information for each production order, such as the manufactured item, productionorder quantity, status, start or end date etc. Routing is one of the selection options for looking a related production order. Theoption is embedded to shorten the search time related to a production order. In addition, lesser records are displayed; as aresult, the accuracy for generating the right report is high.

By highlighting the production order header and clicking on the Zoom button, the related BOM lines in theproduction order are displayed. Hour items run in a particular work center are displayed for a clearer picture of the overall shopfloor activities.


9.7.2 Actuals report

Actuals - menu path [Manufacturing, Reports, Actuals]The main objective of this overview is to show the actual quantity and cost incurred for a production order compared to theplanned quantity and cost. The routing information is provided mainly to having the right picture of the activities running at therespective work centers. In this way, the right actions or decisions can be taken for improvement and monitoring purposes.

As in the production order report, select the production order header and click on the Zoom button to have adetailed overview of a production order, and the related BOM lines in the production order. Information about related routingsand work centers are also listed for each line of components and hour items, thus the efficiency and effectiveness of particularwork centers are easy to measure via actual produced quantity and actual cost incurred while running a specific routing.

CHAPTER 3


9.7.3 BOM Report

BOM report - menu path [Manufacturing, Reports, BOM]

Generating an overview for BOM with information routing and steps is also possible in Exact Globe 2003. Different routingsused in each BOM version are clearly stated in the BOM lines.

10 Reason Codes

Reason Code [Manufacturing, Setup, Reason codes]

A Reason Code is designed in Exact Globe 2003 to indicate the actual reason for processing a rejection, return or scrapoperations for specific types of orders.


In the above main overview screen, there are functional buttons Search & Filter the criteria and show the overview results byreason codes. These elements are as follows:


Clear Clicking on this button resets for the search criteria.

Used in• RMA orders (Return to Merchandiser Authorization)

Selecting this option performs a search for a reason code which is used in RMA order or a sales order returned.

• RTV orders (Return to Vendor)Selecting this option performs a search for a reason code which is used in RTV order or a purchase order returned.

CHAPTER 3


• Scrap Selecting this option performs a search for a reason code which is used in a production scrap.


Selecting this option performs a search by characters starting with the first few characters used, in which the search criteria are dependent on the data entered for a reason code or description.

• ContainsSelecting this option performs a search by characters that exactly contain the search criteria which are dependent on the data entered for a reason code or description.

Code To obtain a record of the intended reason code, enter the specific reason code.

ReasonEnter the reason code description to obtain the intended record of reason code.

Buttons in reason codes main overview:


10.1 Deleting Reason codes

Delete button: The function of this button is to remove an existing reason code.

This button is only enabled when there is a reason code selected. Once you click on this button, a window message will displayas shown:

Select the Yes button to delete the reason code and the selected reason code will be removed immediately after action

taken. Click on the No button to cancel deletion.

CHAPTER 3


10.2 Opening Reason codes Master Card

Open button: This button is used to open an existing reason code for editing or viewing. The interface is shown below:

In the above reason code maintain screen, the columns are explained as follows:

CodeA unique and meaningful reason code should be used to provide a brief idea of the reason for rejection.

ReasonThe description of the reason code.

Used in:• RAM orders

If this option is checked, the reason code will be used in RAM or sales orders returned purposes


• RTV ordersIf this option is checked, the reason code will be used in RTV or purchase order returned purposes

• Scrap If this option is checked, the reason code will be used in production orders scrap purposes

Description NL, FR, ES and DEMultiple languages are allowed for input to this screen for reason code descriptions. Descriptions required are varied due to thesettings in [System setting, General setting, Descriptions in list boxes].

The displayed language for reason code descriptions is determined via [System setting, General setting, User setting] undertab General, column Description in list boxes.

CHAPTER 3


Detail

Columns Code and Reason are mandatory data and must be input. At least one of the check boxes for RMA order, RTV order andScrap must also be selected. If only the check box Scrap is ticked, this reason code will only be able to be selected or viewedfrom a production order scrap while browsing related reason codes. Reason codes descriptions in many languages are allowed

to input via this screen. After entering the required data, click on the Save button and the Close button to exit to

the main screen of reason codes. To create a new reason code, click on the New button.


10.3 Creating New Reason Code

New button: The function of this button is to create a new record of a reason code. The system launches the same screen as theOpen button. The naming of a reason code is crucial to be able to provide the right reason for a return or a scrap.

10.4 Closing Reason Code functionality

Close button: select this button to exit to the Exact Globe 2003 main screen.

Entries and Processes

CHAPTER 4

318 CHAPTER 4 | ENTRIES AND PROCESSES

CHAPTER 4

CHAPTER 4 | ENTRIES AND PROCESSES 319

1. Production Order Entry

After the Bill of Material Structure is defined, data entry for the Production Order follows. The Production Order can be enteredvia menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, PProduction OOrder]. Entering a Production Order is basically specifying the Parent Itemof the Bill of Material, which is the Finished (Completed) Product, at the header line of the Production Order. This is thenexploded at the detailed lines of the production order based on the Bill of Material's structure defined earlier. When entering aproduction order, it is important that correct planning is done accordingly, whereby Production Start Date and Production EndDate must be determined correctly. Production Quantity must also be entered accordingly to meet the Current Demandcorrelating to Supply of raw materials, available Inventory and Forecasts of expected future demands. The following explainsthe Main Overview of the Production Order functionality. For information on "Creating New Production Order" please see therespective explanation for the New / Open functional button listed below.

In the Main Overview screen of the Production Order functionality you will find search & filtering functions for searching theintended production order records. A display box is also available for listing production order overview results accordingly.Descriptions of commands and options in the Production Orders panel are as follows:

4. Entries and Processes


Search & Filter

Search Clicking on the Search button executes the searching and filtering of the intended records of production orders based on thelast user entered / selected search criteria.

Clear Clicking on this button resets all selections made by the user on the search criteria and sets search criteria values to the defaultvalues.

Number of rowsThis the number of rows for production order records to be displayed in the display panel. By default the number of rows is"100" and may be customised by the user to the number of rows intended for display.

Filter: Starts With Selecting this option enables the user to perform searches by specifying characters with which search results should "start with".

Filter: ContainsSelecting this option enables the user to perform searches by specifying characters "contained" in the intended results.

Warehouse Selecting from this drop-down list the Warehouse Code would list production order records that belong to the selectedWarehouse.

Start date Select the Production Start Date to obtain records of Production Orders that have the selected start date.

End date Select the Production End Date to obtain records of Production Orders that have the selected end date.

Production Order Select a specific Production Order Number to retrieve the intended record of Production Order.

CHAPTER 4


Parent ProjectSelect a specific Parent Production Project Number to retrieve the intended records of Parent Production Orders together withthe respective child production orders.

Item Select specific Item Code to obtain records of production orders that contain or are quoted with the selected Item Code.

Description The Production Order Description is keyed in to retrieve records of Production orders that contain the entered description.

ShowThis determines the types of records to be displayed in the display panel. There are 2 selectable options as follows:• Parent Project

Selecting this option allows the user to obtain records of only Parent Production Orders.

• AllSelecting this option allows the user to obtain records of all Production Orders regardless of child or parent status.

Sales orderSelect a specific Sales order Number to obtain its respective records of production orders. This is possible with productionorders generated from demands (sales orders).


Status

OpenChecking this option allows the user to obtain production order records that are still Open. Production Orders with Open statusare those that are just entered and yet to be authorized.

Authorized Checking this allows user to obtain production order records that are already Authorized. Authorized status is when checks andvalidation have been performed on the production order and it is authorized to proceed.

Rejected Checking this allows a user to obtain production order records that have been Rejected. Rejected status is when checks andvalidation have been performed on the production order but it was Not Approved to proceed.

Released Checking this allows a user to obtain production order records that have been Released. Released status is when a signal isgiven to the production supervisor to print production tickets or instructions and start issuing materials and commence work inwork centers after checking that the resources, shop floor capacity and materials are ready to proceed with the production order.

Printed Checking this allows a user to obtain production order records that are already Printed. Printed status is when Production Orderinstructions are already printed to proceed with issuing materials and execute work center jobs.

CHAPTER 4


Display PanelDetails of fields are displayed in the respective columns by rows of production order records. These details are described as follows:

Display by "Show: Parent Project" option

When Parent Project is selected at the Show option, then the following overview can be obtained, which displays only theParent projects:


Display by "Show: All" option

When All is selected at the Show options, the following overview is displayed, which displays both Parent projects and child projects:

CHAPTER 4


Display Details

Production order This displays the Production Order Number.

Description This displays Production Order Description.

Parent ProjectThis displays the Parent Project Code of the displayed production order, if there is any.

Item Code This displays Parent Item Code (Finished Product) as quoted in the Production Order.

QuantityThis displays the Production Order Quantity.

Start Date This displays Production Order Start Date.

End Date This displays Production Order End Date.

Warehouse This displays the Warehouse Code of the Production Order.

Auth. (Authorized) This is a checkbox that indicates whether the Production Order is Authorized.

Rejected This is a checkbox that indicates whether the Production Order is Rejected.



Apart from entering production order, various actions can be performed from within the Production Orders Main Overviewfunctionality. See the following sub-sections for the use of functional buttons and on how the respective actions can beexecuted.

Functional button Description

NoteThis button enables the user to attach notes to a production order without retrieving the production order. See subsection 4.8.1 - Related Common Functionalities.

Attachment This button enables the user to attach a document to a production order without retrieving the production order. See subsection 4.8.2 - Related Common Functionalities.

Sales oorderThis button enables retrieval of the sales order entry if the production order is allocated to the sales order. Forinformation on the Sales order Entry, refer to Logistics Product Manual.

MRP This button enables retrieval of the Material Requirement Planning overview for the respective production order. Forinformation on MRP see Section 5.0

ProjectThis button enables retrieval of the Project Master Card if the production order has a project. For information on ProjectMaster Card, refer to the E-Project Product Manual

Copy This button enables copying an existing production order for creating a new production order. See sub Section 1.1 forrelevant information.

Delete This button enables deleting of a production order. See sub Section 1.2 for relevant information.

Open This button enables retrieval of the production order entry. See sub Section 1.3 for relevant information.

NewThis button allows the user to enter a new production order in the entry screen. See sub Section 1.3 for relevantinformation.

Close This button enables the user to exit from the production order entry functionality by closing the screen.

CHAPTER 4


1.1 Copying a production order to generate a new one

A repeated production order entry for the same quotes of an End Production can be eliminated with the Copy functionalitymaintained in the Production Order Main Overview. In case there's a recurring demand for the same End Product with the samequantity, a user can then enter a Production Order once for the End Product, and with the Copy function, generate as manyproduction orders according to demand.

The Copy functional button in the Production Order Main Overview screen is as shown in the screenshot example below:


Selecting the Production Order line and clicking on the Copy button, displays the following Production Order Copy Generation screen:

The selected Production Order is displayed in this screen.

GenerateClick on the Generate button to generate a copy of the selected production order.

CloseOtherwise, to cancel generating a Production Order copy, click on the Close button without clicking the Generate button.

After clicking on the Generate button, the system copies the selected production order and generates a new production order. Clickon the Close button to close this screen and return to the production order main overview.

CHAPTER 4


Note that the newly generated production order is listed in the main overview production order screen:

The new production order's origin number is displayed at the description field. The newly generated production order number is thenext running number of the origin production order. The End Product, Quantity and Production Start date, end date is the same asthe original production order.


1.2 Deleting production orders

A Production Order that is no longer applicable, or with no priority in demand can be deleted automatically, provided it is NotAuthorized. In practice, Authorized Production orders would not be deleted. Deleted orders are commonly those which are rejectedor Not Authorized at all. The Delete functionality is one of the "housekeeping" steps used in removing unwanted, obsolete orders,whereby making data more manageable in the system.

The Delete function button is in the Production Order Main Overview as shown in the screenshot example below:

CHAPTER 4


The Delete function button is only enabled for production orders that are of the following status:

1. Not Authorized or Rejected. When in Manufacturing settings: Authorize production order is checked. 2. When in Manufacturing Settings: Authorize production order is not checked, then all production orders can be Deleted as

long as no issue has been raised.

Selecting the relevant production order and clicking on the Delete button, displays the following message prompt:

Clicking on the Yes button, system automatically removes the record of the selected production order from the system. Upondeletion, the following screen is displayed:

The order deletion status is notified in this screen. Click on the Close button, to close this screen.

YesClick on the Yes button to confirm deletion.

NoOtherwise, click on the NO button to cancel deletion.


1.3 Creating new or opening existing production orders

Entering a New Production Order can be done using the New functional button, which displays the New Production Order Entryscreen. Retrieving an existing Production Order that was already entered but not completed can be done using the Openfunctional button. Both the New and Open functional button displays the Production Order Entry screen. It has been noted thatwhen a production order entry is made, there should be prior determination of the Production order start date and how muchit should produce for the planned duration, upon considering current demands, availability of resources, supply of rawmaterials, available machine capacity, available inventory and forecasts of future demands.

To enter a new production order, go to menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, PProduction OOrders] and click on the New button. ANew Production Order Entry screen is displayed for creating a new production order, as shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 4


Retrieving an existing Production Order by selecting a production order record and clicking on the Open button also displaysthe Production Order Entry screen but with data, as shown in the example below:

Details of the Production Order Entry are as follows:

Warehouse From the drop-down list select the Warehouse in which the Production Order being entered is received.

Description Enter the Production Order Description.


Parent ProjectIf there is a Parent Production Project, then click on the lookup button to select the relevant Parent Project.

Cost Center This is the Cost center which will be defaulted to the resource's cost center based on the login user.

Parent lineAfter specifying the above, press the tab key to move the active cursor at the Parent line. The details of the parent header orderline are as follows:

Item Press the PF5 key to obtain Item lookup, for selection of the Parent Item. If the Parent Item is known, then you may key in theItem Code of the Parent Item.

Version The Version of the Parent Item is automatically pre-filled according to the Main Version of the BOM as defined in the BOMstructure. If the Parent Item consists of more than one version, then you may enter the desired version accordingly. The versioncould also be selected from the version lookup screen by pressing the PF5 key.

Description The Parent Item's Description is automatically displayed here. This field is not editable.

Location The default Warehouse Location is pre-filled here. You may change this to a different warehouse location from the locationlookup screen by pressing the PF5 key.

Planned By default the Planned Quantity is the Batch Quantity of the selected BOM version as defined in the BOM structure. You maychange the quantity of Parent Item for the production order accordingly.

Realized This field is not editable but it is updated according to Receipts of Parent Item (Finished good) of this production order.

CHAPTER 4


To be realized This field is not editable but it is automatically calculated with the Formula: To be realized = Planned - Realized.

UnitThis displays the Parent Item's Unit used.

Serial / Batch numbersThis displays the Serial / Batch number of the Parent Item. This may not be applicable at the stage of entering the productionorder. It is applicable at the stage of Production Order receipt.

Start date By default the current date is pre-filled. The correct Production Start Date may be entered accordingly.

Start Time This field is only shown when in the Manufacturing Settings: Use Routings and Operations is checked. This is the earliest starttime as structured in the Bill of Material. The Start Time is calculated automatically based on the defined routing, step relationand throughput days also taking into consideration the factor of batch quantity. The time value is not shown in the Bill ofMaterial creation, but it is computed and recorded at the back end in the database as "eff-date". The Start time is thencalculated based on the "eff-date". The database field name for Start Time in the production order entry is "Start-Time".

End date By default the current date is pre-filled. Key in the correct Production End Date accordingly. The End date is also pre-determinedbased on the number of days specified in the Bill of Material of the Parent Item.

End TimeThis field is only made available when in the Manufacturing Settings: Use Routings and Operations is checked. This is the latestend time as structured in the Bill of Material. The value of End time is calculated based on the defined routing, step relation andthroughput days in the BOM. This is based on the computed value in the BOM at the back-end database field named "exp-date".The database field name for End Time in production order entry is "End-Time".

Cost Center This is the Cost Center which will be automatically pre-filled as defined in the BOM structure in the header section of this ParentItem or press PF5 for the Cost Center lookup screen to make the required Cost Center selection.


Selection Code Key in or select the Selection Code of where the Production Order entered should be grouped under. Selection code is used forgroping entered data under specific code within the database at the back end. Entering production order data under a specificSelection code records the entered data under the selected Selection code in the back end Database.

Resource By default the Resource Code is pre-filled automatically based on the resource: person in-charge who entered the Production Order.

Explode Click on the Plus sign to explode the Parent Item, which then displays the detailed part items. Labor hours and machine hoursare displayed at the BOM panel.

Drawing number Drawing number of the Parent Item Bill of Material is automatically displayed here. This field is not editable.

AmountThe Amount field is not editable. This value is automatically pre-filled based on the Cost price of the parent item as set in theItem Maintenance Master Card.

CHAPTER 4


"Note" icon Notes can be entered, when you click on the Note cell. A pop up screen is displayed:

Click on the Timestamp button and enter your notes and descriptions to the Production Order. After keying in the note, click onthe Save button. The entered note is now saved and the pop up screen is automatically closed.

For not saving the entered notes, or to simply close the Note pop-up screen, click on the Close button.

The Note icon cell is then indicated with a tick, as shown in the example below:


"Paper clip" icon (Attachment)

Documents of Instructions can be attached to the Production Order at this field. Placing the active pointer in this cell andclicking once displays the following screen:

Click on the folder icon to browse for documents in the local machine (C: / folder). Select the relevant document by clicking onthe Folder icon. The selected document is now inserted at the File name field. Date of when the document is created is pre-filled and this field is not editable. Size of the document is also pre-filled. Enter the Description to the Attachment at the Extradata section. Next click the Save button. Attachment is now complete and the Attachment pop up screen is automaticallyclosed.

The Attachment cell indicates that there is document attached with a tick as shown in the screen shot example below:

The document attached can be retrieved by clicking on the Open button after triggering the previous shownAttachment screen by clicking on the Attachment cell.

For closing without saving any attachments, click on the Close button.

CHAPTER 4


ProjectWhen the production order is created, the Project code is automatically generated and assigned to the production order. Theproject code is displayed here. This field is not editable but it is automatically pre-filled.

Sales Order Similarly, when there is a sales order linked to the Production Order, then the Sales Order number is displayed here. This fieldis not editable and it is automatically pre-filled.

Internal Use If the Production Order is linked to an Internal Use Request, then the Internal Use Request Number is displayed here. This fieldis not editable and it is automatically pre-filled.

Parent Item Exploded / Details panelAt the bottom section of the production order screen is the BOM structure of the Parent Item, exploded to details of parts items,labor hour items and machine hour items. Each line of detail represents its own details, whereby Production Start date and Enddate for each child parts are pre-filled based on days specified in the Bill of Material structure. There are also fields that enablefiltering and are required for user's specification.


BOM

Show • Labor hour

Checking this, system displays only labor hour items and standard items in the exploded details panel.

• Machine hour Checking this, system displays only machine hour items and standard items in the exploded details panel.

• Extra chargeChecking this, system displays only extra charge items and standard items in the exploded details panel.

Item This displays Part Item's / Labor Hour Item's / and Machine Hour Item's code according to the BOM structure.

Version This displays the Bill of Material Version number.

Description This displays the Item's description.

Printed A Check mark is displayed here when the Production Order's Instructions is already Printed.

By ProductA check mark is displayed to indicate if the part item is a by-product item. By-product items are part items that produce wasteduring the production process that can be used as part item in another production process. Thus this is not regarded as waste,instead it is useable in another production process and therefore it is called a "By product". A negative value is stored in the(back-end) algorithm in the system to calculate accurate costs, but it is shown as a positive value in the screen (front end).

Back flush A tick indicates that the part item will be back-flushed when production order receipts are done, which automatically issues therelevant part items. This allows for registering costs more accurately. This setting is automatically enabled when the Back flushoption is checked in the BOM setup.

CHAPTER 4


WarehouseThis displays the Item's Warehouse Code.

Location This displays the Item's Warehouse Location Code.

Planned Displays the Planned Item Quantity based on the Bill of Material structure and also in proportion to the Planned Quantity of theParent Item in the Production Order.

Realized Displays the Realized Item Quantity based on the Material Issued and Hours Realized for the Production Order.

To be realized Displays the Quantity balance, automatically calculated based on Formula: To be realized = Planned Quantity - RealizedQuantity.

UnitThis displays the Item's Unit based on the values defined in Item Maintenance.

Routing This is only made available if in the Manufacturing Settings: Use Routings and Operations option is checked. This displays theRouting code as defined in the Bill of Material of the Parent Item. Routing consists of definitions of work centers, step relationsand operations, which is then applied across the Bill of Material and the Production order entry for better control over theproduction process and operations.

Step This field is only made available if in the Manufacturing Settings: Use Routings and Operations option is checked. This displaysthe Step as defined in the selected Routing. The Step determines the applied Step Relation which automatically calculates theStart Time and End Time and also determines the duration of each process in the production order.

Waste % This is automatically calculated based on the actual realization of the item. The percentage of unused item parts isautomatically displayed here. This field is not editable.


Serial / Batch numbersIf the Part Items are of type Batch or Serial, which was registered at the moment of Purchase Receipts, then the serial numberor batch number is displayed here. This field is not editable.

Start date The Start Date of the Part Item, which is the date when the item starts being used in for the entire Production Order cycle; isautomatically pre-filled. Users may change this accordingly. Take note that this date is also automatically adjusted as and whenthe Start date of Parent Item is changed.

Start timeThis field is only made available if in the Manufacturing Settings: Use Routings and Operations option is checked. The Start timeis automatically determined by the routing configuration such as the step relation, defining lag time, operations and throughputdays. This is computed based on the Bill of Material specification based on the applied routing at the back-end database withthe field named "eff-date". The Start time in the production order entry is named as "Start-time" in the database.

End date The End date of the Part Item, which is the last date of when the item is being completely used in the entire Production Ordercycle, is also automatically pre-filled. User may change this accordingly. This is also adjusted accordingly as and when theParent Item's Start date and end date is changed.

End time This field is only made available if in the Manufacturing Settings: Use Routings and Operations option is checked. The End timeis based on the quantity of hour item specified which is also influenced by the step relation and throughput days as per appliedrouting in the Bill of Material. This is computed based on the value stored in the BOM at the back end database field named"exp-date". The End time in the production order entry is named as "End-time" in the back-end database.

Cost Center This is the Cost Center automatically pre-filled based on the defined BOM setup.

Resource Enter the Resource ID or select from the resource lookup by pressing the PF5 key to specify each resource responsible for theItem in the Production Order.

CHAPTER 4


Drawing number The Drawing Number of the Bill of Material is pre-filled here. This field is not editable.

AmountThis displays the Cost Price of each Item.

"Note" icon Each item line can also be entered with additional notes or descriptions in the Production Order. Similarly as explained abovefor the Parent Item. Placing the active pointer here and clicking once, displays the note pop up screen, allowing the user to enternotes. Repeat steps explained above to complete notes.

"Paper clip" icon (Attachment) Instructions for materials or labors or machines could also be attached to the respective items accordingly for the productionorder. As explained above for the Parent Item, clicking at this cell displays the Attachment pop up screen to allow the user toattach relevant documents to each line of items.

Totals

Production Order The Production Order Number is displayed here.

Total: End ProductTotal Amount of the End Product is displayed.

Total: BOM Total Costs of the entire BOM is displayed here.


Total: Value added Total Value Added to the End Product is displayed based on the formula calculation: Total Value Added = Total End Product - Total BOM.

Process Flow Action buttons

After keying-in details for the production order, the production order is then considered to be entered or ordered. The production order process flow is by an entry of an order, after which it is authorized upon proper checking and validation.When the production order has been authorized, adequate planning is done before it can be released. When released, a greensignal is given to start the production order, after which printing of production order instructions can be done. To fulfill rawmaterials (items) for production, there is an issue of raw materials (items) issued by the warehouse. Items issued are used inthe production process to produce the finished goods. When items are issued, production can take place and be completed.The final stage is when the receiving of finished goods has to be made at the warehouse, at which point the production iscomplete and the production order is then executed with the Completion step.

The following are the functional process flow buttons made available in the Production order entry. Immediate actions for thenext process flow can be executed by clicking on the respective process flow functional button from within the production orderentry, without having to trigger via the Manufacturing entries menu path. This is most likely for a user who has full control oraccess rights over the production entry and processing.

Usually the availability or accessibility of menu path and functional buttons are by access rights according to job functions. Forinstance, the entry clerk is allowed for production order entry only and not for the rest of the process flow functionalities. Suchauthorization is done only by an authorized user such as the cost center manager; thus the cost center manager is allowed toaccess the production order authorize menu and the authorized process flow button.

CHAPTER 4


For information on the respective process flow button, see the relevant section as tabled below:

Process Flow button Description

Ordered

This is the Production order entry step whereby when a production order is entered at menu path [Manufacturing,Entries, Production order], it is automatically updated with status "Ordered" and "Open". This is shown with agreen tick in the process flow button with the date as of when it was entered, i.e."Ordered". This process flowbutton is merely for indicating the production order status.

Authorized This is the Authorization step done by the relevant authority. For information Sub section 4.2

ReleasedThis is the Production order Release step after ensuring that the relevant resources are all available. Forinformation see sub section 4.3

Printed This is the Printing of Production Instruction step together with Picking list to the relevant warehouse. Forinformation see sub section 4.4

IssuedThis is the step of Issuing raw materials, part items, labor hours, machine hours; to the production order; infulfillment of production order requirements. For information see sub section 4.5

ReceivedThis is the step for Receiving the already complete, produced or assembled End Item (i.e. Finished Product) at thereceiving warehouse. Fulfilling the Production Receipt also triggers the Production Order Completion functionality.For information see sub section 4.6

CompletedThis is the final step of setting the production order status to "Completed". This process flow button cannot betriggered similarly as the Ordered process flow button, and it serves to inform whether or not the production orderis completed. For information on updating production order status to "Completed" see Section 6.5

Actions within Production order Entry

There are functional buttons maintained within the Production order entry. This allows the user to possibly perform variousactions during the entry of production order or upon retrieval of production order.

The above shown are the functional buttons made available in the Production order Entry screen. Refer to table below for details:


SourceThis displays sales order information, if the current production order is generated from a sales order. Forinformation see sub Section 1.3.1

TransferThis allows inter-branch transfer items to make items available for production order. For information see subSection 1.3.2 Inter-branch Transfer whilst at Entry of Production Order.

Purchase This allows purchasing items whilst at production order entry. For information see sub Section 1.3.3 Purchasing

Outsource

This allows viewing outsource details when labor hours are already outsourced. This button is only enabled ifpurchase order with labor hour generated from purchase order (Purchase button) is processed, it meansoutsourcing a job to an outside supplier, which allows performing inter-branch transfer part items for theoutsource. For information see sub Section 1.3.4

Project This allows retrieval of the respective Project Master Card. For information on Project Master card, refer to the E-Project Product Manual.

MRPThis allows obtaining MRP overview for the Items in the Production order. For information on the MaterialRequirement Planning (MRP) Overview see Section 5.

SubordersThis allows retrieving sub-orders of the Parent Production order. For information see sub Section 1.3.5 RetrievingSub-Orders of Parent Production Order.

GenerateThis allows generating sub-production orders for Production orders consisting of sub assemblies. For informationsee sub Section 1.3.6 Generating Sub-Orders whilst Entering Parent Production Order.

SplitThis enables splitting production orders with large quantities. For information see sub Section 1.3.7 Split LargeVolume Production Order.


CHAPTER 4



ScrapThis button is enabled when part items have been issued / items recieved. This allows entering scrap quantities toscrap accordingly. For information see sub Section 1.3.8

ExplodeThis enables exploding Sub-Assembly Item within the Parent Production order. For information see sub Section1.3.9.

RejectThis enables users to Reject the entered Production order. For information see sub Section 4.2.2 RejectingProduction Order.

NewThis enables users to enter New Production Order. For information on Production order entry see sub Section 1.3Creating New or Opening Existing Production order.

Close This enables users to exit and close the Production order Entry functionality.


1.3.1 Production order source requirements

The purpose of the Source button in the Production Order entry screen is to show the source of requirementsfrom various types of orders. Related information such as order type, order number, requestor, etc. are shown forrequirement details. A Production order is allowed to have more than one source of requirement where it may be allocatedto different orders as required.

There are two main sources of requirement for creating a production order, which are external requirements from sales ordersand internal requirements for internal use. In some circumstances, a production order may be created without havingrequirements from any party when it is for a company's marketing strategy purposes. Therefore, the requirements for productionorders are important to provide a clear picture to a production planner for appropriate action taken.

CHAPTER 4


The Source button is activated once a production order is created and is raised by a requirement from either a salesorder or internal use. Relevant informationmay be viewed via this button. If a production order is created manually withouthaving a source of requirement, this button will only be activated after the order is authorized and no data will be shown viathis button. But if the end item has multi-levels in the Bill of Material (BOM) than production suborders are required to generate,the Source button in production suborders will show source information about their parent production order whether itis created upon request or manually.

In addition, a production order can be created immediately via the source of requirement screen; it can also be createdmanually and allocated at a later stage to other orders if any requirement is raised. The source button will also includeinformation for allocation.

DetailFor knowing the source of requirement of a particular production order, click on Source button from production orderscreen and a pop-up window is shown.

TypeThis is the order type of source requirement, these are always sales order, internal use or production order.

OrderThe order number of the order initiating the production order.


DescriptionIf the production order is raised via or allocated to a sales order, then the description is viewed via the sales order header.If the production order is raised via or allocated to an internal use, then the reason for internal use will be displayed in thiscolumn.

If the production order or suborder is raised via or allocated to another production order, the description is viewed viaproduction order header

Item codeThis displays the item code which is used to generate the production order.

Item descriptionThis displays the item description which is automatically retrieved once the item code is selected.

Ordered by• If a production order is raised by or allocated to a sales order, then the customer id and name will be shown.• If a production order is raised by or allocated to an internal use, then the requestor id and name will be shown.• If a production order or suborder is raised or allocated to a different production order, no data will be shown in this column.

QuantityQuantity requested to generate the production order.

UnitThis is the sales unit of the item from source of requirement.

StatusThis is the current status of source of requirement. The status changes to reflect the actual status.

CreatedThis is the date the source of requirement is created.

AttachmentThe attachment or print out is only available if the order request is from a sales order.

CHAPTER 4


WarehouseThis is the warehouse indicated in the source of requirement detail line. For example, if the warehouse from a sales orderheader is "Main", whereas the warehouse in the sales order line is "Sub", then the warehouse shown in source screen is "Sub"instead of "Main".

Project codeThis is the project code for the source of requirement

Highlight the line shown in the pop up window and click the Open button to view the order. For the example above,the requirement comes from sales order, thus the related sales order is launched immediately.

If wish to exit from the screen, click on the Close button.


1.3.2 Inter-branch transfers

Whilst entering a production order and taking note of the available stock comparison with the required quantity of materials,inter-branch transfers can be done using the Transfer functional button. It is important that the required quantity of materialsin the issuing warehouse is enough for the production order. When there is insufficient stock in the production order issuingwarehouse then the available stock of materials in secondary warehouses must be transferred to the production issuewarehouse. As such, the Transfer functionality makes a significant role in the production environment.

Inter-branch Transfer can be done by clicking on the Transfer function button made available in the Production Order Entryscreen as shown below:-

CHAPTER 4


Clicking on the Transfer button, displays the following Inter-branch Transfer screen:-

Prior to viewing the inter-branch suggestion list of materials or part items of the Production Order, it is required that the usermakes the relevant selections. The selection details are described as follows:-

SortThe purchases suggestion lists can be sorted by either Item Code or Supplier Code by selecting the respective sort criteria fromthe drop down list.

Warehouse Select the Warehouse in which the materials are required to be purchased.


Show: AllSelect this to view purchases suggestion list for all part items.

Show: Requirements<>Allocation Select this to view purchases suggestion list for part items that has production required quantity not equal to the allocatedquantity.

Show: Advice>0 Select this to view purchases suggestion list for part items that has purchase advice quantity more than zero.

Include: Stock Controlled Select this to view purchases suggestion list for part items that are stock controlled.

Based on the above selections, the list suggestions of materials (part items) for the inter-branch transfer are displayed.

To Transfer an item select the respective part item by clicking on the Selected column, as shown below:-

CHAPTER 4


By clicking once at the selected column by per item row, a green tick appears which indicates that the part item is selectedfor the inter-branch transfer.

At the Advice column, as shown below, enter the quantity you wish to transfer:-

Next, click on the Transfer button. The system then automatically performs the inter-branch transfer accordingly andthe Inter-branch transfer functionality is exited.


1.3.3 Purchasing for a production order

What do you do if, even with the capability of inter-branch transfers, there is insufficient availability of materials in stock in theprimary main warehouse and the other linked secondary warehouses? If you encounter such a situation while entering aproduction order, you must find another solution to obtain the required materials so that production can start on time. Onesolution is to buy the required materials from the supplier. This would require that you quit the production order entry andreturn to the Purchase Menu. This is not necessary if there is a "Purchase" function button in the Production Order Entry screen.

The "Purchase" function is chosen by clicking on the Purchase button contained in the Purchase Order Entry screen, as shown below:

CHAPTER 4


Clicking on the Purchase button, displays the following Purchase Order Generation screen, suggesting lists of suppliers that canbe purchased from:-

Prior selections must be done to obtain the intended suggestions list of suppliers. These selections are described as follows:-

SortThe purchases suggestion lists can be sorted by either Item Code or Supplier Code by selecting the respective sort criteria fromthe drop down list.

Warehouse Select the Warehouse in which the materials are required to be purchased.


Show: AllSelect this to view purchases suggestion list for all part items.

Show: Requirements<>Allocation Select this to view purchases suggestion list for part items that has production required quantity not equal to the allocatedquantity.

Show: Advice>0 Select this to view purchases suggestion list for part items that has purchase advice quantity more than zero.

Include: Stock Controlled Select this to view purchases suggestion list for part items that are stock controlled.

After the above appropriate selections are made, the list of purchases suggestions are listed for each linked supplier to the partitems. Now, it is user's discretion to select the intended supplier and advice purchases quantity accordingly.

CHAPTER 4


To select the desired purchase suggestion list, click once at the selected column by per item row. Selected suggestion is shownwith the green tick.

Take note that the Purchase Quantity advice is based on requirements. The Purchase Quantity can be entered with the requiredquantity.

Next, click on the Purchase button. System generates the Purchase Order for the selected part items with the advicequantity and it is displayed in the following 'Created: Order' screen:-


Simultaneously displaying the above screen, system also launches the Purchase Order Entry screen:-

CHAPTER 4


1.3.4 Outsourcing production work

The button Outsource in production order entry is to handle the outsourcing of production work to subcontractors due tointernal capacity limitation. While engaging services with subcontractor as labor hour planning, the related materials arerequired to ship from an internal warehouse to subcontractor's warehouse. Once the process is finished all the semi-finishedgoods or finished goods will be sent back to the manufacturer for necessary action taken.

Prerequisite conditions

Some of prerequisite conditions are required before activating button Outsource in production order entry and ensure thetransactions are running smoothly without interruption.

1. Warehouse forsubcontractor

The materials which areplanned for sending tosubcontractor need to setfor internal warehouse aswell as subcontractorwarehouses for warehousetransferring purposes.Dummy warehouses shallbe used for subcontractorsto segregate the internaland external warehouses.For example material itemAB1050 is linked to fewwarehouses includingwarehouse "SER1" whichis set as subcontractorwarehouse


2. Material segregation to labor hour grouping

One of the principles of setting BOM is to identify the material used in the particular operation. This is done by segregating materialsfor each labor hour as the production operation is applied. Refer to the screenshot below. Materials used in the particular operationare entered immediate after the labor hour, for the above mentioned purpose. It is important, especially while performing printingor outsourcing, that the system be able to detect the materials used in by each operation or per labor hour.

CHAPTER 4


3. Subcontractor hour item

The hour item used for outsourcing must be linked with the intended suppliers and the attribute Buy must be ticked


Detail

Create a production order planned for subcontractor work and authorize the production order. The Purchase buttonenables the creation of a purchase order to be issued to the subcontractor. Click on this button to display a window to selectthe subcontractor. Click on the Purchase button again to create the purchase order.

CHAPTER 4


Detail Once the purchase order screen has been successfully created, the order must be authorized and processed forconfirmation of the service purchased. Exit from the purchase order screen and go back to the production order entry screen.The Outsource button is now activated.

To transfer the materials from the internal warehouse to the subcontractor's warehouse, click on the Outsource button


i) Columns under labor section Only information related to a purchased labor hour item is displayed in this section:

This includes: Stock Controlled This option shows stock controlled items in this section.

CHAPTER 4


ItemThe labor item which is used to purchase the subcontractor service.

DescriptionThe description of a labor item

SupplierThe subcontractor id obtained from the purchase order created.

NameThe name of the subcontractor

PO numberThe Purchase order number created for the subcontractor

ProjectThe project code of the purchase order

Fulfillment date (PO line)The fulfillment date in the purchase order line is important. A purchase order may have multiple purchase order lines withvarious fulfillment dates.

ii) Columns under material section These columns display information about materials for warehouse transfer purposes:

ItemThe material code in the production order which may be used for shipping out to the subcontractor

DescriptionThe description of the material

QuantityThe quantity of materials needed for transfer of each item


UnitThe unit in which the material is sold.

WarehouseThe original planned warehouse before the material transfer. This warehouse may be changed after the transfer had been done.

SelectSelect the materials for warehouse transfer by double clicking on this column.

Error MessageAn error message will be displayed if any error occurs during warehouse transfer.

iii) Additional options for creating warehouse transfer or Inter-branch Transfer (IBT)

Create transferThis option is used to create an IBT request for the selected materials. If enabled, this optional system will create an IBT request,and all the materials under this request will be transferred to the subcontractor's warehouse. If this option is unchecked, therewill not be an IBT request, but the warehouse will be updated in the production order BOM structure.

Receiving warehouseThe warehouse that will receive the materials, normally is the subcontractor's warehouse. The purpose of having this warehouseis to keep track of the inventory availability of the subcontractor who is segregated from the internal warehouse

Receiving locationThe warehouse location where materials are received

Transaction dateThe date when an IBT request is received. A future date is supported as well to indicate the date on which the transferring ofmaterials is to start.

The main purpose of the Outsource button is to handle the subcontracted work which the system allows, in order to create anInter-bbranch TTransfer (refer to the Inter-branch Transfer section of the E-Inventory for further details) of the materials requiredto be shipped out to the subcontractor.

CHAPTER 4


In the outsource screen, select the materials required for transfer and select the receiving warehouse, then click on the OKbutton. This will create an Inter-branch Transfer and display message:

Click the OK button to close the screen, and exit to the outsource screen. The original planned warehouses are nowchanged to the selected receiving warehouses.

Now click on the Close button on the outsource screen and exit to the production order screen. The material lines underthe BOM section are changed to the warehouse used in the IBT request.

Additional information

While creating a warehouse transfer, the system will not allow the receiving warehouse to be the same as the selectedmaterials' warehouses, and an error message will be displayed:

Select the OK button and go back to the outsource screen. If you wish to send an E-mail to another party, click on the

E-mmail button, and Microsoft Outlook will be launched.


In certain conditions, while creating a warehouse transfer without any material line having been selected, the system does notallow proceeding to the subsequent steps and will display an error message prompt:

Select the OK button and go back to the outsource screen. Click the Close button on the outsource screen, andexit to the production order screen. In the BOM section of production order, change the material lines under BOM section tothe selected receiving warehouse on the outsource screen.

CHAPTER 4


1.3.5 Suborders

Existing sub-production orders can be retrieved from within the parent production order by clicking on the Suborders functionbutton. The following describes the Suborders function button.

The Suborders button is available on the Production Order entry screen as shown in the screen shot example below:-


Clicking on the Suborders function button displays the suborders details screen, which shows the list of sub-production orders,as in the example below:-

Details of fields in the suborder details screen are described as follows:-

Start date This displays the sub-production order start date.

ProjectThis displays the suborder's project code.

Auth. (Authorized) This indicates whether the suborder has been authorized. A green tick indicates that the suborder has been authorized.

CHAPTER 4


Rejected A green tick here indicates that the suborder has been rejected.

Item This displays the parent item code of the sub-production order.

Description This displays the sub-production order description.

QuantityThis displays the quantity of thesub-production order.

UnitThis displays the unit of measure for the parent item in the sub-production order.

Amount MYR This displays the sub-production order amount.

Warehouse This displays the sub-production order receiving warehouse.


Retrieving Suborders

Click on the Zoom button to retrieve the sub-production order. The system launches the production order entry screenof the suborder, as shown in the example below:-

Note that the parent production order number is PRO400000012 and the suborder is generated with the same number but followed

by .001, which is PRO4000000012.001

CHAPTER 4


1.3.6 Generating Sub orders

Sub-production orders can be generated automatically, provided that the BOM (Bill of Material) of the parent production orderconsists of a separate child BOM. The child BOM can be of another sub-assembly which is a standard make item by itself withinthe parent BOM. Take note that the child BOM within the parent BOM is specified with an Always condition but not with aPhantom condition or a Phantom item, as this will be fully exploded in the BOM. Only when the sub-assembly has an Alwayscondition will it be able to generate suborders. When a production order is entered with such a BOM (Bill of Material), theGenerate SSuborders function button will be automatically enabled, so that the user will be able to also generate productionorders for the child BOM.

The Generate SSuborders function button is maintained on the production order entry screen, as shown in the screen shotexample below:-


Clicking on the Generate SSub-oorders button will display the following suborder generation screen:-

Details of fields of the suborders generation screen are as follows:-

Item This displays the parent item code of the child bill of materials for which the Production order is to be generated.

Description This displays the item description of the child bill of materials.

Version This displays the child BOM version.

Main Version If ticked, this box indicates that the child BOM version is the main version.

Warehouse This displays the child BOM warehouse.

QuantityThis displays the quantity of the child BOM in the parent BOM production order.

CHAPTER 4


UnitThis displays the unit of measure for the child BOM.

Selected This is the column whereby it is checked or unchecked to select the child BOM to generate a production order. Click once tocheck with a green tick to select the child BOM version for generating a production order.

LevelBy default, the value of zero is pre-filled. If the level = 0, then production orders will be generated to the lowest level of the BOM forall sub-assemblies. If the level=1, then suborders will only be generated up to level 1 of the BOM. If the level = 2, then productionorders will be generated up to level 2 only, and so on. Enter the required Levels of BOM to generate the Production order.

After selecting the intended child BOM, click on the OK button. The following confirmation message is displayed:

This informs the user that the sub-production orders have been generated for the selected Child BOM.

The already generated sub-production orders can be retrieved from within the Parent Production orders using the Subordersfunction button.


1.3.7 Split large-volume production orders

Split functionality in the production orders is implemented to facilitate large volumes of production order quantity. This makesit simpler and easier to manage, plan and coordinate a large volume production order. This is also associated with theproduction floor capacity. For example, if one has a capacity to run only 100 items per cycle on each production floor, then aproduction order with a quantity of 200 can be split into two for two production floors. Then the respective production floormanager can plan, coordinate, and manage production jobs efficiently and deliver the end product in time.

The Split functional button is available on the production order entry screen, as shown in the screen shot example below:-

CHAPTER 4


Clicking on the Split button prompts the following message:

The above message informs the user that the Production Order has been allocated to resources, cost center, warehouse,warehouse location, start date, and end date, with the required quantity not having been split. It also prompts whether the userwishes to unallocated them.

Click on the No to cancel the splitting process. Click on the Yes button to continue splitting by un-allocating the production orderquantity. Quantity will be unallocated and the following Split function will be displayed:-


Details of the fields displayed and those required for users' input are described as follows:-

Item This displays the parent item code (end product) of the production order.

OriginalThis displays the production order quantity which had originally been specified (before having been split up).

Selected Checking this box indicates that the production order was selected to be split up. Checking this enables the percentage andchange column.

Percentage Enter the Percentage of the New Quantity for the Production order. If this is not specified, then this will be automaticallycalculated, based on the Change Quantity entered.

Change Enter the Change Quantity for the Production Order. If this is not specified, then this will be automatically calculated, based onthe Percentage entered.

New This field is not editable. This value will be automatically calculated, based on the entered Percentage value or Change value.

CHAPTER 4


After having specified the required fields, click on the OK button. The Original Production Order is updated with theChange value, as shown in the example below:-


The Split Balance is then generated into a Child Production Order, as shown in the example below:

Note that the balance quantity split is then generated into a child production order with same order number but followed by .001. The

Change value is then changed to the Parent Production order - PRO400000011 and Balance in Child Production Order -

PRO400000011.002.

CHAPTER 4


1.3.8 Scrap in production orders

Besides setting up the related general ledger, to activate the Scrap button, the system also requires information from theproduction orders about transactions done for issuing components or for receiving make items. If only components issuing isincurred, related components will only display the items on the Scrap screen, excluding make items or by-products. In addition,the system does not allow scrapping after the production order has been completed. Upon entering scrap quantities of aparticular item, a reason code is required to justify the entry, and this transaction will be journalized before the program can bechanged to a production scrap setting.

Detail


In the menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, PProduction oorders] the Scrap button will only be activated after transactionshad been done for items issuing or receiving in a production order,. Clicking on this button will display the Scrap screen:

CHAPTER 4


The columns displayed on the Scrap screen are defined below:

Resource The name of the resource that performs the scrapping and which is retrieved during system login

Scrap date The date when the scrap entry was created. This date is not editable.

Entry numberThe general journal entry number, which is system generated, will be used for financial transactions. This field is not editable.

Item Items used in the production order which are either materials, make items, or by-products, listed for scrap or rejection. This fieldis not editable.

DescriptionThe description of the item is automatically displayed, based on the defined item on the maintenance card. This field is noteditable.

StatusThe status of the item. Normally it will be in active status. This field is not editable.

WarehouseThe warehouse for scrap is same as the issuing or receiving warehouse of a particular item. This field is not editable.

LocationThe scrap location is always the same as the location used during production issuing or receiving

RoutingThe Routing used in the production order. (The column will only appear if the setting "Use routings and operation" has beenturned ON)


Step The component required in the specific routing (The column will only appear if the setting the "Use routings and operation" hasbeen turned ON)

Realized The quantity issued or received of each item in the production order. The system will count the total quantity realized if thesetransactions are applied to the same item and same production order.

Returned The quantity returned of each item in the production order.

ScrapThe quantities scrapped or rejected. Control is set to stop the scrapping process if the quantity scrapprd exceeds the realizedquantity.

UnitThe sales unit of the item used in the production order

Serial/batch numberSerial or batch numbers are assigned during stock issuing or receiving. These are not editable on the scrap screen. For a serialitem, the quantity realized must be equal to 1, and the item must be scrapped to the specific or right serial number.

Lot numberThe lot number of a serial or batch item used during issuing or receiving of the production order.

Reason code In this column the scrapping must be justified by entering a reason. (Filling in this column is mandatory).

Cost center The cost center used in the production order. It can be entered through either the Bill of materials (BOM) setting or theproduction order entry.

CHAPTER 4


Production order

This is the current production order use for scrap.

After having entered the required data, select the Scrap button again to precede the transaction. To cancel theaction, select the Cancel button. The Scrap transaction can be performed not only via menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries,Production oorder], but also via menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, RReceipts pproduction]. The ways in which scrap transactionare performed are similar in both menu paths.

Under some circumstances, the Scrap button may become inactivated because Show on the main overview screen hadbeen set to 'Parent project'. The program was written in this way to avoid the scrapping of the same item from parent-childorders by unintended actions. This can happen in both menu paths Manufacturing, Entries, Production oorder] and[Manufacturing, EEntries, RReceipts pproduction] The screenshot is shown below:


Once the production order has been completed, financial transactions for production are recorded accordingly. In the settingsand transactions recorded in a production order, scrap is included as part of the production costs. An example is given belowto show how double entries for a production transaction include scrap:

Process GL Account Debit Credit

Issue Stock 1055

Production cost 1050

Production waste 5

1055 1055

Receipt Stock 1500

Production revenue 1500

1500 1500

Returns ((Materials) Stock (Materials) 105

Production cost 105

105 105

Returns ((Finished GGoods) Stock (FG) 150


150 150

Scrap ((Finished GGoods) Stock (FG) 150

Production scrap 150

150 150

Scrap ((Materials) Production cost 105


105 105

Complete Production cost 1050


Production waste 5


Production result 1310 1350

2660 2660

CHAPTER 4


1.3.9 Exploding sub-assembly items

An alternative to creating Sub orders to a Production Order comprising Child BOM / Sub-Assembly Items is to itemize items ofthe.Child BOM (Subassembly Item) within the Parent Production Order itself. This is made easy with the implementation of theExplode function button.

Please note that the Explode function is only enabled within a Production Order comprising Sub-Assembly Items, and that theuser needs to place the active pointer on the Subassembly Item order line. The "Explode" function features are as follows:

The Explode function button is maintained within the production order entry, shown as disabled in the following productionorder entry screen shot example:-

Note that once the sub-assembly item has been exploded, the explode button is disabled again.


2. Production order authorization

Authorization of the Production order is essential, even when it can be either mandatory or optional. It can be set at theSystem Settings via menu path [System, GGeneral, SSettings, aand MManufacturing SSettings]. Authorization is said to beessential, because it serves as means of control and a check and validation point of entered production orders. Thisfunction is described as follows:

Other than the Process flow button, the Production Order Authorization function can be triggered via menu path [Manufacturing,Entries, AAuthorize pproduction], which displays the following main overview screen of production order authorization:

There is one change in Manufacturing / Entries / Authorize production.

• The Copy bbudgets functionality has been added, but only available if you have both E-PProduction and E-PProject in your

Exact Globe 2003 license. • This functionality is described below:

1. The Copy bbudgets button is enabled when the selection criteria Show is set to All. 2. Select a production order or multiple select production orders and click the Copy bbudgets button. In the new dialog box,

click Copy bbudgets again3. Select the Budget sscenario and Click OK. Otherwise click Cancel. 4. The budget is copied to the selected production order.5. The budget status appears as Budgets ccopied at the Result column as shown below:

CHAPTER 4


6. In the Authorize production menu, select Budgets ccopied at the Check section to enable the Budgets ccopied column inthe list box and see if the budgets have been copied as shown below:

This screen consists of execution buttons, search and filter fields, and check fields that are as follows:

Search Clicking on this button executes the search process and displays search results based on the last user's selection of the searchand filter criteria.

Clear Clicking on this button, will cause the system to clear all users' selection of search criteria and resets the criteria to the default values.

Number of rowsThe default value is 100 numbers of rows of production orders in the results panel. The user may change this to the desirednumber of production order rows to be displayed in the results.

Filter • Starts with

This option executes the search process based on the character that it starts with, as per entered value in the search criteria.

• ContainsThis option, executes a search process based on the characters contained exactly as per entered value in the search criteria.


CHAPTER 4


Warehouse Select from drop-down list the specific Warehouse to filter production orders belonging to the selected warehouse. The defaultvalue is All , which displays production orders from all warehouses.

Start Date & To The default value is the 6th day of the current week until the current date, which displays production orders that have a currentStart Date. Select the specific range of dates to obtain the intended production orders. Check in the "All" box to obtain aproduction order that has all dates as per user-defined financial year Start Date.

End Date & To The default value is that the "All" checkbox is selected, which displays production orders that have all dates as per user-definedfinancial year-end date. Select specific range of dates to obtain production orders that have the selected range of End Date.

Production order If the Production order Number is known, select the specific production order number to obtain its record. By default, nospecific production order number is selected, and thus all production orders are displayed.

Parent ProjectSelect a specific parent production project to obtain its records of parent and child production orders. By default, no specificparent order is selected, and thus production orders are displayed regardless of any parent orders.

Item Select a specific item to obtain its records of production orders. The default value is "nil" which displays production ordersregardless of any Item.

Description Key-in the specific production order description to obtain its records of production orders. The default value is "nil" whichdisplays production orders regardless of any Description.


Show • Parent

This option, displays only the parent production orders.

• AllThis option displays all parent and child production orders.

Sales orderSelect a specific sales order to obtain record(s) of a production order derived from the sales order. This is the case when theproduction order is generated based on the customers demand (sales order) which is most likely in a make-to-ordermanufacturing environment.

StatusOpen Checking this box allows the user to obtain production order records that are still Open. Production Orders with thestatusOpen are the ones that have just beenentered / ordered and are yet to be authorized.

Authorized Checking this box allows the user to obtain production order records that have already been Authorized. Authorized status isonly allocated when checks and validations have been performed on the production order and proceeding to the next step hasbeen authorized.

Rejected Checking this box allows the user to obtain production order records that have already been Rejected. Rejected status isallocated when checks and validations have been performed on the production order, but production is Not AApproved.

Released Checking this box allows the user to obtain production order records that have already been Released. Released status isallocated when giving a signal to production supervisor to print production tickets or instruction and start issuing materials andcommence work in work centers after checking that the resources, shop floor capacity and materials are ready to proceed withthe production order.

CHAPTER 4


Printed Checking this box allows the user to obtain production order records that are already Printed. Printed status is allocated whenProduction Order instructions have already been printed to proceed with issuing materials and execute work center jobs.

Check

ItemsMarking this box allows checking for blocked items in the production orders.

StockMarking this box allows checking for whether the stocks do not exceed the maximum as defined in the item.

Warehouse Marking this box allows checking whether the warehouse, for which it is ordered, is blocked.

Sales OrdersMarking this box allows checking whether the production order is linked to a sales order.

Serial / Batch Marking this box allows checking for whether the serial and/or batch number for serial and/or batch items that are assigned tothe main item or BOM lines are blocked.


Displays PanelDisplay by Show: Parent Project

CHAPTER 4


Display by Show: All

Details of Fields

Fields of details in the display panel are as follows:

Production order This displays the production order number.

Description This displays the production order description


Parent ProjectThis displays the parent order number.

Item code This displays the item code.

QuantityThis displays the item quantity ordered in the production order.

Start date This displays the production order start date.

End date This displays the production order end date.

Warehouse This displays the warehouse code of the production order.

Auth. (Authorized) This indicates whether the displayed Production order is authorized. Authorized production order is shown checked with agreen tick.

Rejected This indicates whether the displayed production order has been rejected. The rejected production order is shown checked witha green tick.

CHAPTER 4


The function buttons available are those commonly implemented in the production order entry main overview. These are as follows:


The user may perform some of the actions using the functional buttons on this main overview of the production orderauthorization screen.

Function button Descriptions

Note This button enables user to insert notes to production order without retrieving the production order. See sub Section 4.8.1 for information.

Attachment This button enables user to attach a document to the production order without retrieving the production order. See sub Section 4.8.2 for information.

Sales oorderThis button enables retrieval of the sales order entry if the production order is allocated to the sales order. Forinformation on the sales order entry, obtain the Logistics Product Manual.

MRP This button enables retrieval of the material requirement planning overview for the respective production orders.For information on MRP see Section 5.0

ProjectThis button enables retrieval of the project master card if the production order has project. For information onproject master card, obtain the E-Project Product Manual

Auth. This button enables the Authorizing of the entered production order. For information, see sub Section 4.2.1.

Reject This button enables the user to reject the production order. See sub Section 4.2.2 for relevant information.

Open This button enables retrieval of the production order entry. See sub Section 4.1.3 for relevant information

Close This button enables the user to exit from the production order entries function by closing the screen.


2.1 Authorizing production orders

As and when there is a demand, production orders are entered by the production staffs, without verifying whether it is valid ornot, as it is not within their scope of authority. One should not take for granted that one can proceed with any and everyproduction order or requests entered. This would result in inefficient costing; an unorganized production floor due to limitedcapacity meeting high volume of jobs, and delay in meeting datelines, high unmanageable stock volume, and gradual wasting,or stock may become deteriorated. This may even result in unauthorized and invalid execution of production orders. For these reasons, prior checking and validation must be done on all production orders that are requested. It is important thatall details, and most importantly quantity, pricing amount, credit limi,t and dates all be correctly entered on the productionorder. Validating and checking is done against current stock availability and available raw materials, current warehouses, linkedsales orders, and serial batch numbers of the items. After checks and validation, the production order requested can beapproved. To do these, the Authorize function is implemented throughout Exact GGlobe 22003.

Authorizing a production order can be done from within the production order entry screen or at menu path [Manufacturing,Entries, AAuthorize pproduction]. The authorized process flow button can also be found in the production entry screen at thebottom section, as shown below:

CHAPTER 4


Clicking on this authorized process flow button within the production order entry screen automatically checksand approves the production order. Note that before Authorization is made, the authorized process flow buttonis shown with a red cross mark, which indicates that the production order is Not AAuthorized.

When the production order is already authorized, then the authorized process flow button is shown with a greentick and the text "Yes" which indicates that it is Authorized.

By following menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, aand AAuthorize pproduction]...the following screen is displayed:


The list of production orders are displayed here in the [Authorize PProduction OOrder] menu path.

One may choose to perform some of the checks by selecting the respective check boxes. To authorize a production order, selectthe production order record line and click on the Auth. (Authorize) button at the bottom.

Clicking on the Authorize button then executes the checks and authorizes the selected production order. The already authorizedproduction order record line is then shown checked, as in the example below:

CHAPTER 4


2.2 Rejecting production orders

Not all production orders can be caried out, as various factors have to be considered before production orders can be executed.Upon careful consideration on planning, capacity, demand, forecast, credit limit, availability of resources, and other relevantaspects, production orders can be authorized or even rejected. The question is how these rejected production orders can bemarked as rejected within systems that mostly do not have such features. In Exact Globe 2003, the reject function button notonly rejects an entered production order, but also makes it possible for the user to notify the relevant parties. The followingdescribes the reject function and details of fields:.

The Reject function is available not only on the production order authorization function, but is also maintained on theproduction order entry screen, as shown in the example below:


The Reject function in the production order authorization is maintained as shown in the screen shot example below:

CHAPTER 4


Clicking on the Reject button displays the email notification screen, as shown in the screen shot example below:

Name This box automatically displays the name of the resource that entered the production order as specified in the production orderheader entry.

E-mail (To:) This box specifies the Email address of the resource, who is the recipient of the email notification.

SubjectThis box is automatically pre-filled-in by the system.

Body panelThe notification remarks must be filled-in in this box.

Click on the Send button to send the notification of production order rejection to the relevant resource. This actionsends out the rejection notification and simultaneously sets the production order status to Rejected.

To reject a production order without sending email notification, click on the Skip button. This automatically sets theproduction order status to Rejected.

Click on the Cancel button to cancel the rejection of the production order.

If the rejected productionorder is to be consideredagain for authorization, therejected status can bbeundone by just clicking onthe Authorize process flowbutton. This step can also be done via menu path[Manufacturing, EEntries,Authorize pproduction] andselected to authorize therejected production order.


The production order which is rejected is then shown with Rejected status, as shown in the screen shot example below:

Retrieving of the Rejected Production Order is then shown by the extra process flow button Rejected ,displaying the date whenthe reject was made, as shown in the example of screen shot below:

Note: To Un-AAuthorize and Not-RReject a production order, the authorize button can be clicked again upon the authorized production

order, which is then updated with the status entered // oordered.

CHAPTER 4


3. Releasing production orders

Releasing the Production order can be done at menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, RRelease], which triggers the mainoverview screen of Production OOrder RRelease. The main overview allows searching and filtering of the intended productionorder to be released in order to proceed with the production processes and execution. The function and fields details aredescribed as follows:

The Main Overview of Production Order Release screen is displayed when menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, RRelease] isselected, as shown in the screen shot example below:


The fields details contained in this screen are as follows:

Warehouse Select the specific warehouse from the drop-down list, to obtain production orders that belong to the selected Warehouse.

Start Date & To Select the specific Production Order Start Date to obtain records of production orders that fall within the selected range of startdates. By default, the "All" checkbox will be selected, which displays production orders that fall within the range of start dateswithin the user-defined financial year.

End Date & To Select the specific Production Order End Date to obtain records of production orders that fall within the selected range of enddates. By default,the"All" checkbox will be selected, which displays production orders that fall within the range of end dateswithin the user-defined financial year.

Production order If the production order number is known, select the specific production order to obtain its records. By default, the "All"checkbox is selected, which displays all production orders regardless of production order number.

Status

Authorized Check this box to obtain records of production orders that have already been "Authorized".

Released Check this box to obtain records of production orders that have already been "Released".

CHAPTER 4


Show

Parent ProjectSelect this option to obtain Parent Orders of production orders.

AllSelect this option to obtain all Parent and Child Production orders.

PrintCheck this box to obtain records of production orders that have already been printed.

Display PanelDisplay by Show: Parent Project


Display by Show: All

Details displayed in the display panel are as follows:

Production order This displays the pumber of the production order.

Description This displays a description of the production order.

CHAPTER 4


Parent ProjectThis displays the parent order number of the production order.

Item This displays the item code as quoted in the production order.

QuantityThis displays the production order quantity as quoted in the production order.

Start date This displays the production order start date.

End date This displays the production order end date.

StatusThis displays the production order's status.

Start time This displays the production order's start time.

Resource This displays the name of the resource that entered the production order.



Various actions can be performed using the functional buttons on this screen. Some function buttons are commonlyimplemented across the Manufacturing Entries menu path. These are:


Refresh This button provides results based on the latest search and criteria selection.

Note This button enables the user to insert notes to production orders without retrieving the production order. See subSection 4.8.1 - Related Common Functions for information.

Attachment This button enables the user to attach the document to the production order without retrieving the productionorder. See sub Section 4.8.2 - Related Common Functions for information.

ProjectThis button enables retrieval of the Project Master Card if the production order has a project. For information on theProject Master Card, obtain E-Project Product Manual.

Open This button enables retrieval of the production order entry. See sub Section 1.3 for relevant information

Sorting SSequenceThis enables the user to plan the production order start time upon ensuring the priority and intended productionsequence. See sub Section 3.1 for more information.

ReleaseThis allows the production order release which gives a signal that the production can proceed. For information seesub section 3.2.

Close This button enables the user to exit from the production order entries function by closing the screen.

CHAPTER 4


3.1 Sorting sequence for production order release

Prioritizing the release of production orders is essential when taking into account the Dateline demanded by customers forDelivery, or Internal Needs for meeting Stock levels and also considering the availability of Time, Capacity, Quantity, andResources (people, materials and tools). The sequence of production orders can be sorted by planning the production orderstart time in accordance with business prioritization with the above in mind. The Sorting SSequence of the production order canbe set by using the Sorting Sequence functional button.

The Sequencing function is available under the Release function via menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, RRelease] as shown inthe screen shot example below:


Upon releasing more than one (>1) production order, these production orders can be prioritized by allocating a sequence levelto each of them among the rest of the production orders.

Selecting a production order can be given a higher prioritization by planning the production order start time. Clicking once onthe Sorting SSequence button displays the following Plan screen:

Enter the intended production order start time based on the prioritization and production sequence. Click on the OK button to save the planned start time. Otherwise click on the Cancel button to undo the entered data or exitfrom this screen without saving any planned time.

The newly entered start time is then reflected in the main overview of the production release screen, as shown in the screenshot example below:

CHAPTER 4


3.2 Releasing production orders

It must now be decided whether or when the Authorized Production Order should start. Prior to starting Production, some importantareas of planning should be considered. These involve, inter alia, the availability of raw materials, including available stock andpurchases of raw materials; availability of resources that can do the job, which involves labor hour planning, availability ofproduction machines, the capacity of these machines, and machine hour planning. All these tie up with the delivery dateline whichneeds to meet the customer's dateline

For better control, coordination, efficiency, and production priority in the real-life manufacturing environment, the Release functionwas introduced. The Release function commences the production with the printing of instructions, which is a signal that all relevantaspects are ready for production to start. This practice results in the production manager having full control and visibility to prioritizeproduction orders and to determine whether or not production of a specific order is ready for shop floor execution.

The Production Order can be released from within the Production Order Entry screen or via the menu path [Manufacturing,Entries, RRelease].

The Release process flow button is at the bottom section of the Production Order Entry screen as shown in the example below:

To Release the production order, click on the Released process flow button. Take note that before the ProductionOrder is released, the Released process flow button is shown with a red cross mark which indicates that theproduction order has not yet been released. Also Note that the Production Order cannot be released without firsthaving been authorized.


After having ensured that raw materials, shop floor capacity, and resources correlate with the customer's dateline, theproduction order can be released.

Production Orders can also be released via menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, RRelease]. The following Main Overview screenis displayed:

Within the Release menu path, the listed records of all Authorized Production Orders are displayed. Select the Production Orderwith the highest priority and click on the Release button in the bottom row of function buttons.

Selecting a production order and clicking on the Release button releases the production order; and indicates the with theReleased sstatus oof tthe oorder, as shown in the example below:

The already Released Production Order is indicated by a green tick and the text "Yes".

CHAPTER 4


It is possible to trigger the printing of theProduction Order Instructions when the production order is released. This can be doneby selecting the Print check box before clicking on the Release button. Note that the Print check box will only be made availableif Print PProduction oorder is checked in the Manufacturing SSettings.

This allows the user to quickly print instructions at the time when the production order is released, which saves a lot of time.This is discussed in the Section - Print Production Order Instructions.


4. Printing production order instructions

Production Order Instructions can be printed after the Production Order has been authorized and released. The printedInstruction is a list of all required materials, labor hours, machine hours and other shop floor processes to be used in-conjunction with executing the production jobs. This is an instruction to production orders that can be distributed to therespective work centers to perform the necessary preparations and actions for the production job. This instruction is also usedas the basis of issuing raw materials for the production jobs to run, as it states the requirements for the production orders. Theprinting of Production Order can be done using the Print IInstructions function.

Production order instructions can be printed within the Production Order Entry screen or via menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries,Instructions].

The Printed processflow button within theProduction Orderentry screen is shownin the example screenshot below, whichallows the user toprint instructions:

CHAPTER 4


Retrieving the Production Order entry and clicking on the Printed process flow button allows the user to Print the Instructions.

When the Printed process flow button is clicked, the Print: Production order screen will be displayed. See the screen shot below:

Similarly, by following menu path[Manufacturing, EEntries, IInstructions],the Print: Production OOrder sscreen willbe displayed but with the lists of allProduction order records that havealready been authorized and released.

The Print: Production Order screen willalso be triggered during the ProductionOrder RRelease when the Print checkboxis selected.

Click on the Printed process flow button to print.. This will trigger the Print Instructions function, which will bediscussed in the following section. Take note that the "Printed" process flow button is shown with the red ccrossmark which indicates that the Production Order has not been printed. Also note that the Production Order mustbe authorized and released first in order for the Instructions to be printed.

After the Production Order has been printed for Production Order Instructions, the Printed process flow buttonis shown with a green ttick next to the word Yes which indicates that the Production Order has been printed.


The required selections and usage of functions on this screen are discussed as follows:

Process section

Process

TrialThis option allows the printing of only a Trial production order instruction. This does not state the Production Order status asPrinted. The Production Order status remains Released.

FinalThis option allows printing of the actual production order instruction. This states that the production order status as Printed.Re-printing of the production order instruction can be done even if the Status Printed is indicated.

Output: Printer Output to the printer is set to default printer. You may set the system to a different Printer as the default printer at Windowssettings via menu path [Start, Printers and Faxes].

Date — The current date when the production order instruction is printed is the default pre-filled-in value

LayoutLayouts for documents being printed can be defined via menu path [System, GGeneral, SSettings, DDocument SSettings], at theProduction OOrder field.

CHAPTER 4


Collective LayoutThis option is displayed on the Print Production Order screen as displayed above, when the Manufacturing Settings for theoption Use MMultiple LLayout is enabled, as shown below:

Select the appropriate Collective Layout by clicking on the lookup button. Collective Layouts can be defined via the menupath [System, LLogistics, LLayout, MMultiple LLayouts ffor PProduction SSheets], which is displayed when the setting, Use mmultiplelayouts, is enabled.

Collective Layouts allows the printing of more than one document layout, for example the printing of work instructions, materialissue orders, production requirements lists, and production order details.

Bar codeSelect the bar code type required to print bar codes. There are 3 bar code types implemented in the EG2003. Only make itemswhich are end product or by-product that are quoted in the production order can be printed with bar code, provided that it isdefined and linked to the relevant bar code type via the bar code button in the Maintain IItem MMaster card at the inventory tab.


General Selections Section

The above section is enabled when instructions are printed via menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, IInstructions], because thisoption allows printing not specifically one (retrieved / opened) production order but lists all authorized and releasedproduction orders that can be selected using these selection options. These options are described as follows:

Selection Method: Production Order This option, allows the selection of the production order, whereby the Production OOrder field is displayed as shown above.

Selection Method: Item This option allows the selection of the Item, whereby the "Item" field is displayed as shown above.

Selection Method: Start date This option allows the selection of a Start date, whereby the "Start date" field is displayed.

Selection Method: ParentThis option allows the selection of the Parent, whereby the "Parent" field is displayed.

CHAPTER 4


SelectivelyBy default this is checked, which allows the user to select an individual record of Production order to print its instruction, wherebylists of all authorized and released production orders are displayed. Unchecking this box allows printing instructions for allauthorized and released production orders, whereby the lists displayed at the bottom is hidden, as shown in the example below:

The number of production orders can be calculated instead, by clicking on the button, which then displays the number ofrecords that will be printed for production order instructions.

Warehouse Select the specific Warehouse to retrieve the production orders that belongs to that selected Warehouse. By default, Allwarehouses are selected.

Labor hoursSelect the Labor Hour Item or range of Labor Hour Items to print instructions for the selected labor hour items in the selectedproduction orders. By default the All checkbox is selected, whereby all labor hour items in the selected production orders areprinted.

Depending on the options selected in the Selection Method field, the following fields are enabled:

Production Order Select a Production order or range of production orders to view and print the selected production orders. By default, the Allcheckbox is selected, which displays all production orders and allows printing of all production orders.

Item Code Select an Item Code or range of Item codes to view and print production orders that consist of the selected items. By default,the All checkbox is selected, which displays the production order and allows the printing of the production order consisting ofall items.

Start date Select the Start date or range of Start dates to view and print production orders that have the selected start date.. By default,the "All" checkbox is selected, which displays and allows the printing of the production order that shows all start dates as peruser-defined current financial periods.

Options section

These are options which one can check to enable the printing of attachments, BOM lines, instructions, and suborders byspecifying their levels.

Print AttachmentChoosing this allows the printing of documents attached to the Production Order when printing Instructions.

Print: Attachments (BOM lines) This option allows one to print attachments of BOM lines of a production order. One may also create attachments for BOM linesof a production order by following similar steps as for the end product lines of a production order, as explained in section 1.3 - Entering / Retrieving Production Order

Print: InstructionsThis option allows the printing of BOM Instructions defined on the BOM creation screen. One may create instructions for theBOM of a production order on the BOM maintenance screen. From the BOM maintenance screen, open a BOM screen of theitem. At the top right hand corner, next to the text Instructions, click on the paper clip icon. The following screen is displayed:


ParentSelect the Parent Item or range of Parent Item to view, and print Production orders that show the selected parent item. Bydefault, the "All" checkbox is selected, which displays and allows the printing of the production orders showing all Parent Items.

CHAPTER 4


Print: Suborder This option allows one to print production orders for suborders when the existing suborders had been created based on subassemblies quoted in the production order. A production order can have suborders if there are sub-assemblies quoted, whereby one can generate suborders for them. Thus this option prints existing suborders for a production order.

LevelThe suborder selection enables the Level field. Enter the number of one level down for the printing of suborders. Usually thereis is only one level difference between the suborder and the production order. In a complex manufacturing environment, it ispossible that there will be two or three levels of suborders for the parent production order. The appropriate suborder levels tobe printed should therefore be entered accordingly.

Select the document that contains the instruction by clicking on the folder icon, key in the description, and click on the Save button.

Process Printing Production Order Instructions

After selection of the intended production order, click on the Process button. The system processes the productionorder entry and sends the instructions to the printer for a printout. See the diagram below, which illustrates an example of aprinted production order:


CHAPTER 4


The following buttons contained in the Print Instructions function are described as follows:

Print Preview Production Order Instructions

Clicking on the Preview button does not send the production order instruction to the printer. Instead it displays the Print Previewto show the outcome of the instruction before it is actually printed out. See the example of the Print Preview screen below:

See the following sub-sections for information on the functional buttons shown below



Print LLabels

This button enables the printing of labels for part items, raw materials, and the end item, as an additional optionto the printing of production order instructions. This facilitates the identifying of items, raw materials, and parts tobe picked from the warehouse and facilitates the issuing process to the production floor. For information see subsection 4.4.1 - Printing labels.

Close This button allows the user to exit and to close the function.

CHAPTER 4


4.1 Printing labels

Labels for the Parent Item, Parts Items, Labor hour items and Machine hour items of what is quoted in the Production Order canbe printed using the Print Labels function. This function is available in the Print IInstructions menu path. The printing of labelsfor these items is essential, as it allows identifying the correct item during the execution of a production order, and it also servesas the inventory labels during stock counts.

The Print LLabel button is contained on the Print Instructions screen at the bottom right corner, as highlighted inthe screen shot below:

After appropriate selection and filtering, select the Production Order line you wish to prints labels for, and click on the PrintLabels button. The following Print Labels function is triggered:


CHAPTER 4

In the Print labels screen shown above, there are required selections to be made in order to print labels. The following tabledescribes the details:


Print None Quantity Planned Other Layout

End PProduct

This is selected by default.This selection does not printlabels for the End Product.

This selection Prints Labelsfor the End Product. Thenumber of labels is based onthe Quantity Planned in theProduction Order.

This selection prints Labelsfor the End Product byallowing the user to specifythe number of labels.

Select the Layout for the EndProduct Label.

Items

This is selected by default.This selection does not printlabels for the Part Items.

This selection Prints Labelsfor the Part Items. Thenumber of labels is based onthe Quantity Planned in theProduction Order.

This selection prints Labelsfor the Part Items by allowinguser to specify the number oflabels.

Select the Layout for the PartItems Label.

Labor HHours

This is selected by default.This selection does not printlabels for the Labor HourItems.

This selection Prints Labelsfor the Labor Hour Item. Thenumber of labels is based onthe Quantity Planned in theProduction Order.

This selection prints Labelsfor the Labor Hour Items byallowing user to specify thenumber of labels.

Select the Layout for theLabor Hour Items Label.

Machine HHour

This is selected by default.This selection does not printlabels for the Machine HourItems.

This selection Prints Labels forthe Machine Hour Item. Thenumber of labels is based onthe Quantity Planned in theProduction Order.

This selection prints Labelsfor the Machine Hour Itemsby allowing user to specifythe number of labels.

Select the Layout for theMachine Hour Items Label.


After making the desired selections and input, click on either the Print button to print out a hard copy of the labels or click onthe Print PPreview to obtain a preview of the labels to be printed out. See the screen shot below the example of the Print Previewscreen which shows labels to be printed out:

Click on the Print iicon located at the left corner of the preview screen to send the displayed preview to the printer for a printoutof the labels.

These labels can then be used for labeling the relevant raw materials, part items, and machines and tools that are required forthe production order, which makes identification easy.

CHAPTER 4


5. Issuing production orders

Production Order Issues can be processed from within the opened production order, by means of the Issue process flow button,when the production order is identified and retrieved. Sometimes the intended production orders are not easily identified,however, especially when it is not known whether these orders have gone through the three prior steps, namely Authorization,Release, and Print Instruction. Menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, IIssue] filters only production orders that have gone throughthese steps, prior to issuing materials to the production floor. This makes it easy to accurately identity which production ordershould be issued for its required materials.

The Main Overview of Production Order Issue is displayed as shown in the screen shot example below, when the menu path[Manufacturing, EEntries, IIssue] is triggered:


Details of Search & Filter fields contained in the Production order Issue Main Overview screen are as follows:

Warehouse Select the specific Warehouse from the drop-down list to obtain production orders that have part items belonging to theselected warehouse.

Selection In this step of the process, the Production Order is issued; therefore select the Production OOrder option.

Sales Order Select this option to obtain records of Sales Orders, for purposes of selecting and executing Sales Orders.

Production order Select this option to obtain records of Production Orders, for purposes of selecting and executing Production Order Issues.

Internal Use Select this option to obtain records of Internal Use Requests, for purposes of selecting and executing Internal Requests.

Inter-branch Transfer Select this option to obtain records of Inter-branch Transfers, for purposes of selecting and executing Inter-branch TransferIssues.

RTV order This is the Return-to-Vendor option. Selecting this option displays records of the return-to-vendor orders for selection andexecution of Returns to vendor / supplier. The return-to-vendor order is entered via menu path [Purchase, EEntries, RRTV oorder].

Fulfillment dateSelect the Fulfillment date to obtain records of orders or requests that are due by the selected Fulfillment date. This field isenabled by default when the All checkbox is unchecked. Details of the All checkbox are as follows:

AllChecking the All checkbox allows the user to obtain records of orders or requests that have All Fulfillment dates as per user-defined financial periods. Upon enabling this checkbox, the Fulfillment date field will be automatically disabled.

CHAPTER 4


Advanced button

Simple / Advanced (Toggle button) This is a toggle button which provides the user with a simple screen for simple filter options or an advanced screen for advancedfilter options. Clicking on the Advance button displays the above advanced filter options. Clicking again on the Simple buttondisplays simple filter options as shown in the screen shot example below:

Clicking on the Advanced button shown above displays the filter selections as in the following:


Selection Code Select the specific Selection Code to obtain records of either Sales orders, Production orders, Internal Requests, or Inter-branchTransfers that were entered within the selected Selection Code. The Selection Code is the Database grouping code whereby dataentered in a specific selection code can only be retrieved when the specific selection code is selected. By default, this field isnot selected, so it displays all orders / requests regardless of any selection code.

Customer Select the specific Customer Account Number to obtain records of the selected order / request Type; that belongs to theselected customer. By default, this field is not selected, so it displays orders / requests records regardless of any customeraccount.

Resource Select the specific Resource ID to obtain records of the selected order / request Type that was entered by the selected Resource.By default, this field is not selected, so it displays orders/ requests records regardless of any Resource ID.

Item code Select the specific Item Code to obtain records of the selected order / request Type; that was quoted with the selected Item. Bydefault, this field is not selected, so it displays orders / requests records regardless of any Item Code.

Order If the Order number is known, enter the specific Order number to obtain its record. By default, this field is not selected, so itdisplays orders / requests records regardless of any Order number.

Production Order If the Production Order number is known, then enter the specific Production Order number to obtain its record. By default, thisfield is not selected, so it displays orders / requests records irregardless of any Production order Number.

Parent ProjectIf the Parent Order number is known, enter the specific Parent Order number to obtain its records (Parent and Child orders). Bydefault, this field is not selected, so it displays orders / requests records regardless of any Parent Order.

CHAPTER 4


Show • Parent Project

Select this option to view only Parent Orders.

• AllSelect this option to view all orders, both Parent and Child.

Group by• Order

Select this option to view orders / requests grouped by Order, as shown in the screen shot example above.

• Item Select this option to view orders / requests grouped by Item, as shown in the screen shot example below:


Sort ascending Check this box to obtain records of orders / requests in listing in ascending order. Unchecking this box displays records in listingin descending order.

Transaction date This is the date when the process was committed. In this case, this would be the Fulfillment Date; the date when the selectedtype of order / request was Fulfilled or Issued.

Display PanelDetails displayed in the results obtained after the execution of search & filter, are as follows:

Item Code This displays Item Code of the order / requests.

Item Description This displays the Item Description of the order / requests.

Parent ProjectThis displays the Parent Project Code.

Production order This displays the Production Order Number.

Description This displays the Production Order Description.

Resource This displays the Name of the Resource that entered the Production Order.

CHAPTER 4



Various actions can be performed besides just executing the Fulfillment / Issue step. The respective functions of the followingare explained below:

Note: Function buttons How Function buttons get Enabled

RefreshThis button normally is enabled. Clicking on this refreshes overview results to the latest informationrecords.

Print LLabelsThis button is enabled when the production oorder line is selected for printing labels for materials.See sub Section 4.4.1 for information.

New RReturnsThis button is enabled when either sales oorder, IInternal uuse, IInter-bbranch ttransfer, or RTV oorder lineis selected for entering goods rreturned from customer, resource, or warehouse.

NewThis button is enabled when the production oorder line is selected for entering New PProduction OOrderIssues. See sub Section 4.1 for information.

Complete This button is enabled when the internal uuse rrequest line is selected for completing internal use status.

Process This button is enabled when multiple ssales oorder lines are selected for printing of Delivery NNote.

FulfillmentThis button is enabled when either the sales oorder lline oor the production oorder line is selected forOrder Fulfillment / Delivery. See sub Section 4.2 for information.

OpenThis button is usually enabled. What is Opened depends on the type oof OOrder SSelection. SelectingSales oorder and clicking Open displays the Sales Order entry, and selecting Production oorder

displays the Production Order Entry. See sub Section 4.1.3 for Production order entry details.

Close This button normally is enabled. Clicking on this allows exiting and closing the current functionality.


5.1 Entering new issues of material

The New button is present in the Issue / Fulfillment functionality, as shown in the screen shot example below:

CHAPTER 4


When the New functionl button is clicked, the following Issue Entry screen is displayed:

Details of the Issue screen are as follows:

Entry number This is an auto-generated number for referring to transaction entries.

ProjectSelect the relevant Project being issued.

Resource Select the Resource that entered the Issue of the item.

Description Enter the Description of the Issue being entered.


Issue Entry Details

Item Enter the Item Code or Press PF 5 to list of the items for the selection of a specific Item.

Description This displays the Item Description.

Warehouse The Default Warehouse of the selected Item is automatically pre-filled-in here.

ActualKey-in the Actual Quantity being issued.

UnitThis displays the Unit of Measure used for the Item.

Serial / Batch This box is enabled if the Item is a Serial Item. If the item is Serial Item, then key in the Serial number of the item. Otherwisethis field is not editable.

Resource Key in the ID of the resource that is responsible for issuing the Item. After making the relevant entries and selections, click on the Fulfillment button, which was enabled on the Issue / Fulfillment

CHAPTER 4


Entry screen, as shown in the screens shot example below:

Clicking on the Fulfillment button displays the following Print options for printing the Issue slip:


The Issue / Fulfillment is processed and the Issue slip is displayed, as shown in the screen shot example below:

This can then be printed out into a hardcopy by clicking on the Print icon located at the top left corner of this screen. The printedhardcopy can be sent to the relevant party at the cost center or account, for acknowledging the Item Issue.

CHAPTER 4


5.2 Production order issue, and printing picking list

A Production Order that was already printed with instructions must then be issued for the required raw materials, parts items,assembly items, and other relevant hour items. Otherwise, production cannot run without the issuing of required items, laborand machines. The Production Order must therefore be fulfilled in accordance with the required items, which can be done bytriggering the Production Order Issue function by clicking on the Issued pprocess fflow button, or via menu path [Manufacturing,Entries, IIssue].

The following Fulfillment screen is displayed when either the Issued process flow button or the Fulfillment button is clicked inthe Issue Main Overview screen via the menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, IIssue].

The Issued pprocess fflow button in the Production OOrder eentry is shown below:


The details for the execution of the Issued process flow button are as follows:

The Fulfillment button in the Issue MMain OOverview sscreen is as shown below:

Before an Items Issue, the Issued process flow button is shown with a red ccross, which indicates that theProduction Order has not been issued yet. Clicking on the Issued process flow button displays the Issue(Fulfillment) screen, which is discussed below.

After an Item Issue had been done, the Issued process flow button will be shown with a green ttick and the datewhen it was issued. A green tick is shown when at least one item out of many is realized / fulfilled.

CHAPTER 4


Clicking on either the Issued button at the Production order entry or on the Fulfillment button at the Issue Main Overview screen,triggers the following Production OOrder IIssue / Fulfillment function:

The details on the above fulfillment screen are as follows:

Resource The nameof the Resource that does the fulfillment is displayed here.

Fulfillment date Date of the fulfillment / issue of the production order is displayed here as per the selected Transaction DDate iin tthe MMainOverview: AAdvanced ffilter ooption.


Entry number An auto-generated entry number is displayed here.

Item The Item Code of what is required per production order is automatically displayed here. This field is not editable.

Description The Item Description of the Item per production order is automatically displayed here. This field is not editable.

Warehouse The Warehouse Code of the required items as per production order is pre-filled-in here. This field is not editable.

Location It may be required that the user specify which location in the warehouse the item should be fulfilled to.

Planned This is the Quantity of the item that was planned as per production order, which was pre-filled-in here. This field is not editable.

Realized This is the Quantity of the item that was issued / fulfilled. This field is not editable.

To be realized This is the Quantity of the item to be issued / fulfilled. This is not editable and it is pre-filled-in based on the Quantity Planned.

ActualThis is the Actual Quantity issued. Usually this field is pre-filled-in, based on the planned quantity, but it is required that anentry of the correct actual value is made. When an item is not issued, the user must enter the value zero. Thus, it is only realizedwhen it is actually issued.

UnitThis is the Item's Unit of Measure. This can be piece, hour, minutes, box, etc. This field is not editable, where else it is pre-filledbased on what is defined per Item Maintenance.

CHAPTER 4


Serial / Batch This field is optional, depending on the item, whether the item being issued is of an attributed serial / batch. If the item is ofan attributed serial or batch, then select the serial numbers accordingly by pressing the PF5 key for the serial lookup. Thisbecomes not editable when item is not from a serial / batch.

Lot numberThis field is not editable, as this box is pre-filled-in automatically as when a serial or batch item is selected in the serial / batchbox.. The lot number function is commonly used in the logistics modules. A Lot number is assigned together with the serialnumber when items are received from purchases.

Resource Specify the resource, who is the person responsible for issuing the items for the production order. This is a mandatory field.

After having keyed in the actual items being issued and making entries accordingly, click on the Fulfillment buttoncontained in the Issue function. The progress of the issuing process is displayed as shown in the example below:


After the issuing process has been completed, the Issue Slip is displayed as shown below:

The displayed issue slip can be printed out for a hardcopy by clicking on the Printer icon located at the top left corner ofthis screen.

CHAPTER 4


Print the Picking List before Processing Issue

The Picking List is used as instructions about what items are to be picked, where the items are to be picked (e.g. warehouselocations), how much is to be picked, and who should pick, what items.

The Picking List must be printed out before processing the Issue. Issue cannot be done before the Items had been madeavailable, i.e. picked or collected from the relevant warehouses and locations in the required quantities. Once the picking isdone, then issuing of such picked items can be done on the production floors, in order to start with the production jobs. Theprinting of the picking list is therefore essential before the issuing process can start.

The picking list can be printed before the issuing process by clicking on the Picking LList function button on the Issue function,as shown below:


Clicking on the Picking list button automatically generates the picking list instructions and these are displayed on thescreen as shown below:

For a hardcopy of the generated picking list, click on the printer icon. This then sends the displayed document to thedefault printer.

CHAPTER 4


6. Production order receipts

The Searching and filtering of production orders that are physically completed in the production of the end product/finishedgoods are facilitated with the Main Overview of Production Order Receipts. With this function, physically completed productionorders can be easily identified, and the Receipts process step can be carried out by means of the Receipts functional button.Other relevant actions can also be carried out by means of other implemented functional buttons.

The following screen shot example is the Main Overview of Production Order Receipts screen, triggered via menu path[Manufacturing, EEntries, RReceipts]:


Search & filter details and buttons contained in the Main Overview of Production Order Receipts function are discussed as follows:

Search Clicking on this button performs the search & filter function based on the latest user's selection of search criteria, and displaysresults on the display panel.

Clear Clicking on this button clears all users' selection of the search criteria, and resets the search criteria value to the default value.

Number of rowsThis is the number of production order records to be displayed in the display panel. By default, the value 100 is filled, whichdisplays 100 records of production orders in the display panel.

Filter

Starts with This option filters records based on the initial character that was set by the user at the search criteria.

ContainsThis option filters records based on the exact characters set by the user at the search criteria.

Warehouse Select a specific Warehouse from the drop-down list to obtain production order records that belong to the selected Warehouse.By default, "All" is pre-selected, which displays production orders belonging to all warehouses.

Start date & To Select a range of Production Order Start Dates to obtain records of production orders that fall within the selected range of StartDates. By default, the All checkbox is selected, which displays production orders that cover the whole range of Start Dates asper user-defined Financial Year.

End date & To Select a range of Production Order End Dates to obtain records of production orders that fall within the selected range of EndDates. By default, the All checkbox is selected, which displays production orders that cover the whole range of End Dates as peruser-defined Financial Year.

CHAPTER 4


Production order If the Production order number is known, select the specific Production Order Number to obtain its records. By default, none isselected, which displays all production orders, regardless of production order number.

Parent ProjectIf the Parent Order is known, then select the specific Parent Order Number to obtain its records. By default, none is selected,which displays all production orders, regardless of production order number.

Item Select a specific Item Code to obtain production order records that were quoted with the selected Item Code. By default, noneis selected, which displays all production orders, regardless of Item Code.

Description If the Production Order Description is known, key in the description to obtain records of production orders per entereddescription. By default, the value is nil, which displays all production orders, regardless of Description.

Show

Parent ProjectSelect this option to view only the Parent Orders.

AllSelect this option to view All Orders, Parent Orders as well as Child Orders.

Extra Extra fields are specified to be used in the Receipts function, e.g. when the Receipts button is clicked after having Selected an order.

Transaction Date Select the actual transaction date of the production order receipts. This selected transaction date is to be pre-filled-in on theReceipts function screen.

Sort: ItemsThis applies in the Receipts function.It sorts items in ascending (alphabetical / numerical) order when an order consists of morethan one parent item (end product).


Display Panel

The above Production Order Receipts Main Overview screen is selected to show only Parent Projects which are comparablydifferent to the one shown in the initial screen shot of this document that displays all production orders (both Parent and Child).

Production order This box displays the Production Order Number.

Description This box displays the Production Order Description.

CHAPTER 4


Parent projectThis box displays the Parent Project of the displayed Production Order.

Item Code This box displays the Item Code as quoted in the displayed Production order record.

QuantityThis box displays the Parent Item Quantity as quoted in the displayed Production order.

Start date This box displays the Production Order Start Date.

End date This box displays the Production Order End Date.

Warehouse This box displays the Warehouse Code of the displayed Production Order.


Actions carried out by means of Function buttons

The function buttons at the bottom of the screen allow the user to perform some other actions, beside the Receipts function,within the Main Overview of Production order Receipts. The usage and details of the fields of each function button are discussedin the table below:


Print LLabels This button allows the user to print labels. See sub Section 4.4.1 for relevant information

NoteThis button allows the user to enter notes without retrieving the production order entry. See sub Section 4.8.1 forinformation.

Attachment This button allows the user to attach documents without retrieving the production order entry. See sub Section4.8.2 for information.

MRP This button allows the user to obtain the Material Requirements Planning overview. See Section 5.0 for relevantinformation.

ProjectThis button makes it possible to retrieve the Project Master Card if there is a Production project. For information,obtain the Project Product Manual.

Scrap This button enables the user to scrap part items that have already been issued.

Receipts This button enables the user to execute the Production Receipts. See sub Section 4.6.1 for relevant information.

Open This button makes it possible to retrieve a Production order entry screen. For information on Production OrderEntry, see sub Section 4.1.3.

New This button enables a user to enter New Production Receipts. This function is similar to the Receipts functionbutton. For information on this function, see sub Section 4.6.1

Close This is a common function implemented across Exact Globe 2003. This enables user to close and exit form thecurrent functionality

CHAPTER 4


6.1 Production Receipts

Production Receipts can be done on the Production Order entry screen or via menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, RReceiptsproduction].

The Production Order Receipts function can be triggered on the Production Order Entry screen, by clicking on the Receivedbutton, as shown below:


The Receipts button can be clicked, via menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, RReceipts pproduction], as shown in the screen shot below:

Clicking on the Received button triggers the Production Order Receipts function. Before the Production Receiptshave been made, the Received button will display a the red ccross, which indicates that the Production Receiptshave Not been Done.

When the Production Receipts have been processed, the Received button will display a green ttick together withthe date when the production receipt was made.

CHAPTER 4


By clicking on either the Received button at Production Entry or the Receipts button via menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries,Receipts PProduction], the Production Order Receipts function is triggered as shown below:


There are details that are already pre-filled-in, and there are some details which require the user's input. These details arediscussed as follows:

Production Receipts Header

Resource This displays the name of the resource processing the Production Receipts.

Delivery Date This displays the Date when the Production Receipt is processed.

Entry Number This is an auto-generated number which is unique to each production receipts process.

Production Receipts Details

Item This displays the Item Code of the Finished (Parent) Item.

Item Description This displays the Parent Item's Description.

StatusThis column displays the Parent Item's Status.

Warehouse This column displays the Parent Item's Warehouse Code.

Location Enter the Warehouse Location (where the Finished Items are received) in this column.

Planned This column displays the Planned Quantity of the Parent Item.

CHAPTER 4


Realized This column displays the Realized Quantity of the Parent Item of what was already realized.

To be Realized This column displays the Quantity to be realized, which is the balance of the quantity already realized from what was planned.(Formula: To be Realized = Planned Quantity - Realized Quantity).

ActualEnter into this column the Actual Quantity of Parent Items being received.

Sales UnitThis displays the Parent Item's Unit of Measure.

Serial / Batch This column indicates the Parent Item type, i.e. Serial, Batch, or None.

Serial / Batch NumbersThis column is enabled for input if the Parent Item being received has a Serial or Batch number. Enter the serial number or batchnumber correctly. If the Parent Item does not have a Serial / Batch number, then this field is disabled.

Lot numbersThis column is not editable, but pre-filled-in based on the selected Serial or Batch number discussed above.

Resource This column displays the Name of the resource that is responsible for the Parent Item.

After the details for Production Receipts, have been thoroughly specified, click on the Process button . This processesthe Production receipts and displays the following Print option:


Select a Layout to print the Production Receipt details and click on the Start button. This action generates the ProductionReceipts Slip shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 4


It is possible to obtain a hardcopy of the generated receiving slip by clicking on the Print icon. Closing this screen prompts thefollowing message:

Click on the Yes button to set the Status of the Production Order to Completed. It is important that all relevant processes becorrectly made and data processed in the Production order be correct. After having ensured that the production order has beenlcorrectly processed, it can be set to status Completed. If there are still pending changes or other actions, click on the No button.


7. Engineering Change

Engineering Change is implemented for control and to track the changes made in the Bill of Materials. Prior approval is requiredbefore the newly changed BOM can be implemented. Every change is recorded as a new version of the Bill of Materials..Controlling the implementation of new versions and approving each step provides a means of control and keeping track ofchanges made to the BOM and eliminates unauthorized changes to the Bill of Materials. The use of versions makes it possibleto retain the older versions for reference or for reuse.

Implementing the Engineering Change Function The Engineering Change function can be implemented by configuring the system settings. This is done by enabling the UseEngineering CChange checkbox via menu path [System, GGeneral, SSettings, MManufacturing ssettings], as shown below:

CHAPTER 4


Generate project

This enables the user to generate a project when changes have been done on the Bill of Materials. The project is generated withthe status Active.

The Engineering Change function can be triggered via menu path [Manufacturing, EEntries, EEngineering CChange], which displaysthe following main overview screen:


Details of the above main overview screen are as follows:

SearchClick on this button to execute the search process, based on the last entered user selection.

Filter

Starts withSelect this option to execute a search based on an entry that starts with the character entered in the filter fields.

ContainsSelect this to execute search based on an entry that contains the character entered in the filter fields.

Equal to Select this to execute search based on an entry that equals the characters entered in the filter fields.

Filter Click on this button to show the filter options. The filter options are as follows:

Resource Select the specific Resource to obtain records of engineering change activity entered by the selected resource.

Item Select the specific Item to obtain records of engineering change activity for the selected Item.

CHAPTER 4


Status

AllSelect this to obtain engineering change activity records with All status.

Open Select this to obtain engineering change activity records with Open Status.

Approved Select this to obtain engineering change activity records with Approved Status.

RejectedSelect this to obtain engineering change activity records with Rejected Status.

DescriptionEnter the specific description to obtain engineering change activity records that contain a similar description.

Display detailsBased on the selected search and filter results, records of engineering change activity are displayed: The details shown for eachrecord of engineering change activity are as follows:

IDThis column displays the engineering change activity code.

Recipe versionsThis column displays the New BOM Version Number.

DescriptionThis column displays the Description of the engineering change activity.


Actions with Function button

Prior to using the newly defined or changed BOM, it is required that the relevant person in charge perform the check and eitherapprove or reject the changes made by using the function button. Retrieval of the engineering change activity can also be doneby means of the function button.

StatusThis column displays the Engineering Change Status.

Date changed This column displays the Date of when the BOM was changed.

Item This column displays the Item code of the changed Bill of Materials.

ResourceThis column displays the Name of the Resource that made the changes to the BOM.

RemarksThis displays the Engineering Change Remarks


ApproveThis button enables the user to Approve the changes made to the Bill of Materials. For information, see sub section 4.7.1

RejectThis button allows the user to Reject the changes made to the Bill of Materials. For information, see sub section 4.7.2

Edit This button allows the user to edit the engineering change activity. For information, see sub section 4.7.3

Close This button enables the user to close and exit from the Engineering change function

CHAPTER 4


The selected engineering change activity is then updated with the status Approved as shown below:

7.1 Approving the BOM (bill or material) change

Selecting the record of engineering change activity andclicking on the Approve button displays the followingscreen:

Enter the remarks in the Approve / Reject screen and click onthe Save button. The entered remark is saved and thisscreen is automatically closed.


7.2 Approving the BOM (bill or material) change

Selecting the intended engineering change activity record and clicking on the Reject button displays the following screen:

Enter remarks and click on the Save button. This saves the entered remark.

CHAPTER 4


The contact details such as the Recipient Name and e-Mail address are automatically pre-filled-in.

The subject is also pre-filled-in as shown above. These details can still be edited. Enter the details in the text panel provided. Theentered details are then automatically marked with the timestamp.

Click on the Send button to send the e-mail notification. This sends the email notification to the relevant resource, and theactivity is rejected.

Clicking on the Skip button skips the email notification but still rejects the selected activity.

Clicking on the Cancel button will cancel the jejection.


7.3 Editing engineering change

Selecting the intended engineering change activity and clicking on the Edit button displays the following Engineeringchange activity entry screen:

CHAPTER 4


The details of the above Engineering change activity screen are as follows:

Resource The name of the resource, the person who made the changes to the Bill of Materials, and who also entered the engineeringchange activity, is automatically pre-filled-in here.

Reason for changing The reason for changing the Bill of Material. This must be filled-in.

Date changedThe date at the moment when the changes were made is automatically pre-filled-in here.

Approval dateThe date at the moment when the approval was made is automatically pre-filled-in here.

ProjectThe project code is displayed here. This is automatically generated when engineering change activity is entered as a result ofchange in the BOM.

Make itemThe parent item of the BOM is pre-filled-in here.

Version The Bill of Materials Version is pre-filled here.

Warehouse The warehouse to which the BOM belong is pre-filled-in here.

DocumentA paper clip icon allows retrieval of the attached document. A green tick indicates that the engineering change activity has adocument attached.

ReasonThe resource that made the changes has to enter the reason for, and remarks on, the changes made in the BOM.


Approve / Reject

The person in charge who does the approval or rejection has to enter descriptions of either the approval or rejection.


ApproveThis enables the resource in charge, to verify and to perform the Approval step. For information see sub section 4.7.1

Reject This enables the resource in charge, to verify and to perform the Reject step. For information see sub section 4.7.2

PrintThis enables printing of the engineering change activity. Clicking on this button triggers the Windows Printingfunction.

SaveThis makes it possible for the user to save the entry or changes made to the details of the engineering changeactivity.

Close This allows the user to exit and close the engineering change activity screen.

CHAPTER 4


8. Related Common Functions

8.1 Inserting Notes

Notes can also be entered to existing production orders without even retrieving them, by just selecting the production order lineand clicking on the Notes function button maintained the Main Overview Production Order screen. The Notes function isdescribed as follows:

Click on the Notes button in the Production Order Main Overview screen, after having selected the Production Order line, as


Clicking on the Note button after having selected the desired production order displays the Production Order Notes entry screenshown in the screen shot example below:

The above screen comprises 2 sections. The top section is for the Parent Item of the Production Order (Production OrderHeader). The bottom section is for Part Items of the Production Order (Production Order -Order Lines).

To enter notes to the Production Order Parent Item (Header), click on the Note icon located at the top section left corner of theProduction Order Notes entry screen. This displays the following Notes entry pop-up screen:

Notes Entry Steps1. To make entries in the Notes screen, click on the Timestamp to mark who

entered the note and at what date and time.

2. Now key-in the notesto be added. These may be remarks, descriptions, instructions, or extra information on the parent item of production order.

3. Click on the Save button. The entered note is then saved, and the notes entryscreen is automatically closed.

4. To cancel a notes entry, click on the Close button to close the screen without saving.

CHAPTER 4


To enter notes to the Production Order Parts Items, select the desired order line at the bottom of the Production Order Notesentry screen. Click on the Note icon located at the bottom left corner of the Production Order Notes entry screen, as shown inthe screen shot example below:

Repeat Steps - Notes EEntry SSteps, as described above, which are similar to making notes entries to BOM Part items.


8.2 Attaching documents

Attaching documents such as work instructions, manuals, quotations, invoices, or any other relevant documents, can be donewithout retrieving / opening the production order. Select the correct production order line and use the Attachment functionbutton contained in the Main Overview Production Order screen.

The Attachment function button is on the Main Overview screen as shown in the screen shot example below:

CHAPTER 4


Select the desired production order line and click on the Attachment button to displaythe Production Order Attachment screen,as shown in the screen shot example below:

The above Production Order Attachment screen consists of 2 sections, namely the top section for the Parent Item and thebottomsection comprising BOM Parts Items. This makes it possible to attach documents to the Parent Item and each Parts Item in theselected Production order.


Attachment to Parent Item / Parts Item

1. To make attachments to the Parent Item of the Production order, select the parent item order line displayed at the topsection, and click on the Paper CClip icon located at the left corner top section of the parent item.

OR

2. To make attachments to the Parts Item of the Production order, select the part item order line displayed at the bottomsection, and click on the Paper cclip icon located at the left corner bottom section of the BOM parts items.

3. Clicking on the Paper cclip icon displays the following Document Attachment function, as shown in the screen shotexample below:

CHAPTER 4


4. To attach a document file, locate the document file by clicking on the Folder icon, which displays the Microsoft FFile OOpenfunction, as shown in the screen shot example below:


5. Browse through the folders by selecting the intended folders in the "Look In" field and locate the intended document file.Next, click on the Open button. The located document file is then displayed in the File name field, as shown in the screenshot example below:

File name The address of the located document file is displayed here.

Date Date when the document was created is displayed here.

Size The size of the attached document file is displayed here.

Extra data Enter the Description of the Attachment.

CHAPTER 4


Click on the Save button to complete the attachment. This attaches the allocated document to the Parent item andautomatically closes.the Attachment function.

Click on the Open button to retrieve or view the located document.

Click on the Close button to cancel the.attachment without saving..

Attachment Indication

If the Order line consists of attachments, it will be shown checked with a green ttick in the Attachment column per order line, asshown in the screen shot example below:

Manufacturing Planning

CHAPTER 5

486 CHAPTER 5 | MANUFACTURING PLANNING

CHAPTER 5 | MANUFACTURING PLANNING 487

1. Planning Master Production Schedule (MPS)

[Manufacturing / Planning / Master Production Schedule]

1.1 Prior setting- Creating New & Retrieving Existing Budget Scenario

A Budget Scenario can be created using the New function button and existing records of the budget scenario can be retrievedusing the Open function button. Both functions display the same interface screen with fields that are required either for theuser's input or for updates.

Clicking on the New button displays the New Budget Scenario screen, as shown in the screen shot below:

CHAPTER 5


Retrieving an existing record of Budget Scenario also displays the Budget Scenario Definition screen, as shown in the screenshot below:

Details of this function are as follows:

Budget Scenario Enter the Budget Scenario Code. This may not be editable for an already defined budget scenario.

Description Enter the Budget Scenario Description.

General tab

Financial Year Enter the Starting Financial Year of the Budget Scenario being defined.

Period Enter the Starting Period of the Financial Year entered for the Budget Scenario being defined.


To Financial Year Enter the Ending Financial Year of the Budget Scenario being defined.

Period Enter the Ending Financial Period of the Ending Financial Year entered for the Budget Scenario being defined.

Plan Period Select the Plan Period. Either Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Bi-weekly, 4-weekly or Quarterly, which will determine how the forecastdata will be implemented upon its actual application to the requirements.

Foreign Languages tabThis tab is enabled when the user specifies the use of foreign languages for Descriptions via menu path [System, GGeneral,Settings, GGeneral SSettings] at the Descriptions in the list boxes

CHAPTER 5


DescriptionsEnter the Descriptions in the desired language at the respective Description [foreign-language] field.

After the Budget Scenario has been defined, click on the Save button. To create more Budget Scenarios, click on the New button.To close and exit the Budget Scenario Definition function, click on the Close button.

Clicking on the Save button will prompt the following message to confirm the selected Plan Period, and will inform the user thatthe Plan Period selection cannot be undone once it is saved:

To confirm the Plan Period Selection, click on the Continue button which causes the system to save the newly created Budgetscenario. Click on the Cancel button for the system to return to the Budget Scenario configuration screen for another Plan PeriodSelection, or simply Cancel the new record.

1.2 Planning Master Production Schedule (MPS)

The Master Production Schedule (MPS) function is used by the Production Planning Managers to plan schedules of the ExpectedQuantity of items to be produced. Items tto bbe pproduced means items with the Attribute Make, which are retrieved or by defaultqueried in the Master Production Schedule function. The planning of schedules within this function is registered as a Forecastof the expected quantity within a Budget SScenario. The Budget Scenario is basically a specification of Financial PPeriods andFinancial YYears. Data entered within the range of dates of a defined Budget SScenario, is retrievable when the specific BudgetScenario is activated // sselected. The Budget iis aa FForecast of what to expect within the defined Financial dates. ,The MPStherefore is the Forecast of Production Schedules that are basically planned beforehand to achieve ddemands such as meetingthe customer's ddelivery ddateline with the required quantity and quality.

The Master Production Schedules can be triggered via menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, MMaster PProduction SSchedule],which displays the MPS Search screen with filtering options, as shown in the screen shot examples below:


The filtering options in the MPS search screen are as follows:

LayoutThis determines the Warehouse, Financial Year, and Items to which the MPS shall apply.

Warehouse Select the specific Warehouse to enter the MPS for Make Items belonging to the selected Warehouse.

Budget Scenario Select the specific Budget Scenario to enter the MPS for Make Items within a specific Financial Year and Financial Period.

CHAPTER 5


Plan Period The Plan Period is displayed here based on how the Plan Period is defined in the Budget Scenario. For information on the BudgetScenario, see section 5.1.1

Range This determines what dates should be displayed in the columns of the Planning screen displayed.

Date & To Select the range of dates to enter the MPS for Make Items within the selected date range.

Year & To Select the range of Years to enter the MPS for Make Items within the selected Year range.

Month & To Select the range of Months to enter the MPS for Make Items within the selected Months.

Week & To Select the range of Weeks to enter the MPS for Make Items within the selected Weeks.

Filter This determines what should be retrieved, filtered, and/or displayed in the Planning screen displayed.

Item Group & To Select the Item Group to enter the MPS for Make Items that belong to the selected Item Group/s.

Item & To Select the Item to enter the MPS for the selected Make Items.

Show This determines how the Planning screen shall be displayed.


Column Width

Standard Selecting this option displays the Planning screen with standard column width.

150% Selecting this option displays the Planning screen with 150% larger column width.

After having selected the above options, click on the Start button. The system displays the following MPS Planningentry screen, as shown in the screen shot example below: The details on this planning screen are as follows:

CHAPTER 5


Warehouse The selected Warehouse is displayed here. This field is not editable.

Date The selected range of dates is displayed here. This field is not editable.

Budget Scenario The selected Budget Scenario is displayed here. This field is not editable.

Cost center The default cost center is pre-selected here. The user may change this to the desired cost center in which he/she wishes to enterthe MPS data.

Cost UnitSelect the cost unit in which the MPS data must be entered

Resource Select the ID of the resource who entered the MPS data.

Debtor Select the Debtor Account in which the MPS data must be entered.

Creditor Select the Creditor Account in which the MPS data must be entered.

The Master Production Schedule can now be filled-inEnter the expected (forecast) Quantity of each item on the specific Date. Repeat this step for the required Make Items.

Upon completion, click on the Close button. The planning schedules have now been saved as Forecasts in the specifiedBudget Scenario.


The MPS Planning is reflected in the MRP (Material Requirement Planning)

The entered data is then retrievable in the Material Requirement Planning Overview.

Trigger the MRP function via menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, MMRP], which displays the following Requirement Planningscreen:

To obtain an overview of Forecasts Data, click on the Advanced button shown above. The system displays the Advance Selectionscreen as shown below:

CHAPTER 5


To enable the Forecast field, set the View sstatus to Completed. This enables the Forecast field. Check the Forecast box, whichthen enables the Budget Scenario field. Select the Budget SScenario for which the user intends to obtain records.

Click on the Select button. This makes the selection and returns to the Material Requirement Planning screen. Click on theRefresh button. The system retrieves the Forecast ddata of the selected Budget Scenario and displays the Forecast requirements,as shown in the screen shot example below:


The Forecast value cell can be selected to enable the Produce function button to proceed with the Production Process for theforecast / expected quantity.

1.3 Entering Master Production Schedule in Microsoft Excel

It is possible to enter the planning of Master Production Schedule onto a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. This provides theadvantage that besides data calculation and manipulation, the data charted on a table can be presented in reports of varioustypes. These charts can be used to analyze to the forecast data, as it provides the market demand patterns, statistics,percentages, and value added information that can be used for decision making.

The MPS in Microsoft Excel can be triggered using the Excel button contained in the MPS Search screen via menu path[Manufacturing, PPlanning, MMaster PProduction SSchedule], as shown in the screen shot example below:

CHAPTER 5


When the the Excel button, is clicked, the system displays the Master Production Schedule (MPS) Planning screen onthe Microsoft EExcel spreadsheet, as shown in the screen shot example below:


Enter the Expected (Forecast) Quantity of the Item in each Date column. To update this entry to the Exact Globe system, click onthe Update icon on the Microsoft EExcel TToolbar, as shown in the screen shot example below:

CHAPTER 5


Upon clicking on this button, the following message is prompted:

Click on the Cancel button to discontinue the update. Click on the OK button to save the changes.

Obtaining Other Reports within Microsoft Excel

To obtain reports the spreadsheet must be Unprotected. This can be done by clicking on the Unprotect SSheet option, as shownin the screen shot example below:


After the Sheet has been unprotected, click on the Reports ttool icon on the Toolbar, as shown in the screen shot examplebelow:Clicking on this icon displays the following Report filter screen:

CHAPTER 5


Clicking on this icon displays the following Report filter screen:

Select, from the drop-down list of the Generate field, the Report to be generated, as shown in the screen shot example below:

Make the required selections in the fields which vary in accordance with to the type of report being selected. After selection,click the OK button.

Obtaining Charts from MPS Planning Data

First, it is required that the sheet be unprotected as described above. Next, click on the Chart icon as shown in the screen shotexample below:


CHAPTER 5


The Chart Wizard is displayed as shown in the example below:

Follow the steps trough the Chart wizard. Upon completion of these steps according to the instructions in the wizard, the Chartis displayed. See the screen shot below as an example of the Bar Chart obtained from the MPS Planning Data:


CHAPTER 5

From such an overview, composed from the forecast data only, a specific pattern becomes clearly apparent, which makes it iseasily possible to analyze the demand.


2. Master planning

[Manufacturing / Planning / Master Planning]

IntroductionLarge production orders consisting of child projects imply complex and tedious coordination, planning and realizations. Anoverview of the entire Parent Project with its components of child projects and its detailed elements such as items, tasks, andactivities, can be obtained from the Master Planning function. Master Planning not only provides the user with an overall highlevel overview and detailed components and elements overview, it also enables the user to plan actions by using functionbuttons. Besides enabling the user to plan activities & assign tasks, new projects can also be created within the Master Plan.The Master Planning function is specifically suited for large production projects, provided that these consisting of at least onechild project.

The Master Planning function can be triggered via menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, MMaster PPlanning], which displays listsrecords of Parent Production Project Orders in the Master Planning Main Overview screen, as shown in the screen shot examplebelow:


CHAPTER 5

These displayed records of Production Projects can be filtered by means of the filter options in the header of this screen. Theseoptions are the following:

Filter options

Manager Select the specific Project Manager's Resource ID to obtain production project orders that are managed by the selectedManager.


Cost Center Select the specific Cost Center Code to obtain production project orders that belong to the selected Cost center.

Warehouse Select the specific Warehouse Code to obtain production project orders that belong to the selected Warehouse.

Date Select the specific range of dates to obtain production project orders that were created within the selected date range.

Display Details

Project Code This column displays the Project Code.

Description This column displays the Project Description.

Start date This column displays the Project Start Date.

End date This column displays the Project End Date. Manager This column displays the Project Manager's Name.

Children This column displays the Number of Child Projects / Orders.

Warehouse This column displays the Warehouse Code.

AccountThis column displays the Project's Account Code. This can be the Debtor Account Number or the Creditor Account Number.


Name This column displays the Project's Account Name.

Type This column displays the Project Type.

StatusThis column displays the Project Status.

Actions with Function ButtonsBy meansof function buttons within the Master Plan, actions such as planning & assigning tasks and activities, creating newprojects, linking existing projects, completing a project order, and displaying a detailed overview can be obtained / performed.

CHAPTER 5

Function buttons Descriptions

Refresh This button allows the user to refresh the overview results to the latest records based on thelast entered search & filter values.

Zoom This button provides the main master planning overview of the selected production project. Forinformation see section sub Section 5.2.1.

Complete This button allows the completing the parent project. For information see section sub Section5.2.2.

New This button allows the user to create a new project. For information on creating a project,obtain the Product Manual on the E-Project.

Close This button enables the user to exit from, and close the Master Planning function.


2.1 Zooming-in for a master planning overview of the parent project

By zooming in on the Parent Production order displayed at the Main Overview Master Planning, the user can obtain an overviewof the components of child order For this action, the Zoom function button can be utilized. Zooming into individual ParentProduction orders not only provides the user with a high level overview, but it is also possible for a detailed overview of eachcomponent of the Parent project to be obtained. Moreover, planning of project implementation dates and costs estimation canbe done. Additional child projects and activities can be added to the components and to the parent production order by meansof function buttons. The Zoom-in function button is the most important function of Master Planning, and not only providesaccess to the overall overview of Parent Production Orders containing child orders, but also enables the user to obtain detailedinformation such as each item's planned costs, actual costs, planned revenue, and actual revenue. Besides these, user mayperform the needed functions such as change planning and coordinating, linking existing projects, creating new projects, andcreating activities relevant to the entire Parent Production Order and to the specific child projects.

The Zoom function button is one of the Main Overview Master Planning functions situated at the right bottom corner of thescreen, as shown in the screen shot example below:


Selecting the intended Parent Production Order listed in the display panel, and clicking on the Zoom button, will display thefollowing Master Planning Overview of the selected Parent Production Order, as shown in the screen shot example below:

Filter options for the overview are as follows:

Warehouse Select the specific Warehouse from the drop down list to obtain a planning overview of the Parent Production Order that belongsto the selected Warehouse.

Date (from & to) Select the specific range of dates to from the calendar lookup to obtain a planning overview of the Parent Production order thatfalls within the selected date range.

CHAPTER 5


Show: Costs (Estimates) Check this option to obtain a planning overview of the Parent Production order, including the Costs Estimation Amount.

Scale Click on the Plus or Minus sign to obtain a planning overview of Yearly, MMonthly, WWeekly oor DDaily results. See the screen shotexample below that shows planning overview results based on a Daily Scale:


Planning Overview ResultsJust below the filter options in the screenshot above, is the results panel, which shows planning overview displays masterplanning details of the selected Parent Production order consisting of components such as child production orders, activities,and tasks planning. These displayed components are shown with basic planning details and integration of function, hyperlinks,and icons. The screen contains fields such as:

ProjectThis field displays the Parent Project Code and Project Description, including its component Child Projects. The displayed ParentProject and each child project are hyperlinked to the integration of the respective Project Master Cards.

Paper clip iconA project with a document attached is indicated with a Paper cclip icon in this column

ProductThis field displays the Item CCode, which is the Product Output code when the Project is completed. This is displayed as specifiedin the Project Master Card in the Basics tab at the Output ((Product) field made available for Internal, Production and TrainingProject types. For Project types that are Fixed in Time & Material, the Output ((Product) field is not available, whereas otherwisethe Item Code is shown in the Detailed Master Planning Overview as quoted in the Sales Order.

Range of Dates / Weeks / Months / YearsDepending on the selected Scale, the range of dates, weeks numbers, or months or years is displayed. Each respective cell(dated by project) is shown with its Planning duration bar.

Costs: Estimate This column is shown when the Costs ((Estimate) box is checked. It displays Costs Estimated for the Project, as defined in theProject Master Card in the Basics tab at the Costs ((Estimate) field made available for Training Projects. For Internal andProduction Projects, this field is made available when there is a Parent Project linked to the project. A Costs Estimate can alsobe defined in the Change Planning function.

Planning This column displays "Results" computed from the deduction of Costs from Planned Revenue. The projection of Results can alsobe viewed in the Project Master Card at the Basics tab screen.

CHAPTER 5


Costs: ActualThis column displays the Actual Cost of the Item Realized when a Sales order Fulfillment has been done for the Parent Item. TheCost of a Parent Item is as defined in the Item Master Card in the Basics tab in the "Cost price" field.

Revenue: ActualThis column displays Actual Revenue Realized when the Sales Order is Invoiced.

Hyperlinked Project CodeThe Hyperlinked Project Code is as shown in the screen shot example below:

Placing the active mouse cursor at the displayed Project Code which is hyperlinked then displays the tool tip as shown in theabove screen shot example. The hyperlinked Project code allows retrieval of either the Parent or Child Project Master Card.

See the screen shot example below. The selected Child Project Master Card is retrieved when the hyperlinked Child ProjectCode is clicked:


The "Zoom-In" function icon for Detailed Master Planning Overview

The ZZoom function icon is as shown in the screen shot example below:

CHAPTER 5


Placing the active mouse pointer on the Zoom icon displays the tool tip as show in the screen shot example above, of what theZoom icon is used for. By clicking on the zoom button, the user can obtain either each individual child project or the parentproject's detailed master plan overview.

As can be seen in the screen shot example below, the detailed master planning overview is obtained when the user zooms inon the selected Child Project :

The Detailed Master Planning overview shows the Product (Parent Item) and required hour items for the Child Project order.Each Item listed in the Product column can be expanded for its detailed information by clicking on the plus ssign displayed nextto the Item code.

See the screen shot example below for the expanded Item lists for detailed information on each item quoted in the Child projectorder:


"Back" function buttonTo return to the Overall Master Planning Overview, click on the Back button.

CHAPTER 5


Shown Financial LegendsIn the Detailed Master Planning Overview, each child project is listed with items used as quoted in the order. These items canbe expanded to show financial figures, by means of the fields Planning: CCosts; PPlanning: RRevenue; AActual: CCosts; AActual:Revenue; and Costs: EEstimate. These financial figures are differentiated with a number of color highlights representing eachtype of financial figure, which is can be identified by legends at the bottom of the overview, as shown in the screen shot below:

Obtaining Financial Transactions for Actual TransactionsFinancial transactions can be obtained for Actual transactions such as Actual CCosts and Actual RRevenue. See the screen shotbelow. The actual costs shown are hyperlinked.


CHAPTER 5


The actual financial figure is hyperlinked to the Project FFinancial CCard. Clicking on the hyperlinked financial figure of Actualenables the user to obtain the relevant financial transactions by launching the Project FFinancial CCard, as shown in the screenshot example below:

Obtaining Order / Internal Request Entry of Planned An entry screen of orders or requests for planned costs and planned revenue can be obtained by clicking on the plannedfinancial figure hyperlinked as shown in the screen shot example below:

These planned financial figures are hyperlinked to its respective entry screen. Clicking on the Planned financial figurehyperlinked enables the user to obtain its respective entry function. For example: clicking on the Planned CCosts or PlannedRevenue financial figure of the SO will launch its respective Sales Order Entry.

Similarly, clicking on the Planned Internal Requests financial figure hyperlinked will launch the Internal Requests Entry screenas shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5


Actions with Function buttonsIn addition to obtaining an overview, additional planning can be done using by means of the function buttons. The duration ofthe project can be changed, additional new projects can be created, and existing projects can be linked to obtain relevant coststhat matter, and hourly planning and assigning of labor hours to respective resources can be done.


Refresh This button enables the user to refresh the master planning overview screen for to obtain thelatest information.

Back / Zoom This button enables the user to obtain the Detailed view of the Master plan from a high levelview. This is a toggle button between Back and Zoom. For information, see sub Section 5.2.1.

Activities This button allows the user to enter activities to the project plan as obtained in the masterplan. For information see sub Section 5.2.1.1.

Task This button allows the user to plan the task to the project records obtained in the masterplanning overview. For information see sub Section 5.2.1.2.

New This botton makes it possible to create a new child project. For information on Creating a ChildProject in the Master Plan, see sub Section 5.2.1.3

Change: Planning This button enables the user to make changes to the project plan. For information, see subSection 5.2.1.4

Link This button allows the user to link relevant projects to the master project. For information seesub Section 5.2.1.5

Close This button allows the user to exit and close the Zoom-in Master Planning overview function.


CHAPTER 5

2.1.1 Creation / Entering Activities

IntroductionExcept for being the the initial stage of prospecting potential customers, creation activities also record additional activities/actions in a project. Activities add value to a business process which of course brings about extra results. These activities mustbe recorded not only for accounting costs, but also to record workflow linking relevant resources, products, customer accounts,sales orders, production orders, and projects. This document explains the creation/ entry of an activity using the New functionbutton at menu path [CRM, EEntries, AActivities], or the Activities button in other application modules in an integratedenvironment, such as in the module of Master PPlanning oof MManufacturing via menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, MMasterPlanning].

The New function button in menu path [CRM, EEntries, AActivities] also enables the creation of activities. In an integratedenvironment, the Activities creation function is maintained in, for example, the Master Planning Overview,as shown in thescreen shot example below:


Clicking on the New button at the CRM module or the Activities button as shown above, will display a pop-up screen forselection of a specific Activity Type, as shown in the screen shot example below:

Filter details on this screen are as follows:

Search Clicking on this button will cause the system to search and filter for activity type records based on the last user-selected searchcriteria.

Clear Clicking on this button will cause the system to clear all users' selection and to reset search criteria values to default values.

RowsBy default, the value of '50' rows is pre-filled-in, which displays 50 rows of records of existing activity types. The user maychange this to the desired number of rows.

Filer

Starts with Selecting this option will cause the system to execute a search based on the initial characters entered in the search criteria.


CHAPTER 5

ContainsSelecting this option will cause the system to execute a search based on the exact characters contained in the search criteria.

ID Enter specific Activity Type ID to obtain its record which then can be selected for creation / entry of such activity type.

Type Enter specific Activity Type Name to obtain its records which then can be selected for creation / entry of such activity type. Afterobtaining the intended activity type record, select a specific Activity Type that you intend to create. After having selected thespecific Activity Type, click on the Select button. The Activity Entry / Creation screen will be launched.

In this example, Activity Type: Support Question is selected, and therefore, the activity type entry screen is launched as shownin the screen shot example:


The details displayed in the header, and those required for the user's input and specification in the Activity Entry / Creationscreen are discussed in the following:

Activity Entry Header

Activity Type ID & Name The Activity Type ID and the Activity Type Name are displayed at the header section of the Activity Entry screen.

StatusThe Status of the Activity being created is shown in the header.

Created and ByThe date is shown when the Activity was created. The resource who created the activity is also shown in the header.

Modified and ByThe date is shown when the Activity was modified. The resource who modified the activity is also shown in the header.

Entry Fields

Resource Select the ID of the Resource who enters the Activity.

Description Enter the Activity Description.

PrioritySelect the Priority Level of the activity being created, from the drop-down list.

Start date Select the Activity Start date from the calendar lookup button.


CHAPTER 5

End date Select the Activity End date from the calendar lookup button.

ProjectIf the Activity involved is used in a project, select the relevant Project code for the Activity being created. In an integratedenvironment, when activity is created from an order or project, the Project Code is automatically pre-filled-in, and this field isnot editable.

Item 1 Select the relevant Item being used in the Activity, for example the Item being serviced.

Account Entry Fields

AccountSelect the Account for which the activity is being created.

Classification Select the Classification of the Account being linked to the activity entered.

Type This field is not editable. The Account Type is pre-filled-in automatically, based on the selected Account as specified in theAccount Master Maintenance Card.

StatusThis field is not editable. The Account Status is pre-filled-in automatically, based on the selected Account as specified in theAccount Master Maintenance Card.

Reseller If there is a Reseller Account, select the relevant Reseller Account by clicking on the lookup button.

Postal code visitKey in the Postal code for the Account Visiting Address.


City visitEnter the Visiting Address City of the Account being selected.

Country visitThis field is pre-filled-in automatically to the Account's Country code. The user may change this to the relevant Country code.

Contact Entry Fields

ContactEnter the Contact Person's Name. Entering a Name will prompt the Contact definition screen. The user may also define the

Contact person by clicking on the Contact icon - made available next to the Contact field. This displays the Contactdefinition screen as shown in the screen shot example below:

Fields in the Contact definition screen are discussed as follows:

Title Select the Title of the Contact. For example, Mr. Mrs., etc.

InitialsEnter the Contact's Initials.


CHAPTER 5

First name Enter the Contact's First Name.

Middle name Enter the Contact's Middle Name.

Last name Enter the Contact's Last Name. Remember that in some cultures, the surname (family name or last name) is mentioned first. Do not take for granted that thesurname is the last-mentioned name of the person.

After defining the Contact Person's Name, click on the OK button. To cancel the entry, click on the Cancel button.

Contacts can also be selected and further defined in the Contact Selection screen by means of the contact lookup

icon - available next to the Contact field.

Job description Enter the Job Description of the Contact person that was entered.

Job title This is pre-filled-in, based on the Account's Contact's Job Title, as defined in the Account Master Maintenance Card. The usermay change this to the relevant Job Title of the Contact that was just defined.

E-mailEnter the Contact's Email Address. Next to this field, the Email icon - is available. Clicking on the Email icon, will launchthe Outlook email application with the entered email address pre-filled-in. The resource who enters the activity is thereforeallowed to correspond with the contact for the relevant account.


Phone Enter the Contact's Phone Number. Next to this field, the Phone icon - is made available. The entered phone number can bedialed by clicking on the Phone icon, provided that the modem is connected to the user's workstation and relevant settings arealready configured.

FaxEnter the Contact's Fax Number.

Document (Paper clip) The user may attach a document to the Activity being created, by clicking on the "Paper clip" icon. This launches the DocumentCreation screen.

Question Enter the customer's Questions that were communicated to the user. Entering question details automatically pre-fills-in theTimestamp details.

Answer Key in the resource's Answer that was communicated to the contact. Entering Answer Details automatically pre-fills-in theTimestamp details.


CHAPTER 5

Service External Type ActivitySee screen shot below for an example of Activity of the type Service External:

NOTE: Fields displayed are based on the definition of an Activity Type that determines the kind of details that the user is required to

input in the Activity entry screen. The Type of Activity also determines the details shown in the Entry screen.


The screen shot above shows an example of a Service External type of Activity. This differs from the Support Question type ofactivity that we discussed earlier. The Service External type of Activity has different components:

Action Select the Action Item to be used in the Activity. This is usually the Labor Hour Item that will be used to provide actions to solvethe requests.

Serial Number If the request is for a Serial Item used by the Customer account, select the specific Serial Number.

ContractWhen there is a Service Contract for the customer account, select the relevant service contract or contract order for the activitybeing entered.

Your Ref, (Your Reference) Enter the Customer's Reference Number.

Other Entry Fields

Item 2 Select the 2nd Item Code, which may be required when an additional Item is used in the Activity being created.

Serial number 2 Select the 2nd Serial Number, in case an additional serial item is used in the Activity.

Our Ref. (Our Reference) This field is not editable. This is pre-filled-in automatically when the transaction has been done. This is an internally auto-generated number.

AmountEnter the Amount, which is a financial requirement to execute the Activity being entered.

Currency Code Select the correct currency code used in the Activity.


CHAPTER 5

AssetIf the Item used in the Activity is an Asset, select the relevant Asset Item.

Remarks: RequestEnter the Request remarks. Timestamp details are automatically pre-filled-in when remarks are entered.

Remarks: Workflow Enter the Workflow remarks. Timestamp details are automatically pre-filled-in when workflow remarks are entered.

Actions with Function ButtonsUpon entering an activity, relevant actions can be carried out using the function buttons. For example, the resource, i.e. theperson who receives the workflow, can Realize or Reject the activity. The resource may also enter more details, Save entries,Print out Activity details, Obtain Debtor's Information, Obtain Items / Serials / Contract Information, or even generatequotations or orders, etc. It is even possible that the rejected or realized activity is then Reopened by the resource-in-charge. Note that the availability of these functions is determined by the Activity Type being entered or received in the user's workflow.The type of value filled-in in the Fields also determines the availability of function button, for instance, the type of item filled-in in the Item field determines whether to make available the Task function button or the Internal Use button. The Activity Entryscreen with its function buttons are used across the Exact Globe 2003 but are mainly used in the two modules, i.e. the CRMModule and the Service Management Module. For better comprehensive information on these two modules, please obtain theProduct Manual for E-CRM and E-Service Management. The following table of function buttons is shown for both the CRM andService Management modules.

CRM - Function buttons


Service Management - Extra Function buttons

2.1.2 Entering Task-planning for projects

Creating tasks for hour planning to resources is essentially important when resource hours are required to perform certainactivities to complete jobs. Task planning is most likely to be used in Projects of various types, such as Fixed type, Time &&Material, TTraining pprojects, IInternal projects, and Production projects. Despite accounting for these various types of projectswith basic information derived from entries and processes, labor hours are also used in handling these jobs, and this must beaccounted too. It is important, therefore, that prior planning of hours be done. Hour planning can be done by means of the TasksPlanning function, by assigning hours to resources within the required duration.

Tasks can be created using the New function button via menu path [Projects, PPlanning, TTasks]. In an integrated environment,the entering of task planning is also made available in the Master Planning function, as shown below:


CHAPTER 5

Clicking on either the Tasks function button in the Detailed MMaster PPlanning vview or the New function button in the Projectmodule, will cause the system to launch the New TTasks PPlanning Entry screen as shown in the screen shot example below:

Details required for input and specification in the above Task Planning entry screen are as follows:

ProjectSelect the Project Code for which the task planning is being entered.

Date and To Select the Start date and the End date of the Task being planned. This is the time span inside which the planned task must berealized.

Description Enter the Task Planning Description.


Qty. (Quantity)Enter the required quantity of hour items.

UnitThis is not editable. The unit of measure of the selected hour item is displayed here.

Item This is the Hour Item which is used to execute the task entered.

Resource Select the Resource, i.e. the person who will execute or realize the planning of the task entered.

Cost CenterThe Cost Center is automatically pre-filled-in, based on the cost center of the selected resource above.

RequestIf there is relevant activity in the project, select the activity request to link it to the task planning being entered.

Attachment (paper clip icon) To attach a document to the task plan, click on the 'paper clip' icon, which will launch the Document Creation function.

Note Enter notes to the task plan being created.

Price This field is not editable. It is automatically displayed, based on the pricing definition in the selected Hour Item.

AmountThis field is not editable. It is automatically computed, based on the price per item and entered quantity of hour item.


CHAPTER 5

G/LThis field is not editable. It is automatically pre-filled-in, based on the specification in the selected Hour Item's Master Card.

After that the task planning has been entered, click on the Save button. Click on the Close button to exit.

2.1.3 Inserting a new child project in the Master Planning Overview

New Projects can be inserted to the Parent Project shown in the Master Planning Overview, by means of the New functionbutton. The New Insert: Project function is described as follows with descriptions to fields and screen shot examples.

The New function button is maintained in the Master Planning Overview function as shown in the screen shot example below:


Clicking on the New function button causes the following Insert: Project screen to be displayed:

Details in the Insert: PProject screen are as follows:

Start date Select the Project Start Date for the project which is being created.

End date Select the Project End Date.

ProductSelect the Product of the Project being created, which is the End Product Item code of the Child Project.

Location Select the Warehouse to which the End Product of the Child Project should be delivered.


CHAPTER 5

Manager Select the Resource who will be the Manager of the Child Project being created.

ParentSelect the Parent Project. This is usually pre-filled-in based on the retrieved overview of the Parent Project.

ProjectEnter the Child Project Code. This is usually pre-filled-in automatically with an auto-generated number preceding the ParentProject code.

Description Enter the Child Project Description.

NotesEnter the Notes to the Child Project.

Timestamp When notes are entered, it is important that the Timestamp button be clicked to mark when and who entered the notes.

Costs (Estimate) Enter the estimated Costs of the Child Project.

Attachment (Paper clip icon) Documents can be attached to the child project being created, by clicking on the Paper clip icon. This launches the DocumentCreation screen.

Plan

Resource Select the Resource who entered / created the Child Project.

After keying all the important details for the Child Project being created, click on the Save button to save the entry. After havingsaved, click on the Close button. The newly inserted child project is then displayed in the Master Planning Overview.

To cancel the insertion of the new child project, click on the Close button without saving.


2.1.4 Changing planning details

Planning details of child projects can be done from within the obtained Master Planning Overview using the Change: PPlanningfunction button. The Change Planning function not only allows rescheduling of project duration, it also makes it possible tospecify progress completion of the relevant child projects.

The Change: PPlanning function is maintained in the Master Planning Overview as shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5

Clicking on the Change: PPlanning button, the following function is triggered for selection of a specific Child Project:

All child projects of the obtained Parent Project's master planning overview are shown on this screen. Select the specific childproject, and click on the Select button.


Select a specific Child project. The system displays the Change: PPlanning function as shown in the screen shot example below:

The details of the change planning editing screen are as follows:

Start date Change the start date of the project if required.

End date Change the end date of the project if required.

ProductChange the product as when required, to the new product code.


CHAPTER 5

Location Change the location as per requirement to the new delivery location, which is the warehouse.

Manager When there is change in the Project Manager, then the new Project Manager's Resource can be selected.

ParentIf there is a change in the Parent Project, select the new Parent Project accordingly.

NotesEnter the Notes to the Child Project.

Timestamp Click on the Timestamp button every time when notes are entered.

Percentage complete Key-in the percentage completed on the child project.

CostsThis is the estimated costs that can be changed accordingly, as and when there are changes.

After making the necessary changes, click on the OK button. The changes will then be saved. To cancel the changes, click on theCancel button.


2.1.5 Linking child projects to parents

Except for inserting new child projects, existing projects can be linked as child projects to the parent project within the masterplanning overview, by means of the Link function button. The Link function allows linking existing projects, that make up acomplete grouping of relevant projects, to the Master Parent Project. Linking projects in this way provides the combination ofall relevant projects into a Master Planning overview.

The Link function button is maintained in the Master Planning Overview as shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5

Clicking on the Link button will cause the following Project linking screen to be displayed, for users' selection of a child project:

Lists of all existing projects are displayed in this screen. Filters can be applied to obtain the intended record of the project.

Warehouse Select a specific Warehouse to obtain records of projects that belong to the selected warehouse.

Parent: EmptyCheck this to obtain records of projects that do not have Parent Project.


After selecting the intended Project, click on the Select button. A pop up Link: PProject screen is displayed as shown in the screenshot example below:

ParentThe Parent Project as in the Master Planning Overview is automatically pre-filled-in. To continue linking the selected project tothe pre-filled-in Parent, click on the Continue button. This will automatically insert the child project into the parent project.

The selected project can also be made a child of the child project. To do this, click on the lookup button in the Parent field. Thefollowing lookup screen will be displayed, showing existing child projects of the Parent Project:


CHAPTER 5

Select the child project to which you wish to link the selected project. After having selected, click the Select button. The selectedchild project is pre-filled-in in the Parent field.

Click on the Continue button. A message will be prompted to confirm whether to continue or not, as shown in the examplebelow:

To confirm, click on the Continue button. Otherwise click on the Cancel button.

Clicking on the Continue button will cause the system to link the selected project to the Child Project. To view whether theselected Project has already been linked, click on the Zoom-in icon for tthe iindividual CChild PProject's DDetailed MMaster PPlanningOverview.

2.2 Completing projects

Completing Projects is facilitated by the Complete function button. The Complete function is contained in the Master PlanningMain Overview function, and also in the Project Master Maintenance Card. Unlike completing production orders, completing aParent Project would require completing the child projects, child orders, and relevant activities first. In the Project MasterMaintenance Card, it is even possible that the Project can be completed by selecting the Project Status from the drop down listas Completed. Completed Projects then become history. It is important, therefore, that all relevant planned activities, hours,orders and child projects be totally fulfilled / realized / physically completed , , before the Parent Project and its relevant ChildProjects are set to Status CCompleted. If, for example the sales invoice of a parent project has not been processed, the parentproject cannot be considered completed.

The Complete function button is contained in the Master Plan as shown in the screen shot example below:


The Complete function button is contained in the Master Plan as shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5

The Complete function is also present on the Project Master Card, as shown in the screen shot example below:

NOTE: The Complete function on the Project Master Card is used for Fixed, Time & Material, Internal and Training projects. For

Production TType PProjects, it is required that the Production Order be completed via menu path [Manufacturing, TTo bbe PProcessed,

Complete] or when the End Product is Received, which then automatically triggers the Production Project Completion function.


Child projects can also be completed by selecting the Completed status from a drop down list on the Project Master Card,provided that the project is a Fixed, TTime && MMaterial, IInternal or Training pproject. This is done at the Status drop-down list boxin the Project Master Card.

Completing a Parent Project Order

A Parent Project is usually completed by means of the Master Planning function in menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, MMasterPlanning] or in [Project, PPlanning, MMaster PPlanning].

Selecting a parent project record and clicking on the Complete function button, will prompt the following message:

Click on the NO button to discontinue. To continue with the completion, click on the Yes button.

If the Child Orders such as sales invoices and child projects have not been completed clicking on the Yes button will prompt thefollowing message:


CHAPTER 5

This indicates that the child orders / invoices and child projects must be fulfilled, iissued, rreceived, and completed first. If it isa Sales order, perform the sales process flow to complete the order. If it is Sales invoice, perform the sales invoice process flowto complete the invoice. If it is Production order, perform the production order process flow and complete the production order.If there are child projects without orders, the status can be set to Completed, by means of the Project Master Card, by using theStatus drop-down list or the Complete ffunction button. Completing a child project is a similar to completing a parent project.

If all child projects and orders have been completed, clicking on the Yes button will prompt the following pop-up screen:

Date Select the date of when the Parent Project will be Completed. Click on the OK button. To discontinue, click the Cancel button. Clicking on the OK button, will display the progression of the completion and checking process:


When the project is completed, the following message is prompted:

Completing Production Project

The process steps described above are similar to completing the Production Project, except that the child production order mustbe completed accordingly. For information on how to complete the Production order, See SSection 66.5 [[Manufacturing, TTo bbeprocessed, CComplete]


CHAPTER 5

3. Resource planning

Resource planning is an important tool to ensure that labor hour requirements derived from various types of requests andprojects are executed by the correct resources. Planning functionality allows users to identify unplanned labor requirementsand match them with available resource capacity.

Resource planning can be triggered via menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, RResource PPlanning], which displays the followingscreen:


Features of the above shown functionality are described as follows:

Resource planning

The resource planning section displays available capacity per resource to be viewed according to some criteria and filteroptions.

Advanced - displays the following advanced filter option screen:


CHAPTER 5

FilterBy default none of these options are checked. When the selection is used in the filter option, the select button is shown with agreen checkmark:

Project - to select specific project (range). Job GGroups - to obtain resource planning capacity for a specific job group.Resource - to obtain resource planning capacity for a specific (range of) resource(s). Assortment - to obtain resource planning capacity for a specific assortment.Activity - To obtain resource planning capacity for a specific activity.

Show: AActivity - shows the activity code for each displayed record of resource capacity. Show: TTime - shows the time for each displayed record of resource capacity.


Format: RReport - shows overview results in the report format as shown below:

Group bby 11 - Select specific criteria for primary grouping of resource capacity. Grouping is possible by Resource, CCost ccenter,Project oor AActivity.

Group bby 22 - Select specific criteria for secondary grouping of resource capacity. The criteria values are similar to Group by 1.

Manager - Select a specific manager's resource ID to obtain an overview of capacity for all resources reporting to the selectedmanager.

Level - Determines the level of manager's subordinates, displayed in the overview. It is possible to view the resources based onhierarchy for four levels; from direct reporting to 4th level.

Cost ccenter - Select a specific cost center code to view all resource capacity that belongs to the selected cost center.

Date // TTo - Select a date range to obtain resource capacity within the selected period.

ShowWeekend - displays resource capacity also for weekend dates.

Actual - displays the actual planning that has been realized already.

Scale - Navigate on the plus and minus sign to obtain the overview Daily, WWeekly, MMonthly or Yearly.


CHAPTER 5

Expand AAll icon and Expand icon - expand the displayed lists that are grouped to show the detailed breakdown of hour items.Expand AAll expands all records. Expand individually expands each record.

Group bby [[selected ggroup bby ccriteria] - This column displays lists of resources planning capacity records leaded by the selectedgroup by criteria. For example, lists of project numbers when grouped by Project, which then can be individually expanded forbreakdown of hour items by clicking on the expand icon.

See screen shot below, the overview of resources planning capacity grouped bby 11 - Project and grouped bby 22 - RResources:

Notice the highlighted Expand All icon and Expand icon for Group by 1 and Group by 2 columns.

The fields of resource planning capacity are followed by date columns, each representing planned quantity and capacityquantity of hours per date. The Actual column, representing the actual realized hours, is shown when Show: AActual is checked.


Tasks / Requirements

The bottom section of the Resource Planning functionality displays tasks and requirements which can be filtered according tothe intended results using the filter options. These filter options are described as follows:

Advanced - displays the following advanced filter option screen:

Filter By default none of these options are checked. When the selection is used in the filter option, the select button is shown with a

green checkmark:


CHAPTER 5

Warehouse - To obtain tasks/requirements deriving from a specific warehouseJob GGroups - to obtain resource planning capacity for a specific job group.Resource - to obtain resource planning capacity for a specific (range of) resource(s). Assortment - to obtain resource planning capacity for a specific assortment.Activity - To obtain resource planning capacity for a specific activity.Project - to select specific project (range).

Show: PPlanned - shows tasks/requirements that were planned using task planning.

Sales oorders - takes tasks/requirements from sales orders in to account in the planning. Check the relevant box to include non-authorized and/or authorized sales orders. Use the Select button to select the orders to be included.

Internal uuse - takes tasks/requirements from internal use orders in to account in the planning. Check the relevant box to includenon-authorized and/or authorized internal use orders. Use the Select button to select the orders to be included.

Production oorders - takes tasks/requirements from production orders in to account in the planning. Check the relevant box toinclude non-authorized and/or authorized production orders. Use the Select button to select the orders to be included

Cost ccenter - Select a specific cost center code to view all resource capacity that belongs to the selected cost center.

Date // TTo - Select a date range to obtain resource capacity within the selected period.

Expand AAll icon and Expand icon - expand the displayed lists that are grouped to show the detailed breakdown of hour items.Expand AAll expands all records. Expand individually expands each record.

View bby - allows user to select to view the tasks/requirements by item, project or request, as shown in the screen below:


Project - displays the project code for the specific task/requirement.

Cost ccenter - displays the cost center for the specific task/requirement.

Each cell in the overview is indicated by a color. It shows whether the quantity of hours is Not pplanned, IIncomplete PPlanned,Planned, OOver pplanned oor not available because of AAbsence/Public HHolidays.

3.1 Planning resource labor hours

To allocate available resource capacity to tasks/requirements use the Plan button. The plan functionality also enables users tospecify the duration of labor hours during planning. It is possible to plan part of a requirement to resource A and part to resourceB. Based on what is planned the planning overview indicates whether the available capacity of a resource is fully planned,incomplete (partly) planned, overworked or not planned at all.


CHAPTER 5

The Plan button is only enabled when both the available capacity of a resource and a requirement are selected, as shown in thescreen above. Both lines need to be expanded to select the correct cell in the planning.

Clicking on the Plan button pops up the Plan screen:

Start ddate - Enter the start date of the task. Start ttime - Enter the start time of the task. Number oof hhours - Enter the number of hours to plan for the resource.

The resource field is pre-filled and can not be changed. The value is retrieved from the selected cell in resource planning.

After keying the details for the required fields, click OK to perform the planning. The results are automatically refreshed andshown in the resource planning overview. The allocated capacity is shown with the Planned color scheme.


3.2 Entering tasks

Tasks can be created using the Task button via menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, RResource pplanning]. This button triggersthe same functionality as the menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, TTasks].


CHAPTER 5

The following planning screen is opened:

Project - Select the project code for which the task is created.Date/To - Enter start and end date for the task.Description - Enter a description for the task.Qty. ((Quantity) - Enter the required quantity of hours.Item - Enter the correct hour item, the type of labor that needs to be done.Unit - Is pre-filled based on the selected hour item.Request - A relevant request can be linked.Attachment ((paper cclip iicon) - To attach document, click on the paper clip icon. Note - Enter a note to the task.Price, Amount and G/L are not editable since they are pre-filled based on the selected hour item.

Click the Save button to save the planning and exit the screen. Clicking Close does not save the planning.


3.3 Generating sales orders from resource planning

Generating sales orders based on the available capacity is also a form of planning hour items to the intended project anddebtor. The Order provides the possibility to create a sales order directly from resource planning.

The Order button is only enabled when the available capacity of a resource is selected. Clicking the Order button triggers thefollowing screen to create a sales order for the selected resource:


CHAPTER 5

Item - Enter the labor hour or select one using the browser. Ordered bby - Enter the relevant debtor account or select one using the browser. Parent - Select the Parent order/project to link the order to. Warehouse - Select a warehouse. Selection ccode - Enter a selection code for the order if appropriate.Resource - Select the resource for this sales order.

Click OK to automatically generate the sales order. The following message will pop up:

To open the generated sales order click Yes button. Click No to continue planning and possibly review the sales order later. Thegenerated sales order is also shown in the Tasks/Requirements section in resource planning:


3.4 Exporting resource planning data to MS Excel

The overview of resource planning can be exported to Microsoft Excel for further data manipulation and reporting using theExport button.


Click on the Export button to automatically export the results to Microsoft Excel. Two documents will be created: one for resourceplanning and one for tasks/requirements.

CHAPTER 5

3.5 Deleting resource planning

Deleting a resource planning is basically setting the planned resource hours to unplanned status; the capacity is released fromthe requirements. Deleting a resource planning can have various reasons: a planning is not needed anymore, the planning wasentered incorrectly, the capacity is needed more on a different date/project, etc.

The Delete button is only enabled when already planned Resource Planning is selected. Upon clicking it the planning is deletedand the resource planning overview is refreshed. The deleted hours are shown as Not PPlanned and are available to plan again.


CHAPTER 5


3.6 Entering realization of hours for resource planning

Resource hours which were initially planned for requirements, must be realized accordingly when the requirement jobs havealready been completed. Resource planned hours that can be realized by the Manager via the Resource Planning function whenit is known that the jobs have been completed. Hours can also be realized daily by the staff themselves, via the Realizationmenu path at [Project, EEntries, RRealization]. Realization of planned labor hours is important and costs incurred can be registeredaccordingly. Realization of Resources hours is associated with accounting for costs and resources salary payment.

Realization can be done via menu path [Project, EEntries, RRealization], which triggers the Realization entry function with pre-filled-in details for the current date, which is usually done by the individual resource themselves.

Realization can also be done selectively by the Manager in charge via theResource Planning function in menu path [Project,Planning, RResource PPlanning] OR in menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, RResource PPlanning] using the Open function button.The manager can select any intended date, resource, or hour item of resource planning for realization.

The Open function button is contained in the Resource Planning function, as shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5

The Realization entry function is triggered either via the Project RRealization or when the Open button is clicked via the ResourcePlanning, as shown in the screen shot example below:

Details of the Realization entry function are as follows:

Resource The resource, i.e.the person who must realize the hours, is pre-filled-in here when triggered via [Project, EEntries, RRealization].The person who is selected via the resource planning for realization is pre-filled-in here when triggered via Resource Planning,after selection of a specific Resource's planned hour cell. Despite these, the resource can also be changed to the intendedresource, the person who is intended to realize the labor hours.

Cost center This field is not editable. This is pre--in based on the Resource's Cost center.


Realization date This is pre-filled-in with the current date of realization when triggered via [Project, EEntries, RRealization]. When triggeredselectively via Resource PPlanning, the Realization date is pre-filled-in as per selected date cell.

ProjectThis is not editable. This is pre-filled-in, based on the selected Project code.

BudgetThis is not editable. This is pre-filled-in, based on the Budget Scenario on which the Planning was made.

Item description This is not editable. This is pre-filled-in, based on the Hour Item selected to be realized.

Realization Details

ProjectThe Project code of the selected resource planning is pre-filled-in here when triggered from Resource Planning. When triggeredfrom Project Realization, the Planned Project for the current date is pre-filled-in here. This can also be changed to realize theIntended Project.

Description This field is not editable. The Project description is pre-filled-in, based on the selected Project as defined in the selected ProjectMaster Card.

Hour / Item Code The Hour Item to be realized is displayed here. When triggered via Resource Planning, the selected hour item cell is displayedhere. When triggered via Project Realization, the planned hour item for the current date is pre-filled-in here. This can be changedto realize the Intended Item or Hour Item.

Sls. (Sales) UnitThis field is not editable. The Unit of Measure of the selected Item / Hour Item is displayed as per specification in the Item /Hour Item Master Card.


CHAPTER 5

Item description This field is not editable. The selected Item's / Hour Item's description is pre-filled-in here as per definition in the Item / HourItem Master Card.

Start time This is the Planned Start Time of the selected Hour Item which is pre-filled-in automatically, based on the current date planningor based on the selected planning.

End time This is the Planned End Time of the selected Hour Item which is pre-filled-in automatically, based on the current date planning,or based on the selected planning.

Planning This is the Planned Number of Hours of the selected Hour Item which is pre-filled-in automatically, based on the current dateplanning or based on the selected planning.

ActualKey-in the Actual Number of Hours Realized.

ActivityThis is pre-filled-in with the Item / Hour Item Description. This can be changed to the short descriptions of the activity /jobsdone during the number of hours.

Price This field is not editable. The Price per Unit of the Item / Hour Item is pre-filled-in here as per definition in the Item/ Hour ItemMaster Card.

AmountThis field is not editable. The Amount is automatically calculated and displayed, based on the Number of Hours and the Priceper Hour.

Notes Icon This field enables the user to enter notes to the realization which is being registered. Mouse-clicking once at this field pops upthe Notes entry screen as shown in the screen shot example below:


Enter the notes and click on the Timestamp to mark by whom and when the notes were entered. Click on the Save button. Toexit click the Close button.

Paper clip icon This field enables the user to attach documents to the realization which is being registered. Mouse-clicking once on this fieldlaunches the Document-Creation application.

After having entered the required fields, click on the Save button. The system now automatically registers the hour realizationand executes the relevant transactions.


CHAPTER 5

4. Machine planning

[Manufacturing / Planning / Machine Planning]Machine Planning must be done to ensure the smooth, effective production of end products. Planning is done by allocatingrequirements or tasks in line with the available machine capacity. Usually machine capacity is the predefined machine hours,i.e. the number of hours for which the machine can function / perform in production jobs. For instance, a cutting machine ispredefined to cut wood for a maximum of 10 hours. Therefore, for every machine on the production floor, machine hours arepredefined, which allows one to allocate machine hours to tasks / requirements. Requirements are production orders or salesorders. When production orders are coordinated with machine hours, these will be the requirements for the specific machinehours item that belongs (links) to the specific machine.

The Machine Planning function is triggered via menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, MMachine PPlanning],which displays thefollowing screen:


The details of the above Machine Planning Overview screen are discussed in the following Machine Capacity section and Tasks/ Requirements section:

Machine Capacity section

Advanced This is the button for Advanced filter selections. Clicking on this button displays the following screen:

The following are the filter features of the above Advanced selection screen:


CHAPTER 5

ProjectThis feature allows activating one or more projects to obtain the machine capacity for the selected project. Clicking on the Selectbutton displays the Project selection screen as shown below:

To select a project, select the project line and click on the Select button. To select more projects, repeat this step. The selectedproject is then indicated by the check mark in the Select column, as shown below:


To unselect all selected projects, click on the Deselect aall button.

After having made the required selections, this screen can be closed by clicking on the Close button.

Machine To obtain machine capacity for specific machines, one ore more machines can be selected by means of the Select button.Clicking on the Select button displays the Machine sselection screen in the same way as the Project selection screen wasselected. Repeat the steps above to select one or more machines.

AssortmentTo obtain machine capacity for a specific Item assortment, one or more assortments can be selected on the Assortmentselection screen displayed when the Select button is clicked. Repeat the steps described above for Project selection to selectone or more Assortments.

ActivityTo obtain machine capacity for a specific Activity, one or more Activity can be selected on the Activity sselection screen which isdisplayed when the Select button is clicked. Repeat the steps described above for Project selection to select one or moreActivities.

After having completed selections for Project, MMachine, AAssortment and Activity, click on the Select button.

To set selections back to default values, click on the Default button. To close the Advanced selection screen, click on the Closebutton.

Asset Group Select a specific Asset Group to obtain machine capacity belonging to the selected Asset Group. This can be done by clickingon the lookup icon, which then displays the Asset GGroup llookup screen. Select the specific Asset Group, and click on the Selectbutton as shown below:


CHAPTER 5

Cost CenterSelect a specific Cost Center to obtain machine capacity belonging to the selected Cost Center. This can be done by clicking onthe lookup icon, which then displays the Cost CCenter llookup screen. Select the specific Cost Center and click on the Selectbutton as shown below:


Date and to Select a specific Date range to obtain machine capacity for the selected date range. This can be done by clicking on theCalendar lookup icon, which then displays the Calendar lookup screen. Scroll for the specific Year and Month, and select aspecific date as shown below:

Repeat the above steps for selecting the "to" date field.

Show

• WeekendSelect this option to also obtain an overview of machine capacity over weekends. Selecting this option displays the datecolumns for weekends.

• ActualSelect this to obtain an overview of actual machine capacity has already been realized. Selecting this displays the Actualcolumn for each date in the overview.

• Scale - Click on the Plus icon or the Minus icon to obtain Daily, WWeekly, MMonthly or Yearly overview results.


CHAPTER 5

Overview Results

Expand icon at header -Clicking on the expand icon located at the header, will expand all items displayed for a detailed overview.

Expand icon at detail -Clicking on the expand icon located at the detail will expand the individual item for a detailed overview.

Machine (Activity, Description)This column displays the Machine item, together with its Activity and Description. The activity and description is shown whenthe Machine Item is expanded for a detailed overview.

Cost center (Project)This column displays the Cost Center code together with its Project code. The project code is shown when the Item is expandedfor a detailed overview.

Asset Group (Time)This column displays the Asset Group code together with the Time schedules. The Time is displayed when the Item is expandedfor a detailed overview.

Date columnsBased on the selected range of date, each date is displayed in one column representing the machine capacity for the date.


Tasks / Requirements section

Advanced This is the button for Advanced filter selections. Clicking on this displays the Advanced selection screen:


CHAPTER 5

Filter WarehouseTo obtain tasks / requirements that belong to a specific warehouse, select one or more warehouses from the Warehouseselection screen, which is displayed when the Select button is clicked, as shown below:

Select the specific warehouse, and click on the Select button. To select more warehouses, repeat this step.

To unselect all selected records, click on the Deselect aall button.

After having completed the making of selections, click on the Close button to close the Warehouse selection screen.

MachineTo obtain tasks / requirements from specific machines, select the machines from the Machine selection screen which isdisplayed when the Select button is clicked. Follow similar steps to the steps described above for Warehouse selection, in orderto select one or more machine.

AssortmentTo obtain tasks / requirements from specific Item assortments, select one or more Assortments from the Assortment selectionscreen which is displayed when the Select button is clicked. Follow similar steps to the the steps described above forWarehouse selection, in order to select one or more assortment.


ActivityTo obtain tasks / requirements from specific Activity, select one or more Activity from the Activity selection screen which isdisplayed when the Select button is clicked. Follow similar steps to the the steps described above for Warehouse selection, inorder to select one or more activity.

ProjectTo obtain tasks / requirement from specific Project, select one or more Project from Project selection screen which is displayedwhen the Select button is clicked. Follow similar steps to the the steps described above for Warehouse selection, in order toselect one or more project.

Show: PlannedTo obtain tasks / requirements from the Plan, check this option. This displays Planned orders / requirements in the overview.

Transactions

Not Authorized Authorized Select button

Sales orders Checking this box displaysrequirements derived from Salesorders that have Not beenAuthorized.

Checking this box displaysrequirements derived from Salesorders that have beenAuthorized.

This allows selecting specificsales order to obtain itsrequirements.

Internal Use Checking this box displaysrequirements derived fromInternal use that have Not beenAuthorized.

Checking this box displaysrequirements derived fromInternal Use that have beenAuthorized.

This allows selecting specificinternal use requests to obtain itsrequirements.

Internal Use Checking this box displaysrequirements derived fromproduction orders that have Notbeen Authorized.

Checking this box displaysrequirements derived fromproduction orders that have beenAuthorized.

This allows selecting specificproduction orders to obtain itsrequirements.


CHAPTER 5

Cost center Select a specific cost center to obtain requirements from the selected cost center.

Date and To Select a range of dates to obtain tasks / requirements that fall within the selected date range.

Expand icon at header -To obtain detailed elements of the displayed overview, click on the Expand icon at the header. This expands all displayed items.

Expand icon at detail - To obtain detailed elements of the displayed item, click on the Expand icon at the detail. This expands the selected individualitem displayed in the overview.

Group by criteria

• ItemsSelecting this field displays tasks / requirements grouping by Item code.

• ProjectsSelecting this field displays tasks / requirements grouping by Project code.

• RequestSelecting this field displays tasks / requirements grouping by Request ID.


Item This column displays the Item Code as quoted in the tasks / requirements.

ProjectThis column displays the Project Code of the displayed tasks / requirements.

Range of Date columnsEach date is displayed in a column, based on the date range selected in the filter section,. In each column of dates the cell

shows the required number of machine hour items, which is the required number of machine hours quoted in the order / project/ internal use request.

Color scheme Legend

Not planned The machine capacity or tasks /requirements displayed in this color indicate that these have not been planned.

Incomplete PlannedThe machine capacity or tasks / requirements displayed in this color indicates that it has been partly planned, or Incompleteplanned.

Planned The machine capacity or tasks / requirements displayed in this color indicates that it is Completely Planned.

Actions using Function buttonsThe function buttons shown below can be used for executing actions. For obtaining the latest results in the overview, the usermay use the Refresh function button. To allocate capacity with the requirements, the user can use the Plan function button. Toundo the already Planned capacity and requirement, the delete function button can be used. The machine planning functioncan be exited and closed by means of the Close function button.


CHAPTER 5

4.1 Allocation of machine capacity to requirements

From the obtained overview of machine capacity and machine requirements, it is possible to plan. Planning basically states thatthe available machine capacity is correctly allocated to the requirements derived from sales orders, internal requests, orproduction orders.


Refresh This button enables the user to refresh the overview results to obtain the latest informationbased on the last selected filter criteria.

Plan This button allows the user to plan the machine requirements and the machine capacity. Forinformation, see sub Section 5.4.1

Delete This button enables the user to delete the Planned Machine requirement and capacity. Forinformation, see sub Section 5.4.2

Close This button enables the user to exit and close the Machine Planning function


The Plan function button is only enabled when the two cells of machine ccapacity and machine rrequirement are selected asshown in the example of the screen shot below:

After that the machine capacity cell and the tasks / requirement cell have been selected, click on the Plan function button,which is already enabled. This displays the following screen:


CHAPTER 5

Start date The start date is pre-filled-in automatically, based on the selected machine capacity.

End date The End date is pre-filled-in automatically, based on the selected machine capacity.

Start time Enter the Start time of the Machine Planning here.

Number of hoursThe number of hours being planned is automatically pre-filled-in, based on the selected requirement cell.

After keying-in the start time, and/or changing the number of hours, click on the OK button. This executes the Plan andautomatically refreshes the machine planning screen.


Refreshing the machine planning shows that the machine capacity and requirement is Planned or Incompletely pplanned, basedon how it was planned as shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5

4.2 Deleting or undoing Machine planning

Based on changes of requirements that happen in the real business world, it may be needed for the already planned machinecapacity and requirements to be deleted or undone. Changes could happen due to changes in requirements and inprioritization. It may even need to be deleted due to machine faults, or that the capacity is no longer available. To allowflexibility and best suitability in the real production environment, the Delete function button is made available.

The Delete function button is only enabled when the two cells of already Planned machine capacity and machine requirementare selected as shown in the screen shot example below:


Clicking on the Delete button after having selected the two cells of already planned machine capacity and already plannedmachine requirements automatically deletes or undoes the machine planning and automatically refreshes the MachinePlanning overview for the latest results.

The refreshed machine planning overview then shows that the deleted machine planning is Not PPlanned, as shown in thescreen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5

5. MRP (Material Requirements Planning) Overview

[Manufacturing / Planning / MRP]A Requirements Planning Overview of an Item is an important function that allows the user to obtain availability informationsuch as the quantity in current demand, the level of current stock, expected stock requirements and expected availability ofstock levels within a specific date range. Accessing the Item's Requirement Planning overview via the main menu path[Manufacturing, PPlanning, MMRP], provides an overview of item requirements and availability by the default criteria and basedon the current date. To obtain the intended item's information, would require selections to be made.

In an integrated environment, the MRP function is implemented across the Exact Globe 2003. For instance, the MRP function ismade available in the Item MMaster CCard, which then provides information about the item that was retrieved, and the user is notrequired to make selections. Thus, the integration is implemented with flexibility that provides accurate results automaticallyfor the intended criteria. For instance, the MRP is also made available at the Production OOrder EEntry, which then provides anoverview of Item requirements. The user may, therefore, obtain information of Items demanded whilst entering an order. Inthe Production Order CComplete function via menu path [Manufacturing, TTo bbe pprocessed, CComplete], the MRP overview isintegrated for the user to obtain an overview of requirements before deciding to complete a production order.


Material Requirement Planning

The above screen shows filter options, and selections can be made in the MRP overview screen. There are also fields ofinformation displayed as per user selections on the filter:

Advanced Here users are allowed to make advanced selections to obtain what is intended. Clicking on this button displays the followingscreen:


CHAPTER 5

For information on how to use the above Advanced Selection screen, see Advanced Selections in the MRP Overview below

Advanced Selections in MRP OverviewIntroductionAdvanced Selections allow the user to filter the kind of information he/she wants to obtain, pertaining to Material RequirementsPlanning. The following explains the various usage of fields and features of the Advanced selection screen which is displayed

when the Advanced button in the MRP Overview screen is clicked.


Note that the selections made available in the Advanced Selection function vary, based on the Content selection made in theMRP Overview screen. This is discussed in detail later, as the discussion of field details & features follow in sequence in thissection.

Clicking on the Advanced button displays the following screen, when Content value is selected as Orders // RRequirement:


CHAPTER 5

Selection made as Content: Available in the MRP Overview screen:


Selection made as Content: Purchase in the MRP Overview screen:

When the Content value in the MRP Overview screen is selected as Purchase, the following Advanced Selection screen isdisplayed, which varies from the one shown above:

In the Advanced Selection screen there are basically 3 Selection sections (Filter, TTransactions, SShow) and 1 additional Selectionsection (View) for Orders // RRequirements aand AAvailable options, which are as follows:


CHAPTER 5

Filter AssortmentClicking on the Select button displays the following screen:

The Assortment selection allows the user to select the Item's Assortment Category to obtain Requirement Planning of Itemsbelonging to the selected Assortments. To select an assortment, select the assortment line, and click on the Select button. Toselect more assortments, repeat these steps. To unselect all selections made, click on the Deselect all button. After completingselections, click the Close button.

Items (range) This field becomes not editable when retrieved from the Item Maintenance Card, which is then pre-filled-in with the Item codethat was retrieved.

Planner (Lookup field & checkbox) This field allows selecting the Planner's Resource ID to view requirement planning of items planned by the selected planner. Aspecific planner can be selected by using the lookup button. To view Items requirement planning done by all the variousplanners, check the box.

SalesThis field allows the user to select Sales requirements that are Sales-based, or Internal requests based or All requirements, fromthe drop-down lists.


Make / BuyThis allows selection to view requirements that are derived from Make (Production) or Buy (Purchase) or All (Both Make & Buy).

StockThis allows selection to view requirements that are Stock Controlled or Order Controlled or All (Both Stock Controlled & OrderControlled).

Type •Standard Check this box to view requirements planning for items of the Standard type.

•Machine Hour Check this box to view requirements planning for items of the Machine Hour type.

•Labor Hour Check this box to view requirements planning for items of Labor Hour type.

•Bulk Issue Check this box to view requirements planning for items of Bulk Issue type.

•Supplier This allows selecting a specific Supplier Account which displays materials requirement planning by the selected supplier.


CHAPTER 5

Transactions

Selection CodeSelection Code are used to categorize data entered in requests / activities such as sales orders, purchase orders, productionorders, quotations, and internal use. These activities / requests in a specific Selection Code are only accessible when thatSelection Code is activated / selected. This is a form of categorizing data entered in a Database for quick, easy retrieval.

Not Authorized Authorized Exclude expired / Released

Quotations Check this box to obtainrequirements fromQuotations that have Notbeen Authorized.

Check this box to obtainrequirements fromQuotations that have alreadybeen Authorized.

Exclude expired: Check this boxnot to obtain requirements fromQuotations that have alreadyexpired.

Sales Orders Check this box to obtainrequirements from SalesOrders that have Not beenAuthorized.

Check this box to obtainrequirements from SalesOrders that have alreadybeen Authorized.

None

Internal Use Check this box to obtainrequirements from InternalUse requests that have Notbeen Authorized.

Check this box to obtainrequirements from InternalUse requests that havealready been Authorized..

None

Production Orders Check this box to obtainrequirements fromProductions Orders that haveNot been Authorized.

Check this box to obtainrequirements fromProduction Orders that havealready been Authorized.

Released: Check this box toobtain requirements from alreadyReleased Production Orders aswell.

Purchase Orders Check this box to obtainrequirements from PurchaseOrders that have NotbeenAuthorized.

Check this box to obtainrequirements from PurchaseOrders that have alreadybeenAuthorized.

None


Select button (After Selection - )

Quotations Clicking on the Select button allows the user to select one ore more Selection Codes to obtainrequirements from Quotations requests / activities that were entered within the selected SelectionCode/s. Not selecting any Selection Code retrieves requirements from requests / activities that wereentered, regardless of any Selection Code/s.

Sales Orders Clicking on the Select button allows the user to select one or more Selection Codes to obtainrequirements from Sales Orders requests/ activities that were entered within the selected SelectionCode/s. Not selecting any Selection Code retrieves Sales Orders requirements that were enteredregardless of any Selection Code /s.

Internal Use Clicking on the Select button allows user to select one or more Selection Codes to obtainrequirements from Internal Use requests / activities that were entered within the selected SelectionCode/s. Not selecting any Selection Code retrieves requirements from requests / activities that wereentered regardless of any Selection Code /s.

Production Orders Clicking on the Select button allows user to select one or more Selection Codes to obtainrequirements from Production Orders requests / activities that were entered within the selectedSelection Code/s. Not selecting any Selection Code retrieves Production Orders requirementsregardless of Selection Code /s.

Purchase Orders Clicking on the Select button allows user to select one or more Selection Codes to obtainrequirements from Purchase Orders requests / activities that were entered within the selectedSelection Code /s. Not selecting any Selection Code retrieves Purchase Orders requirementsregardless of Selection Code /s.

See SSteps bbelow oon hhow tto sselect SSelection CCode/s aas eexplained aabove.


CHAPTER 5

Selecting Selection Code/s

Click on the Select button which displays the following screen:

In the above screen, all existing Selection Codes are displayed unselected. To change this, click on the Select

button in the Selection Code line. This will

check the Select ccolumn, as shown in the example below:


To select more Selection Codes, repeat steps given above.

To unselect all selections made, click on the Deselect aall button . To close the selection screen click the Close

button .

Selecting for Requirements from Forecasts - Budgets

ForecastCheck this box to obtain requirements from Forecasts. This enables the Budget Scenario field.

Budget Scenario Enabling this field allows the selection of the Budget Scenario of a specific Year. To select a specific budget scenario, click onthe lookup button, which then displays the following screen:

Select the Budget Scenario line, and click on the Select button . The selected budget scenario is displayed in theBudget Scenario field as shown below:


CHAPTER 5

View

The View section allows the user to scroll to a specific requirement level by using the scroll bar by drag and drop method. Theabove example shows that the requirement level "Maximum exceeded" is selected, which then displays that the requirementsof items / materials in stock exceed the maximum stock level.

The requirement levels are as follows:

Requirement View Levels Description

Selecting this level displays material requirements that have negative stock, levels, whichmeans demand is more than the available zero stock.

Selecting this level displays material requirements that have below- minimum stock levels, whichare below purchase order level, but not less than zero. Selecting this level includes the red cellrequirement level.

Selecting this level displays material requirements that have above- minimum stock levels butbelow-maximum stock levels, which means requirements between purchase order levels andmaximum levels. Selecting this level includes the yellow and red cell.

Selecting this level displays material requirements that have exceeded the maximum stocklevel. Selecting this includes green, yellow and red cells.


Show

Fulfillment date < Date Check this box to view requirements of quantity when the Fulfillment date is earlier than the displayed date. This is shown in aseparate column in the initial date range column.

Fulfillment > Date Check this box to view requirements of quantity when Fulfillment date is later than the displayed date. This is shown in aseparate column in the last date range column.

Contains: RequirementsCheck this box to obtain requirements planning of items that contain requirements such as sales orders demand.

Include: Completed < DateCheck this box to obtain requirements planning of items that contain requirements that have already been completed beforethe selected date or current date.

Stock: Unallocated Checking this box shows a column "Free Stock" which displays quantities of stock not allocated to any requirements.

Discontinued: ItemsChecking this box also shows Requirements planning of Items that have been Discontinued.

Time of DeliveryChecking this box shows an additional column displaying delivery time of each item shown in the MRP screen.


CHAPTER 5

PO: Unallocated Check this box to view requirements of item quantity from Purchase Orders that have not been allocated to any sales orders /internal use. This shows a column PO Unallocated.

Pr. O.: Unallocated Check this box to view requirements of item quantity from Production Orders that have not been allocated to any sales orders/ internal use. This shows a column Pr. O. Unallocated.

PrecisionEnter the precisionstandard to work to when displaying item requirements and planning.

UnitSelect either the Sales unit or the Purchase unit to view quantity required by the selected unit. This shows the unit in the Unitcolumn.

Column width Select either Standard or 150% to obtain either a standard width column of MRP overview screen or 150% width column of MRPoverview screen.

Warehouse This button allows the selection of one or more warehouses in order to obtain requirement planning of items / materials fromselected warehouses. Clicking on this button displays the following screen:


The above shown screen displays all existing warehouses without selection, which then displays requirements planning of

items regardless of any warehouse. To select a warehouse, select the warehouse line and click on the Select

button To select more warehouses, repeat the explained steps. To unselect all selections made, click on the Deselect

all buttons . To exit from the warehouse selection screen, click on the Close button .

View This is defaulted with 30 days, which displays requirements planning for 30 days. The user may change this by keying in therequired number of days that he/she wishes to obtain.

From & To (Date range) Select the range of dates in the From and to field. Note that the range of dates must be within the number of days entered inthe view field as described above. This is defaulted from the current date until the last day of the 30th day period as per numberof days in the view field.

Scale buttonClicking on either the Plus sign or the minus sign displays the requirements planning in different scales. Clicking on the Plussign increases the scale from Daily to Weekly, and clicking more changes it to Monthly and Yearly. Clicking on the Minus signdecreases the scale, for example from Monthly to Weekly, and clicking more, will change it to Daily.


CHAPTER 5

ContentThis is a drop-down list consisting of the following options:

Orders / RequirementsSelecting this option displays requirements of quantity required from sales orders and other demands, such as quotations andinternal use. This enables the header field for drop-down list options so that the user can view requirements by specific sorting,e.g. by Item, Resource, Project, Supplier, Order, or Customer.

Available Selecting this option displays requirements of quantity that are available in stock. This option disables the header field andoverview is displayed by Item only.

Purchase Selecting this option displays requirements of quantity that come in from purchase orders. Selecting this option enables theheader field for drop-down list options so that the user can view requirements by specific sorting, e.g. by Item, Resource,Project, Supplier, Order, or Customer.

View (Quantity / Amount) The View criterion is only displayed when the Content: Orders / Requirements option is selected. Select the Quantity to obtainrequirements of orders for this quantity. Select the Amount to obtain requirements of orders to this amount.


Displayed ResultsThe following MRP overview was obtained by selection of Available for Content criteria based on a Daily scale within the 30days specific date range.


CHAPTER 5

The result's detail header fields are described below in a table:

Result's Header Fields Descriptions

- Plus SignClick on the plus sign to expand all displayed items, which show the detailed breakdown ofinflow and outflow of requirements.

Item / [Drop down listoptions]

This column lists all items with Item Code and Item Name, that can be further expanded into typesof requirements. This is shown when Content value Available is chosen. When Content value ofOrders/ Requirements or Purchase is chosen, the drop-down list is displayed, which providesoptions. This is described in later sections of this document.

Unit This field displays the Unit used for the Item. The Unit can be based on the Sales UUnit orPurchase UUnit, depending on the selection made on the Advanced Selection screen.

Stock or Free Stock Stock is displayed when Available is selected in the Content drop-down list and the "Stock"box is checked in the Advanced Selection screen, which displays the item's current stockquantity. Free SStock is displayed when Orders // RRequirements is selected in the Content dropdown list, and the Stock: UUnallocated box is checked in the Advanced Selection screen, whichdisplays items' stock quantity not allocated to any requirements / demands (free stock).

PO : Unallocated The PO:Unallocated column is displayed when PO: UUnallocated box is checked in theAdvanced Selection screen. This column, displays the quantity of items that are purchasedand not allocated to any requirements or demands such as sales orders / internal requests.

Pr. O.: Unallocated The Pr.O.: UUnallocated column is displayed when Pr.O.: UUnallocated box is checked in theAdvanced Selection screen. This column displays the item's quantity that are manufacturedand not allocated to any requirements or demands such as sales orders / internal use.

Time of Delivery This column displays the number of days taken for the delivery of the item. This is displayedwhen the Time oof DDelivery box is checked in the Advanced Selection screen.

[Fulfillment date <Current Date]

This field displays the item's requirements quantity, as the item's delivery date being earlierthan the current date. This is displayed in a separate column, for example '< 11/9'.

Range of Date columns The next columns are represented by each date that is within the selected date range. Eachcolumn of dates displays its requirements quantity as at the displayed date.

[Fulfillment date >Current Date]

This field displays the item's requirements quantity, as the item's delivery date being laterthan the current date. This is displayed in a separate column, for example '> 11/9'.


Header Field in 1st column

This can be either by Item or a drop down list, as shown in the screen shot example below:

Result's Header Fields Descriptions

Total Quantity Total requirements quantity per item is displayed in this column, which is an accumulation ofall requirements quantities within the selected date range. This column is only displayedwhen Content criteria is selected with either Orders / Requirements or Purchase.

Total Costs Total Costs Amount of the Total Quantity per item as displayed in this column. This column is onlydisplayed when Content criteria is selected with either Orders // RRequirements or Purchase.


CHAPTER 5

The drop down list provides the user with options of how the requirements should be displayed. The following are the optionsmade available in the drop-down list and its details are described as follows:

ItemsSelecting this field displays requirements planning by Items, showing a list of Item Codes and respective Item Descriptions.Each Item is then expanded to break down requirement types that will be discussed later in this document.

ResourcesSelecting this field displays requirements planning by the Resources responsible, showing a list of IDs of Resources and Namesof the respective Resources. Each Resource is expanded to a breakdown of required items, for which the respective resourcesare responsible.

ProjectsSelecting this field displays requirements planning by Projects, showing a list of Project Number and respective ProjectDescription. Each Project is then expanded into a breakdown of requirements of Items as quoted in the respective projects.

SuppliersSelecting this field displays requirements planning by Suppliers, showing a list of Supplier Account Number and respectiveSupplier Account Names. Each Supplier is then expanded to break down requirements of Items as required by the respectiveSuppliers.


Order Selecting this field can be either display Orders from Customers or Orders from Suppliers, as determined by the selection madein the Content criteria.

a) Selecting Content value as Orders / Requirements, and selecting by Order displays requirements planning by the Customer,showing a list of Customer Account Numbers and Customer Account Names that can be expanded to break down requirements of Items for respective Customers.

b) Selecting the Content value as Purchase and selecting by Order displays requirements planning by the Supplier, showing alist of Supplier Account Numbers and Supplier Account Names that can be expanded to break down the requirements ofItems for the respective Suppliers.

Customer Selecting this field displays requirement planning by the Customer, showing the Customer Account Number and the CustomerAccount Name that can be expanded to break down requirements of Items for respective customers.

Display Results by Content - "Orders / Requirements" by Item

In the Item column, each item consists of an expand (plus sign) button . Clicking on the plus sign of an Item in theItem column expands the Item's requirement information into a detailed breakdown. These breakdowns of Item's RequirementDetails are explained in the table below:


CHAPTER 5

At the Final section of the MRP Details Overview, there is a summary displayed as shown below:

Total QuantityThis displays the Total Quantity of All Items per Date column.

Total CostsThis displays All Items' Total Costs Amount per Date column.

Average This displays the Average Costs of all items per Date column (Formula = Total Costs / Total Quantity).

Item's Breakdown Fields Descriptions

Quotation Displays the Item's required quantity from Quotations.

Sales Order Displays the Item's required quantity from Sales Orders.

Internal Use Displays the Item's required quantity from Internal Use requests.

Material Displays the Item's required quantity from Material requests.

Requirements Displays the Item's Total Requirements which is accumulation of all the above requiredquantities.

Purchase Displays the Item's Inflow quantity from Purchase Orders.

Production Displays the Item's Inflow quantity from Production Orders.

Inter-branch Transfer Displays the Item's Inflow quantity from Inter-branch Transfer.

Reserved Displays the Item Quantity reserved.

Allocated Displays the Item's Inflow Quantity that has already been allocated to requirements

Not: Allocated Displays the Item's Inflow Quantity that has not been allocated to any requirements.

Free: Purchase Order Displays the Item's Quantity from Purchase Orders that has not been allocated torequirements.

Free: Production Order Displays the Item's Quantity from Production Orders has not been allocated to requirements

Forecast Displays the Item's Quantity from Forecast Orders.


Display Results by Content -"Available" by Item

Display Results by Content - "Orders / Requirements" by Order


CHAPTER 5

Display Results by Content - "Purchase" by Items

Actions with Function Buttons in the MRP Overview In the MRP Overview screen, there are function buttons that allow the user to perform various actions, such as obtainingdetailed information of the displayed requirement quantity. Requirements of Where UUsed items could also be obtained in thisfunction. Financial Information of an Item can be quickly retrieved within the MRP Overview function, without having to go tothe Finance module menu path.

Besides the above, Transfer of items can be performed from within the MRP Overview function. Purchase Orders or ProductionOrders can be automatically generated, based on the demand / requirements obtained. For more information on the displayeditem, the Item Maintenance Master Card can be retrieved from the MRP overview screen. It is even possible to retrieve therequirements entry detailed application, such as the Sales Order for the displayed requirements.

Direct changes of the Delivery Date of the displayed requirements could also be done here using the function button. Forreporting purposes, the displayed MRP Overview can be exported to the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet using the Export functionwithin the MRP Overview screen. All the above actions can be done possibly with the function buttons within the MRPapplication.



Refresh This button refreshes the MRP overview results into the latest information based on the latestcriteria selection made by the user.

Details This button provides a detailed overview of each record displayed in the MRP overviewresults. For information see sub Section 5.5.1.

Source This button enables user to obtain requirements sources. For information on the Sourcefunctionality see sub Section 4.1.3.1.

Where Used This button provides Where used details of the item displayed in the MRP overview results.For information see sub Section 5.5.2.

Card This button makes possible the retrieval of the Item Financial Card. For information, see subSection 5.5.3.

Transfer This button allows entering the Inter-branch Transfer of items displayed in the MRP overviewresults. For information see sub Section 5.5.4.

Produce This button allows generating production orders based on the Item requirement displayed inthe MRP overview results. For information, see sub Section 5.5.5.

PO This button allows generating purchase order. For information on generating purchase orderupon obtaining MRP overview see sub Section 5.5.6.

Item This button enables the user to obtain the selected Item's Master Maintenance Card. Forinformation on the Item Master Card, See sub Section 3.0.

Order This button allows generating / retrieving a Sales order based on the Item requirementdisplayed in the MRP overview results. For information on Sales orders, obtain the LogisticsProduct Manual. For quick information on retrieving orders see sub Section 5.5.7.

Change This button makes it possible to change the delivery date of the Item requirement displayedin the MRP overview results. For information see sub Section 5.5.8.

Export This button enables the exporting of the displayed results of an MRP overview into MicrosoftExcel spreadsheet. For information See sub Section 5.5.9.

Close This button allows the user to exit and close the MRP function.


CHAPTER 5

5.1 Detailed overview of material requirements

Based on the Material Requirements overview, it is possible to obtain detailed records of the requirements displayed. Forexample, when there is an overview of orders // rrequirements for items, the user may want to know where the requirementsoriginated. It could be sales orders requirements or unallocated free stock from purchase orders, and so on. The detailedoverview of orders / requirements / availability / purchases not only provides a listing of originated sales, purchases orproductions, but also enables the user to perform purchases entry and production entry, based on the demands from sales. Thefollowing discusses the Details function button:

The Details function button is contained in the MRP function, as shown in the screen shot example below:


Selecting an item requirements cell enables the Details function button. Clicking on the Details function button displays thedetailed overview of originated requirements, as shown in the screen shot example below:

The Details screen consists of 2 sections, the upper section displaying requirements of demands from sales order andproduction , and the bottom section displaying the availability from purchase orders and production orders.

Requirements sectionThe details of fields displayed in this are as follows:

Allocated This is a checkbox that indicates whether the displayed requirement is allocated to the availability of orders or free stock.


CHAPTER 5

Delivery date This column displays the Delivery date of the requirement orders such as Sales order / Production order Delivery date.

Item code This column displays the Requirement order's Item Code, such as the Item code quoted / demanded in the Sales order orProduction Order.

Type This displays the Requirement Type, i.e. either Sales order or Production Order.

Order This displays the Requirement Order's Number. If it is a Sales order, it displays theSales Order Number, and when it is aProduction Order, it displays the Production Order Number.

Auth. (Authorized) This is a checkbox that indicates whether the Requirement Order is Authorized. Unchecked indicates that the requirement orderhas Not beenAuthorized, and Checked indicates that the requirement order has been Authorized.

Project Code This displays the Project Code of the Requirement Order.

Description This displays the Requirement Order's Description. If it is a sales order, it displays the sales order description, and if it is aproduction order, it displays the production order number.

Ordered This displays the Quantity Ordered of the Requirement Order.

Fulfilled This displays the Quantity Fulfilled of the Requirement Order.

Received This displays the Quantity Received of the Requirement Order.


Total CostsThis displays the Total Costs for the displayed Requirement Order.

Resource This displays the Name of the Resource who entered the Requirement Order.

Order byThis displays the Account Name of the Customer who demanded / ordered the requirement order.

Notes icon This is a checkbox that indicates whether the requirement order contains notes. If checked, it indicates that the requirementorder contains notes.

Paper clip icon This is a checkbox that indicates whether the requirement order contains attachments. If checked, it indicates that therequirement order contains attachments.

Instruction icon This is a checkbox that indicates whether the requirement order contains instructions. If checked, it indicates that therequirement order contains instructions.

Purchase orders / Production orders section

Delivery date This section displays the Delivery Date of the availability order. When it is a Purchase order, the Purchase Order Delivery Dateis displayed and similarly for Production order.

Item code This column displays the availability order's Item code. For example, it displays Item code quoted in the Purchase Order orProduction order.

Type This column displays the Availability Order's Type, which can be Production order or Purchase Order.


CHAPTER 5

Order This column displays the Availability Order's Number. If it is a Production order then it displays Production Order number andif it is a Purchase order then it displays Purchase Order Number.

Project Code This column displays the Availability Order's Project Code. When it is a Production order, then it displays Production ProjectCode.

Description This column displays the Availability Order's Description. When it is Production order, then it displays Production OrderDescription.

Ordered This column displays the Quantity Ordered for the displayed Availability Order.

ReceiptsThis column displays the Quantity Received for the displayed Availability Order.

Total CostsThis column displays the Total Costs of the displayed Availability Order.

Resource This field displays the Resource Name whom entered the Availability Order.

Ordered byThis field displays the Account name of the Customer Account who requested / ordered the Availability Order. This is notapplicable to the Production Order. If it is a Purchase Order, then the Ordered by is the Supplier Account Name.


Function Icons

Entering Notes to Requirement Order OR Availability Order

1. Select the requirement order line, and click on the Notes icon located at the 1st line from the top, to enter notes to the Salesorder entry. The following Notes entry screen is displayed:

2. Key-in descriptions of notes, and click on the Timestamp button to mark by whom and when the notes were entered.

3. Next, click on the Save button to save the notes entry. The System saves the entry and automatically closes the notesentry screen.

4. To exit from the notes entry without saving, click on the Close button.

Entering Attachments to the Requirement Order Entry OR Availability Order

1. Select the requirement order line and click on the Paper clip icon located at the 2nd line from the top ,below the Notes icon, to attach documents to the sales order entry. This displays the Document Attachment screen, as shown in the screen shotbelow:


CHAPTER 5

2. There is already a document attached to this order in this example. Perform the necessary actions required, using thefunction button contained on this screen.

Entering Instructions to Sales order Entry

1. The Instructions icon is only enabled when a Sales order type of requirement order is selected. To enter instructions, selecta sales order line and click on the Instructions icon located at the 3rd from top below the "Paper" clip icon. System displaysthe Instructions entry screen as shown in the screen shot example below:


2. Key-in Instructions to the Sales order entry, and click on the Close button. This saves and closes the Instructions entry.

Entering Notes to Requirement Order Fulfillment OR Availability Order

1. To make an entry as to the Fulfillment of Requirement order, select the sales order line and click on the Paper cclip icon located at the 4th line from the top below the Instructions icon. The system displays the Notes Entry screen as shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5

2. Key-in the notes and click on the Timestamp button to mark who entered the notes and at what time.

3. Next, click on the Save button. The System saves thenotes entry and automatically closes the notes entry screen.

4. To close and exit without making entries, or without saving entries, click on the Close button.

Entering Attachment to Requirement Orders Fulfillment OR Availability Order

1. To enter an attachment to the fulfillment line of a requirement order, select the requirement order line and click on the Paperclip icon located at the 5th line from the top below the Paper cclip icon. The system displays the Document Attachmentscreen as shown in the screen shot example below:


2. Locate the document file you wish to attach to the fulfillment line at the File nname field by clicking on the Folder icon. After having selected the relevant document file, the Date and Size is automatically pre-filled-in, based on the selecteddetails of the document.

3. Key-in a Description to the Attachment.

4. Next, click on the Save button to save the attachment. Click on the Close button to exit from the Attachment entry screen.

5. To retrieve the document, click on the Open button.

Actions with Function ButtonsThe Details function consists of the following function buttons to provide means of actions upon deciding from what is obtainedfrom the Details overview.


CHAPTER 5

5.2 Where-used information upon MRP overview

Where Used Information of the displayed Item (Material) Requirements is important to obtain its availability details for a rangeof dates based on daily, weekly or monthly or yearly periods. Based on such where used details of material availability,decisions can be taken in planning, purchasing, and in producing an item adequately to meet accurate delivery time of aproduction order, and therefore meeting the customer's expectation and dateline. The overview used enables the user to obtaininformation such as the relevant end-items that use the overviewed part item. The Where-Used function is similar to the MRPoverview, but it is an automatic overview of Availability, which can be triggered with the use of the Where Used function button.

The Where-Used function button contained the MRP overview function is as shown in the screen shot example below:


Selecting the requirement order cell and clicking on the Where-UUsed function button displays the followingAvailability Planning details, as shown in the screen shot example below:

Note that the screen shown is the Item MManagement: PPlanning screen which is similar to the MRP Overview, but thisautomatically shows Content as Available which is the availability planning details of the selected item requirement for a daterange of 30 days.

The Details of this overview are as follows:

Item This overview displays the Availability of a Requirement order, automatically by Item.

UnitThis column displays a Unit of Measure used for the Item.

Range of DatesThese column cells of the range of dates for the selected number of days are shown, each representing one day or one week,one month or one year; depending on selection. The example shown above shows each column cell, one for each day / date.


CHAPTER 5

ResultsResults are described as follows:At the Item column, the Item code and Item Name of the selected requirement order is displayed. To expand the Item into

detailed information, click on the Plus SSign , and to collapse the detailed view, click on the Minus SSign

Start This displays Item's Available Quantity at the Start for each date.

Quotation This displays the Item's Available Quantity as originated from the Quotation, which is part of the Outgoing movement of theitem.

Sales Order This displays the Item's Available Quantity as originated from Sales order, which is part of the Outgoing movement of the item.

Internal Use This displays the Item's Available Quantity as originated from Internal Use, which is part of the Outgoing movement of the item.

MaterialThis displays the Item's Available Quantity as originated from Material issue for production order, which is part of the Outgoingmovement of the item.

OutThis displays the Total above Outgoing Quantities of the Item.


Purchase This displays the Item's Available Quantity originated from Purchase, which is part of the Incoming movement of the item.

Production This displays the Item's Available Quantity originated from Production, which is part of the Incoming movement of the item.

Inter-branch Transfer This displays the Item's Available Quantity originated from Inter-branch Transfer, which is part of the Incoming movement of theitem.

In This displays the Total Incoming Quantities of the Item.

End This displays the Available Quantity based on the Start Quantity, the Total Outgoing Quantity (Out) and the Total IncomingQuantity (In).

5.3 Item Cards

Users not only make retrieval of Master Data of Items and Asset Item, but it is possible to have quick access to financial

information of an Item in Requirement or Asset such as a Machine Item or the Standard Item, by using the Cardbutton.

In the Master Maintenance Card of an Asset Machine or Standard Item, the Card button is contained, which allows the user toobtain information of Financial TTransactions pper IItem.

Clicking on the Card button displays the Financial Transactions shown in the example screen shot below:The expanded detailed overview is as shown below:


CHAPTER 5

Filters can be applied in this screen to obtain the actual information Intended. These filters are :

DateSelect the range of Dates for obtaining financial transactions that occurred on the selected Date.

AllChecking this box allows the viewing of financial transactions of All ranges of Dates.


Group by

Selecting specific value from the Group bby drop-down lists allows the grouping of displayed financial transactions by theselected field value. For example, selecting Resource would group financial transactions as per Resource's ID.

Advanced buttonClicking on the Advanced button shown above displays the following filter options:


CHAPTER 5

Reporting Date Select either Date or Reporting Date to obtain the date upon which the financial transactions were transacted.

Type Select the type of Financial Transaction desired. It can be Standard, Fiscal, Correction, or All.

P&L, B/SSelect the Account Type of which you wish to obtain financial transactions. It can be either P&L, or B/S or both P&L, B/S.

Unprocessed Checking this displays financial transactions that have Not been Processed.

Include: child Checking this displays financial transactions including those of the Child Asset Machines.

FiltersClicking on the Filter button displays the following options to allow user for in-depth filtering:

The above filter options can be entered or selected with specific values for searching and filtering the relevant information offinancial transactions.


Viewing Financial Entries of a Financial Transaction

From the financial transactions obtained the user may view detailed financial entries. This can be done by selecting the desired

financial transaction and clicking on the Our RRef. button. Clicking on the Our RRef button displays the followingfinancial entries of the selected financial transactions:

The Financial Entries are shown for each individual transaction as per G/L accounts.


CHAPTER 5

Where Used Item Card Function Button

The following menu paths are those where the Item (Standard Item & Asset Item) Card button is integrated / applied:[Order // IItems // CCard][Invoice // IItems // CCard][Purchase // IItems // CCard][Inventory // IItems // CCard][Assets // AAssets // CCard][POS // IItems // CCard][Manufacturing // PPlanning // MMRP // CCard bbutton]

NOTE: A Financial Card is also available for Resource(Creditors), Projects, Account Payables (Suppliers), Account Receivables

(Customers), General Ledgers, Cost Centers/ Units, Warehouses, Production Projects.

5.4 Inter-branch transfers from production order entry

Whilst entering a production order and taking note the available stock comparison with the required quantity of materials, inter-branch transfer can be done using the Transfer function button. It is important that the required quantity of materials in theissuing warehouse be enough for the production order. When there is insufficient stock in the production order issuingwarehouse, available stock of materials in secondary warehouses must be transferred to the production issue warehouse. Thisis where the Transfer function makes a significant role in the production environment.

Inter-branch Transfers can be done by clicking on the Transfer function button made available in the Production Order Entryscreen as shown below:


In EG2003, where there is integration of functions, the Transfer function is also made available in the Material RRequirementPlanning ((MRP) function, as shown below:


CHAPTER 5

Clicking on the Transfer button displays the following Inter-branch Transfer screen:


Prior to viewing the inter-branch suggestion list of materials or part items of the Production Order, it is required that the usermakes relevant selections. The selections details are described as follows:

SortBy clicking on the drop-down list, it is possible to sort the list of part items to be displayed, either by Item or by Warehouse.

Warehouse Select, from the Warehouse drop-down list, the Warehouse on which the part items should be displayed.

ShowAllTo view all part items, select to Show All.

Requirement <> Allocation To view part items that has a requirement which is not equal to the Allocated quantity, select Show Requirement<> AAllocation.

Advice>0To view part items that have an inter-branch transfer advice quantity more than zero, select Show Advice>0.

Include: Stock Controlled Check this option to obtain lists of materials that are stock-controlled.

Based on the above selections, the list of suggestions of materials (part items) for inter-branch transfer is displayed.

To Transfer an item, select the respective part item by clicking on the Selected column, as shown below:


CHAPTER 5

Clicking once in the selected column by item row is checked with a green tick, which indicates that the part item is selected forinter-branch transfer.

At the Advice column, as shown below, enter the quantity to be transferred:

Next click the Transfer button. The System then automatically generates the inter-branch transfer accordingly, andthe Inter-branch transfer function is exited.


5.5 Producing based on MRP overview

Based upon the Materials Requirement Planning Overview, the Production Planner may decide to generate a production orderfor a particular item which is found to have insufficient stock availability compared to the demands of requirements.

This can be done quickly without having to find Material BOM etc, or to exit the MRP function to enter the production order viathe Entries mmenu ppath by means of the implemented "Produce" function.

The generation of the production order is only applicable to materials (items) that are of attribute Make which obviouslyincludes the Bill of Material. The Produce function triggers the production order, generating listing suggestions for all versionsof an Item's Bill of Material. Preferred BOM version can be selected and Quantity produced can be advised accordingly.

Selecting an Item rrequirements cell OR viewing a Detailed screen which was retrieved after having selecting an item, and

clicking on the Produce function button displays the Generate PProduction OOrders screen, as shown in the screenshot example below:


CHAPTER 5

Details of the above Generate PProduction OOrder function screen are as follows:

SortThis field is disabled. This is automatically sorted by Item.

Warehouse Select from the drop-down list to view the Item's suggestion list of a specific Warehouse.

Show Select from the drop-down list to enable what is to be shown in the results.

Item This displays the Item Code of the selected requirement.

Description This displays the Item Description.

Version This displays all BOM versions of the Item.

Main Displays the Warehouse Code of each BOM version of the Item displayed.

Selected This is a cell that allows the user to click once to select the suggested BOM version to be produced (to be generated forproduction order).

RequirementsThis displays the Quantity Required for the Item for each BOM version.

Allocated Displays Allocated Quantity for the Item for each BOM Version.


Free StockThis displays Unallocated ((Free SStock) Quantity of the Item for each BOM version.

Shortage Displays Shortage Quantity which was automatically calculated, based on the Requirement Quantity and Available Quantity.

UnitDisplays Unit of Measure of the Item.

Batch QuantityDisplays Batch Quantity of the Item.

Advice This field is required for the user's input. Enter the Production Order Quantity to be generated. This is done for the selected BOMversion of the Item.

UnitThis displays the unit, this displays the unit of measure to be used of Measure to be used in the Production Order beinggenerated.

Price Displays Price of the Item.

To select and advise the desired BOM version of the Item, check the BOM version by clicking once in the Selected column. Theselected BOM version of the displayed item is shown with a green tick. Next, enter the Advice QQuantity which is the ProductionOrder Quantity to be generated.

Finally, click on the Produce button. The system generates the production order and it is displayed on the Created:Order screen, as shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5

Click on the Close button to exit from this screen. If you wish to open / retrieve the generated Production Order, select theproduction order line and click on the Open button that displays the following Production Order Entry screen:

For information on Production order entry, See section 5,


5.6 Purchasing based on MRP overview

It is possible to do purchases upon decisions for more availability of stock based on the obtained MRP overview. The User’s notreturn to the Purchases menu path, nor needs to find purchases details, as the Generate PPO ((Purchase OOrder) function which isimplemented within the MRP OOverview function provides all relevant details for purchases in listing of suggestions for all linkedsuppliers. The Generate PPO function and details are discussed in the following:

The Generate PPO button is maintained in the MRP ooverview and similarly in the Details ffunction. Selecting an Item from the

displayed requirement and clicking on the Generate PPO function button displays the following Generate PPurchaseOrders screen:


CHAPTER 5

Details contained in this function are as follows:

Supplier This displays All Supplier Codes already Linked to the selected Item.

Name This displays the Supplier's Account Name.

Item This displays the Item Code of the selected Item.

Description This displays the Item Description for each item code displayed.

Main Supplier This Indicates which supplier of all suggestions is the Main Supplier of the selected Item.

Requires approval

This indicates that the suppliers linked to the Item require approval.

Approved supplier This indicates whether the supplier linked to the Item is an Approved Supplier.

Warehouse This displays the Item's Warehouse Code for each displayed supplier.

Selected This is a cell for the user to select the suggested supplier. Clicking on the desired supplier row cell,selects the supplier, whichis then shown with a green tick.

RequirementsThis displays the Required Quantity of the Item for each supplier linked to the item.


Allocated This displays the Allocated Quantity of Items for each supplier linked to the Item.

Free StockThis displays the Available (Free Stock) Quantity of the Item for each supplier linked to the Item.

Shortage This displays the Shortage Quantity calculated automatically in comparison with the required quantity and availability.

UnitThis displays the Unit of Measure of the Item for each supplier linked to the item.

Factor This displays the Factor of the Item for each supplier linked to the item.

PO size This displays the Default Purchase Order Size (default quantity) of the Item per Supplier already linked.

Advice This field is required for user's input. Enter the Purchase Order Quantity for the selected supplier's purchase order beinggenerated.

UnitThis displays the Unit of Measure of the Item, to be used in the Purchase Order being generated.

DaysThis displays the Delivery Lead Time per supplier, taken to receive the purchased item.

Price This displays the Purchase Price of the Item per linked Supplier.

Supplier: StockThis displays the Stock Quantity Available at the Supplier.


CHAPTER 5

After having made the correct selection of suggested purchase from the supplier, and having entered the required Purchase

order quantity, click on the Purchase button. The system generates the purchase order for the selected item from theselected supplier/s with the advised qquantity oof ppurchase order. The generated purchase order is then displayed in the Created:Order screen, as shown in the screen shot example below:

The above Created: OOrder screen displays generated Purchase Order Number, Supplier's Account Number, and WarehouseCode for receiving. The lower section of the screen displays the log information of the generated purchase order such as thePurchase order Number, Order Entry Number, Number of Order Lines required for Type of Order, Item Code, and Reasons forpurchase order generation.

To open or retrieve the generated Purchase Order, select the purchase order line and click on the Open button, which thenretrieves the Purchase order Entry screen, as shown in the screen shot example below:


For information on the Purchase Order Entry screen, obtain the Logistics Product Manual.


CHAPTER 5

5.7 Retrieving orders from MRP overview

The Order function button is contained in the MRP overview screen, which is enabled when orders / requirements are viewedby Orders. This is to view the Sales oorder entry or Production OOrder eentry based on the selected Type of Order requirement cellin the MRP overview. The Order function button is also contained in the Details screen. It enables the user to view sales oordersor production orders that are displayed in the upper section of Requirements based on the user's selection of the type of order.

The Order function button is contained in the MRP Overview screen, as shown in the following screen shot example:


The Order function button on the Details function screen is shown in the screen shot example below:

Clicking on the Order function button after selecting an order requirement of type Sales will display the Sales orderentry screen:


CHAPTER 5

Selecting an order requirement cell in Type PProduction and clicking on the Order function button will display the ProductionOrder Entry. Similarly, if a Service order or Internal uuse rrequest is selected, the respective type of order entry screen will beretrieved:

For information on a Sales order entry, obtain the Logistics Product Manual. For information on Service or Internal use, obtainthe product manual for the respective module.

For information on a Production order entry, see Section 4.0


5.8 Changing delivery dates from MRP overview

Users may need to change the Delivery dates on Obtained Requirement Orders due to customers' requests, or due to internalcircumstances such as delay in purchases or productions. Nevertheless, it is possible to change delivery of an order in its entryscreen, but it can also be done without opening the order entry, by means of the Change function button. You may decide tochange the requirement order's Delivery date upon obtaining overview information of the Material Requirement Planning. Thus,it is possible to quickly Change the Delivery Date from within the MRP function, as follows:

The Change function button is contained in the MRP overview, as shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5

In the Details function, the Change button is maintained, as shown in the screen shot example below:

Selecting the top section of a requirement order and clicking on the Change button displays the following Changefunction.

NOTE: On the MRP overview screen, the Change function is also triggered when the requirement order cell is draggd and dropped

in a different date cell.


Delivery Date Select the New Delivery Date by clicking on the Calendar lookup button.

Reset: Confirm Check this for required confirmation of changes.

Resource Select your Resource ID to indicatione who has made the changes to the Delivery Date.

Partial delivery allowed

N/A Select this N/A if the selected requirement order is Not Applicable for partial delivery.

YesSelect this if the selected requirement order is Allowed for partial delivery.

No Select this if the selected requirement order is Not Allowed for partial delivery.


CHAPTER 5

Shipping via Select the Shipping Condition for the selected requirement order.

After having made the necessary input of changes, click on the Save button. The changes entered will automatically be saved.To cancel changes or to close the change function without saving, click on the Close button.

NOTE: The requirement order of which the delivery date was changed will then disappear from the Details overview screen, because

the requirement order falls in a different date cell.

The changes are then reflected in the MRP overview screen when the Refresh button is clicked, as shown in the screen shotexample below:


5.9 Exporting information from MRP overview

The Obtained overview of the Materials Requirement Plan can be exported into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet for further datamanipulation and for extracting charts. This also provides a means of reporting the requirement planning. For this, the Exportfunction button is used as follows:

The Export function button is contained in the MRP overview screen, as shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 5

After obtaining the results of the material requirements planning overview, click on the Export function button. Thesystem automatically exports all displayed results into the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, as shown in the screen shot examplebelow:


The displayed details of fields are as follows:

Warehouse This displays the selected criteria value for the Warehouse field in the MRP overview function.

Date This displays the selected criteria value for the Date range field in the MRP overview function.

ContentThis displays the selected criteria value for the Content field in the MRP overview function.

View This displays the selected criteria value for the View field in the MRP overview function.

Scale This displays the selected criteria value for the Scale field in the MRP overview function.

NOTE: The above fields may differ according to the selected type of overview in the MRP function.

ResultsThe results are extracted into the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet exactly as displayed in the MRP overview function. Lists of Itemsare displayed in each row of items containing a requirements value for each respective date column cell, based upon theselected range of dates.


CHAPTER 5

6. MRP Engine for Real-Time High-Performance Overview of Results

[Manufacturing, Planning, MRP Engine]In the event of a company having heavy transactions from sales, viewing all the purchase advises or production advises fromMRP will take much time. In the calculations, various factors need to be considered, such as supplier delivery time, purchasesize, batch size, stock level, production lead-time, etcetera. The compaany will always calculate the requirement with all thesefactors in mind, then advise company employees what/when to purchase or produce accordingly. In a real life environment, anycompany always desires to access to MRP information in real time in order to make a better decision for their business, duringthe calculation of MRP it will, in most cases, utilize all the resources from the server, and often that will lead to performanceissues and information not being accessible when needed.

The MRP engine is implemented to rectify the performance issue mentioned above. This is a sophisticated dedicated engine,designed to perform the complex calculation of material requirements. The MRP engine will process the requirement and willprovide the MRP overview accordingly. With this enhancement, users will gain significantly by using the MRP engine instead ofconventional MRP applications that always lead to performance issues when complex calculation factors are involved.

Triggering the MRP engine via menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning, MMRP eengine] displays the following MRP engine screen:The details of the above MRP engine function are described as follows:


Code

This is the MRP engine code. It is required that this code be entered when the MRP engine is executed for the first time. The nexttime the MRP is executed, this field will be disabled and the previous entered code is pre-filled-in.

Description This is the MRP engine Description. This is pre-filled-in according to the previously entered Description. This can be changed.Assortments

Assortment


CHAPTER 5

Select the specific Item Assortment to calculate MRP for items of the selected Assortments. Clicking on the Select buttondisplays the following Assortment selection screen:To select a specific Assortment, select the Assortment line, and click on the Select button. To select more Assortments, repeatthis step.

To unselect all selected assortments, click on the Deselect aall button.

After having completed the selection, click the Close button to close this screen.

Items

Item code Select a range of item codes to calculate the MRP for the range of items. By default, the All checkbox is selected, whichcalculates MRP for all items. Stock controlled Select either one of the following:


• YesSelect this to calculate the MRP for Stock Controlled Items.

• No Select this to calculate the MRP excluding Stock Controlled Items.

• AllSelect this to calculate the MRP for both Stock Controlled and All items.

Sales

• YesSelect this to calculate the MRP for Sales Item.

• No Select this to calculate the MRP excluding Sales Item.

• AllSelect this to calculate the MRP including both Sales Items and Non-Sales Items.

WarehousesThis enables specific warehouses to be included and excluded when generating MRP.

Include To include a specific warehouse for generating MRP, select the warehouse/s. Clicking on the Select button displays the followingscreen:


CHAPTER 5

Select the specific warehouse and click on the Select button. To select more warehouses for inclusion in the MRP generation,repeat this step.

To unselect all warehouses selected, click on the Deselect aall button.

After having completed selections, click the Close button to close and exit this selection screen.

Exclude To exclude a specific warehouse from generating MRP, select the warehouse. Clicking on the Select button displays thefollowing screen:


Select the specific warehouse to be excluded, and click on the Select button. To select more warehouses to be excluded, repeatthis step.

To unselect all selections, click on the Deselect aall button.

After the selection has been completed, click the Close button to close and exit from this selection screen.

Requirements

Sales ordersSelect one of the following:

• Authorized Select this to calculate MRP deriving from Sales orders that have been Authorized.

• Not Authorized Select this to calculate MRP deriving from Sales orders that are have Not bbeen AAuthorized.

• AllSelect this to calculate MRP deriving from both Authorized and Not AAuthorized SSales orders.

• NoneSelect this for Not generating MRP deriving from Sales orders.


CHAPTER 5

Internal use Select either one of the following according to the production business requirements and procedures:

• Authorized Select this to calculate MRP deriving from Internal use requests that have been Authorized.

• Not authorizedSelect this to calculate MRP deriving from Internal use requests that have Not been Authorized.

• AllSelect this to calculate MRP deriving from both Authorized and Not Authorized Internal use requests.

• NoneSelect this to Not calculate MRP deriving from Internal use requests.

Purchase ordersSelect either one of the following according to the internal work requirements:

• Authorized Select this to calculate MRP deriving from Purchase orders that have been Authorized.

• Not Authorized Select this to calculate MRP deriving from Purchase orders that have Not been Authorized.

• AllSelect this to calculate MRP deriving from both Authorized and Not Authorized Purchase orders.


• NoneSelect this to Not calculate MRP deriving from Purchase orders.

QuotationsSelect either one of the following according to what is intended:

• Authorized Select this to calculate MRP deriving from Quotations that have been Authorized.

• Not Authorized Select this to calculate MRP deriving from Quotations that have Not been Authorized.

• AllSelect this to calculate MRP deriving from both Authorized and Not Authorized Quotations.

• None Select this to Not calculate MRP deriving from Quotations.

Production ordersSelect either one of the following according to the internal business requirements:

• Authorized Select this to calculate MRP deriving from Production orders that have been Authorized.

• Not Authorized Select this to calculate MRP deriving from Production orders that are have Not been Authorized.

• AllSelect this to calculate MRP deriving from both Authorized and Not Authorized Production orders.

• NoneSelect this to Not calculate MRP deriving from Production orders.


CHAPTER 5

Additional criteria

Make / BuySelect either one of the following from the drop-down list:

BuySelect this to calculate MRP for Buy items.

MakeSelect this to calculate MRP for Make items.

MPSSelect a specific Budget Scenario to calculate MRP deriving from a Forecast of the selected Budget Scenario.

Purchase order levelCheck this for consideration of the Purchase order level when calculating MRP. Checking this box will advise the user to eitherpurchase or produce the item, and will state the quantity of PO level if the item is found to have less than minimum stock.

After having madethe relevant selections, click on the Process button. The MRP calculations are generated and theprocessing progress is displayed as shown below:


If the checkbox Exit automatically is selected, the MRP engine progress screen will be exited automatically when the MRPcalculation process has been completed.

If this is unchecked, the MRP calculation process will be displayed as Completed, as shown below:

This screen can be closed and exited by clicking on the Close button.

To save the settings selected in the MRP engine function so that they can be re-used, click on the Save button.

To close and exit from the MRP function, click on the Close button.


CHAPTER 5

7. Replace part items of bill of material

[Manufacturing, Planning, Replace]Changes requested by customers on products manufactured must be carried out according to their wishes, which will affect theBOM structure of an end product. Effects on the BOM structure can involve changes in component parts. Such parts may eithernot be used or may be replaced with different part items. Changes of this kind can be quickly updated in the BOM using theReplace function of E-Manufacturing. By quickly updating changes in the BOM structure, manufacturing the expected productcan then proceed.

The Replace function can easily replace a part item of one or more BOM main items, as discussed in this section. This functioncan also be used to delete part items from one or more BOM main item.


Replacing a Part Item

To replace a part item with another part item in one or more BOM main item, go to menu path [Manufacturing, PPlanning,Replace].

Changing data on this screen:

Item code Select, from the item lookup screen, the Item code that must be replaced, by clicking on the lookup button.

ReplacementIn the Replacement field, select from the item lookup screen the item that it must be replaced by, by clicking on the lookupbutton.

Factor Enter the factor of the part item to be replaced with the new selected item.

BOM

Item group Select the range of Item group of the BOM item to be replaced with the above selected part item.

ItemSelect the BOM item to be replaced with the above selected part item.


CHAPTER 5


Click on the Replace button. The following screen is displayed:-

Here, all BOM main items are displayed that contain the part item that was selected earlier.

The user can select either the preferred BOM main item or all, based on the user's requirements, to replace with thereplacement item.

To select one BOM main item, then click on the preferred BOM line, or to select all BOM main items, click on the Select aallbutton. After selection click the Replace button. The following pop-up screen is displayed:-


CHAPTER 5

Click Yes to confirm the replacement, otherwise click No. If the Yes button is clicked, confirmation of the replacement isdisplayed as in the diagram below:-

The user can choose to print this confirmation for reporting or for referral, by clicking on the Print button. Otherwise click on theClose button to close the screen.


Note:

Delete Part Item

To delete a part item from one or more BOM main item, go to [Manufacturing, PPlanning, RReplace].

Fill in the following field and perform the stated actions:

Item code Select the part item from the Item lookup screen by clicking on the lookup button.


The Deselect aall button can be used to unselect all that have been selected.

The Maintain button can be used to retrieve the Item maintenance card for information.


CHAPTER 5

Click on the Show llist button for results of BOM main items that use the selected part item. See the diagram below:-

A BOM item that uses the selected part item is displayed here. Click on the Replace button and the pop up screen is displayed:-

Click Yes to confirm deletion, otherwise click No. When Yes is clicked, a pop-up screen is displayed to further confirm deletionof the selected part item from the BOM main item. see the diagram below:-


Click OK to confirm deletion, otherwise click Cancel. Clicking the OK button to confirm, a confirmation of the deleted item isdisplayed, see diagram below:-

This confirmation can be printed for reporting or referral by clicking on the Print button. Otherwise, click on the Close button.

Extended scenario’s

CHAPTER 6

680 CHAPTER 6 | EXTENDED SCENARIO’S

CHAPTER 6 | EXTENDED SCENARIO’S 681

CHAPTER 6

1 Production advice1.1 Producing based on stock positions or MRP

2 Generate purchase orders

3 Calculations3.1 Batch update costing calculation by scenario3.2 Calculation by standard costing

3.2.1 Generating production orders upon calculating standard coating

4 Dispatch list

5 Completing production orders

6 Project cards

6. Extended scenario’s


1. Production advice

[Manufacturing, To be processed, Production advice]


CHAPTER 6

Calculation

MRP Select this to calculate Material Requirement Planning.

Stock positionsSelect this to calculate Stock positions.

Selection

Warehouses

To obtain MRP or Stock positions of Items coming from specific warehouse(s) select the specific warehouse and click on theSelect button.

To unselect all selections made, click on the Deselect all button. To close and exit from this screen click the Close button.


Assortments

To obtain MRP or Stock positions of Items belonging to specific Item Assortment, select the Item Assortment and click on theSelect button.

To unselect all selections made, click on the Deselect all button.

To exit and close the Assortment selection screen, click on the Close button.

Item Select a range of Item Codes to obtain MRP or Stock positions for the selected range of Items. By default the All checkbox isselected, which provides an overview for all items.

PlannerSelect the specific Planner Resource ID to obtain MRP or Stock positions of Items that have been planned by the selectedPlanner.


CHAPTER 6

Select Stock positions and the following details are enabled for selection:

FrequencyEnter the frequency, which is the number of days for the repeat cycle for Stock positions calculation. By default 1 day is enteredwhich calculates Stock positions based on one day.


ShortageSelect one of the following to calculate Stock positions based on the relative Shortage quantities:• Zero

Select this to calculate Stock positions based on Zero shortage quantity.

• Purchase order levelSelect this to calculate Stock positions based on Purchase order level quantity.

• Maximum stockSelect this to calculate Stock positions based on Maximum stock quantity.

StockSelect one of the following to obtain Stock positions of Items which have the following Item attributes:• Order controlled

Select this to obtain Stock positions for Order Controlled Items.

• Stock controlled Select this to obtain Stock positions for Stock Controlled Items.

• AllSelect this to obtain Stock positions for both Order Controlled and Stock Controlled Items.

Order Policy Code Check this to calculate Stock positions based on Order Policy Code.


CHAPTER 6

After making a selection, click on the Display button. This displays either the MRP overview or the Stock positions overview,depending on which was selected.

See the MRP overview screen below:


See the Stock positions overview screen below:


CHAPTER 6


Actions such as obtaining order details from the requirements, obtaining the Where used information of an item, obtaining ItemFinancial Card, obtaining the relevant Item Master Card, or Changing the Delivery date of the requirement and Exportingoverview results to MS-Excel can be done using the functional buttons available in the Overview screen.

The availability of functional buttons depends on the overview selected(either MRP or Stock positions) and also on the selectedcell of requirement or item, etc. These functional buttons have the same functionality implemented in the Material RequirementPlanning functionality of the EG2003, a completely integrated software environment.

For information on these functional buttons, refer to the table below:


Refresh This refreshes the overview screen for the latest results.

Details This provides a detailed overview of requirements. For information see sub Section 5.5.1.

Source This enables obtaining overview of requirements sources. For information see sub Section 4.1.3.1

Where UUsed This provides Where used information of Items. For information see sub Section 5.5.2

Card This provides Item's Financial Information. For information see sub Section 5.5.3

Produce This enables the generation of a production order. For information see sub Section 6.1.1.For more information see sub Section 5.5.5

Item This retrieves the selected Item's Master Maintenance Card. For information see Section 3.0 on Item Master Card.

Change This enables the user to directly change the Delivery date without retrieving the requirement order. For informationsee sub Section 5.5.8

Export This allows the obtained overview results to be exported to an MS-Excel spreadsheet. For information see sub Section 5.5.9

Close This enables the user to close and exit the Overview functionality as well as the Production Advice functionality.


1.1 Producing based on stock positions or MRP

Based on the results obtained in either MRP or Stock positions, the user may generate a production order.

The Produce functional button is enabled when there is shortage in stock levels found in the Stock positions overview asshown below:


CHAPTER 6

Clicking on Produce button displays the following production order advice screen:

To generate a production order, select the suggested advice by clicking on the Selected column which will be marked with agreen tick. Enter the Production order quantity being generated at the Advice column.

Click on the Produce button. This generates the production order and is listed in the Created: order screen:


To retrieve the already generated production order, select the production order which is listed in the Created: order screen, andclick on the Open button.

Clicking the Open button retrieves the production order entry shown below:


CHAPTER 6

2. Generate purchase orders

[Manufacturing, To be processed, Generate Purchase orders] selection:


Calculation

MRPSelect this to obtain the MRP overview.

Stock positionsSelect this to obtain the Stock positions.

Selection

Warehouses

To obtain MRP or Stock positions of Items coming from specific warehouse(s) select the specific warehouse and click on theSelect button.

To unselect all selections made, click on Deselect all button. To close and exit from this screen click the Close button.


CHAPTER 6

Assortments

To obtain MRP or Stock positions of Items belonging to specific Item Assortment, select the Item Assortment and click on theSelect button.

To unselect all selections made, click on the Deselect all button.

To exit and close the Assortment selection screen, click on the Close button.

Item Select a range of Item Codes to obtain MRP or Stock positions for the selected range of Items. By default the All checkbox isselected, which provides an overview for all items.

SupplierSelect a range of Supplier Codes to obtain MRP or Stock positions of Items that are purchased from/supplied by the selectedSupplier(s).

Planner Select the specific Planner Resource ID to obtain MRP or Stock positions of Items that have been planned by the selectedPlanner.


Select Stock positions and the following details are enabled for selection:

FrequencyEnter the frequency which is the number of days for the repeat cycle for Stock positions calculation. By default 1 day is enteredwhich calculates Stock positions based on one day.


CHAPTER 6

ShortageSelect one of the following to calculate Stock positions based on the following Shortage quantities.• Zero

Select this to calculate Stock positions based on Zero shortage quantity.

• Purchase order levelSelect this to calculate Stock positions based on Purchase order level quantity.

• Maximum stockSelect this to calculate Stock positions based on Maximum stock quantity.

StockSelect one of the following for obtaining Stock positions of Items which have the following Item attributes:• Order controlled

Select this to obtain Stock positions for Order Controlled Items.

• Stock controlled Select this to obtain Stock positions for Stock Controlled Items.

• AllSelect this to obtain Stock positions for both Order Controlled and Stock Controlled Items.

Order Policy Code Check this to calculate Stock positions based on Order Policy Code.

After making a selection, click on the Display button. This displays either the MRP overview or Stock positions overview basedon what was selected.


See below an example of an MRP overview:


CHAPTER 6

See the example below of the obtained Stock positions overview:



There are functional buttons available in the Overview screens at both MRP and Stock positions. For information on how thesefunctional buttons are executed, refer to the table below:


Refresh This refreshes the overview screen for the latest results.

Details This provides a detailed overview of requirements. For information see sub Section 5.5.1.

Source This enables obtaining overview of requirements sources. For information see sub Section 4.1.3.1

Where UUsed This provides Where used information of Items. For information see sub Section 5.5.2

Card This provides Item's Financial Information. For information see sub Section 5.5.3

PO This enables user to generate purchase order. For information see sub Section 5.5.6

Item This enables retrieval of the Item Master card. For information see Section 3.0.

Order This makes possible retrieving the Order entry screen. For information see sub Section 5.5.7

Change This enables the user to directly change the Delivery date without retrieving the requirement order. For informationsee sub Section 5.5.8

Export This allows the obtained overview results to be exported to an MS-Excel spreadsheet. For information see subSection 5.5.9

Close This enables the user to close and exit the Overview functionality as well as the Production Advice functionality.


CHAPTER 6

3. Calculations

[Manufacturing, To be processed, Calculate]


ClearClicking on this resets and clears all selection on the search & filter criteria.

RowsEnter number of rows of BOM records to be displayed in the overview results. By default value 50 is pre-filled which makesavailable 50 rows for displaying the BOM records.

Warehouse Select specific Warehouse to obtain BOM records that belongs to the selected warehouse.

Filter Clicking on the Filter button expands for more filter criteria. These are discussed as follows:

Assortment

Select specific assortments to obtain BOM records that of the selected assortments.

Status• Active

Select this to obtain BOM records that are Active. Active BOM items can be used in Product Structures, can be sold, can be produced, can be purchased, can be assembled, can be delivered, can be received and transacted.

• BlockedSelect this to obtain BOM records that are Blocked. Blocked BOM items cannot be used in Logistics transactions such as receipt and delivery, but can be used in Product Structures, Stock count and budget lines.

• Discontinued Select this to obtain BOM items that are status Discontinued. Discontinued items cannot be used in purchases but can be used for sales. It also can be used in product structure line, budget line and stock counts.


CHAPTER 6

• FutureSelect this to obtain BOM item that are status Future, Future items states that the item is to be used in the future, whereby the active date is defined in the future date.

• Inactive Select this to obtain BOM item that are status Inactive. Inactive items cannot be used in logistic planning and financialtransactions. Also cannot be used in product structure lines, budget lines but can be used in stock counts.

Type• Standard

Select this to obtain BOM items that are of type Standard. Standard items are physical items. Standard item can be seen and handled. Standard items can be serial items that are serviced, or asset items that are depreciated, or part items thatare purchased or finished items that are sold. An example of Standard item is "Bicycle", which is a finished product, can be serial and also an asset.

• Labor hour Select this to obtain BOM items that are of type Labor hour. Labor hour items are hour items that are executed byresource, the staffs of an organization. An example of Labor hour item executed by resource is "Consultation hours".

• Machine hour Select this to obtain BOM items that are of type Machine hour. Machine hour items are hour item that are executed bythe Machines / Tools. An example of Machine hour item executed by Machines is "Assembly hour".

• Bulk issueSelect this to obtain BOM items that are of type Bulk issue. Bulk issue items are physical items that are purchased or issued in bulk.

• PhantomSelect this to obtain BOM items that of type Phantom. Phantom items are not physical items and it cannot be seen or handled. An example of Phantom item is "Extra Charges" based on conditions upon sales scenario, for instance extra charges for special packaging.


Attributes• Sales

Select this to obtain BOM items that of Attribute Sales. Sales items can be sold and can be delivered to customers.

• StockSelect this to obtain BOM items that of Attribute Stock. Stock items can be kept in Stock in the Warehouse. Stock itemsmust be defined with the specific warehouse, locations, minimum stock level and maximum stock level with its unit ofmeasure.

• Make Select this to obtain BOM items that of Attribute Make. Make items can be used in Product Structures, can be Manufactured / Assembled. This is quoted in the Production order entry.

• BuySelect this to obtain BOM items that of Attribute Buy. Buy items can be purchased and received from suppliers. Buyitems is stated with the relevant Supplier, Purchase order level, default purchase quantity and unit of measure used in purchases.

• PartSelect this to obtain BOM items that of Attribute Part. Part items can be used in Product Structure as part to the main item. Part items are used in Manufacturing / assembly. An example of part item is "Gel saddle".

• Batch Select this to obtain BOM items that of Attribute Batch. Batch items are items that have batch quantity which are received and delivered or produced in Batch. An example of Batch items is "Bolts and nuts".

• SerialSelect this to obtain BOM items that of Attribute Serial. Serial items are items are physical standard items each having unique serial number for specific identification. Receiving or fulfilling serial items must be registered with its serialnumber. An example of Serial item is "Personal Computer" whereby it may be produced in Batch of ten but each having unique serial number.


CHAPTER 6

Filter

Starts with Select this to execute filter and search by the characters that starts with in the filter criteria.

ContainsSelect this to execute filter and search by the characters that contains in the filter criteria.

Item code Enter Item code to obtain its record.

Description Enter Item Description to obtain its record.

Actions using Functional buttons

Based on the obtained records of BOM items, Costing of these items can be calculated using the Batch Update functionalbutton. Calculate functional button will calculate cost price in a BOM according to quantity to be produced in a production order.


Batch uupdates This allows user to Calculate Costing of BOM items based on the specific Scenario configuration.

Calculate This allows user to Calculate Costing of BOM items according to qty to be produced in a production order.

Close This allows user to close and exit the Calculate functionality.


3.1 Batch update costing calculation by scenario

Costing is an important aspect to an organization that can be used in planning and managing the outgoing of cash flow foreffective financing. Costing can be calculated based on various sources of pricing. Nevertheless, standard cost price is assignedfor each items that can be used in calculating costs for an end product, but it is important that accurate costing is obtained bytaking into considerations upon the batch quantity of an end product, purchase order size, taking into calculation of the defaultpurchase order unit, pricing at all items in the levels of Bill of Material, considering the type of pricing such as sales price,purchase price as per main supplier, calculated cost price of bill of material based on standard costs, or even the standard costprice of the parent item. The selection of the specific pricing source is associated with how the organization intends to distributeits costs occurred across its various business units and for obtaining accurate costing value. Taking into considerations of allthese said criteria would take up detailed update of pricing and tedious manual calculations to obtain the intended costing.These can be then eliminated with the use of Batch Update functionality utilizing the configured Scenario for End Product. Thisdocument explains the Batch Update functionality.


CHAPTER 6

The Batch Update functionality is maintained at the E-Calculate application via menu path [Manufacturing, To be Processed,Calculate], as shown in the screen shot example below:-


Clicking on the Batch Update functional button, system displays the following Update: Calculated Cost Price screen:

Calculation

Scenario Select the desired Scenario at this field by clicking on the lookup button. The selected Scenario is then applied to the BatchUpdate for New Costing Calculation.


CHAPTER 6

Range

Item Code & To Select the specific Parent Item code or a range of Parent Item code of Bill of Material to apply the selected scenario on theselected BOM Item. The "All" checkbox is defaulted when no specific Parent Item is selected, thus all items are batch updatedby applying the selected scenario.

Resource Select the Resource whom responsible for the selected Parent Item.

Recipe Version

Main Select this option to batch update only the Main version of bill of material.

AllSelect this option to batch update all version of bill of material.

SelectCheck this to input the desired version of bill of material to be executed for batch update.

ScenarioThe details of the selected scenario are displayed here and these fields in this section are not editable.

Maximum number of levelsDisplays the Maximum number of levels to be batch updated based on what is defined in the selected scenario.

Explode: Stock Controlled This displays the indication if the Batch Update is to be executed by exploding items that are stock controlled.

Round off to: Batch QuantityThis displays the indication if the Batch Update is to be executed by rounding off to the BOM Batch Quantity.


Round off to: Purchase Order This displays the indication if the Batch Update is to be executed by rounding off to the default Purchase Order Quantity of theItem's Main Supplier.

Make / BuyThis displays the indication if the Batch Update is to be executed for the Make Item or Buy Item.

Item price: BuyThis displays the pricing source for Buy Item being Batch Updated.

Item price: Make This displays the pricing source for Make Item being Batch Updated.

Margin This displays the Markup percentage to be increased or decreased on the New Cost Price calculated based on the above criteria.

After selection of the desired Scenario and selection on the desired Parent Item, click on the Show list button.


CHAPTER 6

Clicking on the Show list button, system executes the costing calculation based on the Scenario criteria for theselected items and displays the costing report on the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, as shown in the screen shot example below:

Costing Calculation by Scenario configuration

Data

Item Cost Price Sales Price

BOM Parent - 900 100 1000

Part - 901 1 110

Part - 902 2 200

Part - 903 5 2000


Sub-Assemblies of Item 903

Selected Scenario for Item: 900 are shown below:

After applying the above Scenario Configuration the new costs calculations criteria are as follows:-

Item Attribute = Make & Stock Controlled at all levels of Item: 900.

Batch Quantity = 1

Item Cost Price Sales Price

Sub Assembly - 903 5 2000

Part - 901 1 110

Part - 902 2 200


CHAPTER 6

Margin = 50 %

Maximum levels = All

Item Price: Make = Calculated cost price

New Costs Calculation, taking into considerations the above criteria is as follows:-Parent Item 900 = ((Part Item 901 + 902 + (Sub Assembly Item 903)) + Markup 50% Margin

900 = ((Cost Price 901 + Cost Price 902 ) + (Calculated Cost Price 903 + Cost Price Sub Assembly 903 * 50 %)) + Markup 50% Margin

900 = ((901+902) + ((901+ 902) + (901+902 * 50%))) + Markup 50% Margin

900 = ((1+ 2) + ((1+2) + (1+2) * 50%))) + Markup 50% Margin

900 = (3 + (3 + 1.5)) + Markup 50% Margin

900 = (3 + 4.5) + Markup 50% Margin

900 = (7.5) + Markup 50% Margin

900 = (7.5) + (7.5 + 50%)

900 = 7.5 + 3.75

900 = 11.25

Take note that the 50% Margin is applied in all levels of BOM. Cost Price for each item is calculated based on the consideringthe configured criteria in the selected scenario.


3.2 Calculation by standard costing

The Calculate functional button is maintained in the E-Calculate functionality via menu path [Manufacturing, To be Processed,Calculate] as shown in the screen shot example below:


CHAPTER 6

Based on the obtained records of BOM items select the BOM record that is intended for Standard Cost Calculation.

Next, click on the Calculate button, which then displays the Standard Costing information in the Calculate screen as shown below:

Item code This displays the Item code of BOM item.

QuantityThis displays the BOM item Quantity.


Version This displays the version of the BOM.

Batch quantityThis displays the Batch Quantity of the BOM.

Main versionThis is not editable. This indicates whether the displayed BOM is the Main version.

BOM details

Type This displays the Part Item Type.

Condition This displays the Part item Condition.

Item This displays the Part Item Code.

Description This displays the Part Item Description

QuantityThis displays the Part Item Quantity as per specification in the BOM.

UnitThis displays the Part Item's Unit of Measure.

Cost Price This displays the Part Item Cost Price.


CHAPTER 6

AmountThis displays the Part Item Amount.

CurrencyThis displays the Part Item's Currency.

Costing Details

Sales Price This displays the Sales Price of the BOM.

Total CostsThis displays the Total Costs of the BOM.

MarginThis displays the Profit Margin Amount by computing Sales Price and Total Costs. (Sales Price - Total Costs = Margin)

ItemsThis displays Total Cost Amount of all Standard Items.

MachinesThis displays Total Cost Amount of all Machine Hour Items.

Labor HoursThis displays Total Costs Amount of all Labor Hours.

Extra charge This displays Total Costs Amount of all Extra Charge Items.

By productThis displays Total Costs Amount of all By product Items.


Total CostsThis displays Total Costs Amount of all above items. (Total Costs = Items + Machines + Labor Hours + Extra charge + By product)

Calculating Costs by QuantityTo calculate costs of BOM for the intended Quantity you wish to Manufacture, enter the quantity at the Quantity field and pressthe Tab key.

See screen shot below the costing calculated for the entered quantity of 100:


CHAPTER 6

3.2.1 Generating production orders upon calculating standard costing

Upon calculating costs of BOM, it can be decided whether to Produce such item. If it is decided to proceed with producing such

item, then user can easily generate the production order using the Produce functional button.

Clicking on the Produce button automatically generates the Production order and displays the generated production ordernumber as shown below:

Take note of the generated production order and click on the OK button.

The generated production order can be retrieved via the Production order entries menu path.


4. Dispatch List


CHAPTER 6

[Manufacturing, To be processed, Dispatch list]

General

Warehouses


Display

Precision Enter precision for Dispatch list being printed. After making specifications on the criteria above, click on the Excel button.

Clicking on the Excel button, generates the Dispatch list in the MS-Excel spreadsheet as shown in the screen shotexample below:

The obtained Dispatch list can be printed out from MS-Excel by clicking on the Print button on the toolbar.

To exit and close the Dispatch list functionality, click on the Close button.


CHAPTER 6

5. Completing production orders


Search Clicking on this button executes search based on the last entered search & filter criteria.

ClearClicking on this resets and clears the selection made on search & filter criteria.

Number of rowsThis is the number of rows made available to display the production order records in the overview results.

Filter

Starts withSelect this to execute search based on the characters that starts with in the search criteria.

ContainsSelect this to execute search based on the characters that contain in the search criteria.

Warehouse Select specific warehouse to obtain its production order records.

Start date Select range of Start date to obtain production orders of the selected Start date.

End date Select range of End date to obtain production orders of the selected End date.

Production order Select specific production order number to obtain its record.

Parent projectSelect specific parent project to obtain its records of production orders.


CHAPTER 6

Item Select the Item code to obtain its records of production orders.

Description Enter the Description to obtain records of Production orders that has the entered description.

Sales order Select specific Sales order to obtain its allocated production orders.

Show

Parent projectSelect this to view only parent projects.

AllSelect this to view all production orders.

Show: CompletedCheck this to obtain already completed production orders



Various actions can be done upon obtaining production orders that are to be completed. For information refer to the table below:

6.5.1 Complete Production order

Completing a Production Order can be done when the finished items are received. But when it is selected No to complete theProduction order at the moment of receiving, then the Production Order can be completed manually by clicking on theCompleted Process flow button contained in the Production Order Entry screen. Completing Production order can also be donevia menu path [Manufacturing, To be processed, Complete] using the Complete functional button.


Note This allows retrieving and entering notes in the production order. For information see sub Section 4.8 RelatedCommon Functionalities - 4.8.1 Inserting Notes without retrieving Production order.

Attachment This allows retrieving and inserting attachments to the Production order. For information see sub Section 4.8Related Common Functionalities - 4.8.2 Attaching document without opening Production order Entry.

Sales oorderThis allows retrieving the relevant Sales order entry that are allocated by the Production order. For information onSales order entry, obtain the Logistics Product Manual.

MRP This allows obtaining MRP overview for the selected Production order. For information see sub Section 5.5 MaterialRequirement Planning Overview.

Project This allows retrieving the production order's Project Master Card. For information on Project Master Card, obtain theE-Project Product Manual

Copy This allows copy create production order from existing production order. For information see sub Section 4.1.1 CopyGenerate New from Origin Production order.

Complete This allows Completing the Production order. For information see Section 6.5.1 Complete Production order.

Open This allows retrieving of the Production order Entry. For information on Production order entry see Section 4.1.3Creating New and Opening existing Production order.

Close This allows user to exit and close the Complete functionality.


CHAPTER 6

The Complete functional button at menu path [Manufacturing, To be processed, Complete] is maintained as shown in the screenshot example below:-


To complete a Production Order via the entry screen, retrieve the desired production order via menu path [Manufacturing,Entries, Production Orders]. The Production Order entry screen is displayed, as shown

Notice that all process steps are done. There could be more to just checking the process steps, such as the financial aspect ofa production order such as ensuring its revenue and cost of production are correctly registered. There could also be a need tomake adjustments or quoting more items to the production order. The realizations of labor hours and machine hours must also


CHAPTER 6

be ensured that all consumed hours are correctly registered, which serves the production costs calculation.

After ensuring that there are no more pending issues to the production order, then the Completed process flow button can beclicked.

Upon ensuring that everything is done, the production order completion can also be done via menu path [Manufacturing, To beprocessed, Complete]. The specific production order record displayed in the overview can be selected and the Completefunctional button can be clicked.

Clicking on the Completed process flow button or the Complete functional button displays the following prompts:-

The above shown screen details are described as follows:-

ProjectThis displays the Project Code and Project Description.

Suggest: ReturnsChecking this allows user to register production order returns.

Complete: Suborder Checking this allows user to set Status as "Completed" to suborders if the Production Order consisting sub orders.

Print ReportChecking this allows user to obtain the Production Order Completion Report.

After making the appropriate selections, click on the OK button.

If it is decided not to complete the production order at the moment, then the Cancel button can be clicked.


Clicking on the OK button, performs the selected actions and displays the Production Order Completion Report, asshown in the example below:-

This report can be printed out for hard copy by clicking on the Print icon.


CHAPTER 6

6. Project cards

[Manufacturing, To be processed, Cards]

This function enables the maintenance of project transaction cards. This section will provide a step by step guide on thefollowing:

• Searching for a project card


Enter or select the necessary information in the search fields, as described below.

Warehouse Browse to select a warehouse to obtain all projects belonging to the warehouse.

From date/to/AllEnter or select the start and end date of a project to select a project that starts and end within that range. Check All to select allprojects regardless of any dates.

ProjectEnter Project code here to obtain its project card record.

DescriptionEnter Description to obtain its project card record.

Type Select Internal, Fixed, Time & Material, Training or Production to search for projects with the corresponding type.

• InternalInternal projects are used purely for cost registration. No revenue will be generated for this type of projects. The internalproject serves an internal goal for grouping activities / material usages together. The internal projects act as financial'sub-administrations' to improve financial information. Internal projects can also be linked to sales invoices, which isespecially useful when E-Sales order is not in the license.

• FixedBetween the company and a specific customer, an agreement was made which specifies the deliverables and fixed price. This means the revenue (sales fixed price) generated will never exceed the total amount that has been defined in the sales order. A fixed project is a result of a quotation or sales order. The services (labor hour item) or products (not a 'Make' item) can be selected in the sales order. When the type 'Fixed' is selected, any additional cost incurred on the project cannot be billed to the customers.

• Time & MaterialBetween the company and a specific customer, an agreement was made which specifies the deliverables without a limitation for the price. The total amount that can be invoiced depends upon realized materials and/or time. A Time and


CHAPTER 6

Material project is a result of a quotation or sales order. The services (labor hour item) or products (not a 'Make' item) can be selected in the sales order. When the type 'Time & Material' is selected, any additional cost can be added to the sales order and then be invoiced to the customer.

• TrainingA training project is used when training is conducted, either to customers or employees. The cost incurred for this type of project can be registered as well as the generated revenue. A master training project must be created first (to register the costs of developing the training!), either it is provided for customers or employees. If the training project needs to be invoiced (so when you sell the training after you've developed it) a sales order can be generated. Based on the outputitem of the master training project, a child-training project will be created for this sales order. And this child-training project will be linked to the master-planning project.

• ProductionA production project is the result of a sales order with 'Make' item, or when any production order is created. In this case, the cost and revenue of the production can be traced for a particular production project. Furthermore, the actual quantitythat is produced can be compared with the initial planning. For production projects that are generated from a salesorder, the additional cost can be added to the sales order and then be invoiced to the customer.

StatusSelect Proposed, Active, Completed and Blocked to search for projects with the corresponding status.

• Proposed The status proposed is used in the starting phase of a project. The proposed projects are a result of a sales quotation or might be initiated internally. In this step the project plan is set up together with the project budgets. Billable activitiescannot be registered since there is no actual sales order from the customer for the project. It is possible to link salesorders to 'proposed' projects but when the sales order is approved and confirmed to the customer, the project willautomatically be set to 'active'. It is not possible to link sales invoices to 'proposed' projects.

• ActiveWhen the customer has actually placed the sales order for the project or the project plan is internally accepted and approved, the project becomes active. In the status active, the actual work and activities are executed. All types ofactivities or materials can be registered to the projects in status 'active'.


• CompletedIf the project is finalized, the project will get the status 'Completed'. With this status it is not possible to conduct anyactivities on this project, e.g. processing entries, creating invoices. After completing a project, a project still appears in all relevant overviews.

• BlockedDuring the end phase of a project the project manager and/or financial manager wants to ensure that no new entries are made on the project. This gives them the possibility to finalize the project. Existing entries can be processed, and finalinvoices can be created. It is no longer possible to change the linked sales orders to the project.

Advanced button Click to view advanced search criteria screen. Click again to revert to simple search criteria screen.

Manager Browse to select a project manager to obtain project cards record that are managed by the selected Manager.

Member /AllBrowse to select a project member to obtain project cards which has the selected member. Check All to select all projectsregardless of any project members.

AccountBrowse to select a debtor or creditor account to obtain project cards that belongs to the selected debtor or creditor.

Name Enter Debtor Name or Creditor Name to obtain projects cards belonging to the entered debtor name or creditor name.

Sales order Browse to select a sales order to obtain its projects card record.

Show

ParentSelect to show parent projects only.


CHAPTER 6

AllSelect to show all projects (parents and children).

Exclude: Automatically generated projects (check) Check to exclude automatically generated projects.

Click to view the project transaction card. Once clicked, the Project screen appears.


Enter or select the necessary information for grouping and filtering for the intended results in the project transaction card, asdescribed below.

Date & To / AllEnter or select the start and end date to obtain financial transactions that falls within the selected date range. Select All to viewfinancial transactions in all date range.

Group bySelect either Cost unit, G/L, Debtor, Creditor, Journal, Item, Item group, Resource, VAT code, Period, Date, Week, Month, Quarter,Year or Unprocessed to view by groping the financial transactions by the selected group criteria in the project transaction card.

Click to expand for more selection options. Once expanded, the following fields appear. Click to collapse the searchcriteria.

Transaction Select the following types as discussed:

• AllSelect All to obtain All types of financial transactions.

• Sales invoiceSelect Sales invoice to obtain sales invoice type of financial transactions.

• Sales credit noteSelect Credit note to obtain credit note type of financial transactions.


CHAPTER 6

• Charge (financial)Select Charge (financial) to obtain financial charges type of financial transactions.

• Purchase invoiceSelect Purchase invoice to obtain purchase invoice type of financial transactions.

• Purchase credit noteSelect Purchase credit note to obtain purchase credit note type of financial transactions.

• PaymentSelect Payment to obtain payment type of financial transactions.

• Cash receiptSelect Cash receipt to obtain cash receipt type of financial transactions.

• FulfillmentSelect Fulfillment to obtain Fulfillment type of financial transactions.

• Returns: fulfillmentSelect Returns: fulfillment to obtain Fulfillment Returns type of financial transactions.

• ReceiptsSelect Receipts to obtain Receipts type of financial transactions.

• Returns: receiptsSelect Returns: receipts to obtain Receipts Returns type of financial transactions.

• CountsSelect Counts to obtain Counts type of financial transactions.

• PayrollSelect Payroll to obtain Payroll type of financial transactions.


• RevaluationSelect Revaluation to obtain Revaluation type of financial transactions.

• DisposalSelect Disposal to obtain Disposal type of financial transactions.

• Other Select this to obtain other types of financial transactions.

• Reversal entrySelect this to obtain Reversal type of financial transactions.

Unprocessed Check this to obtain Unprocessed financial transactions.

Include: Children Check this to obtain financial transactions including from children projects.

Reporting date Select either on of the following as discussed:• Date

Select this to display financial transactions by Date.

• Reporting dateSelect this to display financial transactions by Reporting Date.

• PeriodSelect this to displays financial transactions by Period date.

P&L, B/SSelect either P&L, B/S (Both Profit and loss statement and Balance Sheet), P&L (Profit and loss statement only) or B/S (BalanceSheet only) for obtaining financial transactions that belongs to the selected statement /s.


CHAPTER 6

Type The field is automatically entered based on the type of current project. To obtain the intended type of financial transaction,select either one of the type which is Standard, Fiscal, Correction or All.

Enter or select the necessary information for filtering financial transactions in the project financial card, as discussed below:

Click to expand for advanced filter criteria. Once clicked, the following fields appear underneath the icon. Clickagain to collapse the filter criteria.

Filter starts with Select this to search for project financial transactions that starts with the character entered in the filter criterion/criteria.

Filter containsSelect to search for project financial transactions that contains the character entered in the filter criterion/criteria.

Our refEnter the Our reference number which is auto generated internally by the system for each transaction to obtain its financialtransactions.

Your refEnter the creditors' or debtors' reference number which is entered at the financial entry to obtain its financial transactions.

Order Enter the sales order number to obtain its financial transactions.


Payment reference Enter the payment reference number to obtain its financial transactions.

Entry number Enter the entry number to obtain its financial transactions.

Description Enter the financial entry description to obtain its financial transactions.

G/L accountSelect the specific General Ledger account to obtain its financial transactions.

Debtor Select the specific Debtor account number to obtain its financial transactions.

Creditor Select the specific Creditor account number to obtain its financial transactions.

JournalSelect the specific Journal to obtain its financial transactions.

Resource Select the specific resource to obtain financial transactions entered by the resource.

Item Select the specific item to obtain its financial transactions.

Item group Select the specific item group to obtain its financial transactions.

Serial/batch Select the specific serial/batch item to obtain its financial transactions.


CHAPTER 6

Cost center Select the specific cost center to obtain its financial transactions.

Cost unitSelect the specific cost unit to obtain its financial transactions.

Warehouse Select the specific warehouse to obtain its financial transactions.

CurrencySelect specific currency to obtain its financial transactions.

Transaction type Select either one of the transaction type from drop down list which is Items, Direct costs, Labor hours or Machine hours tosearch for the selected type of financial transactions.

Selection code Select specific Selection code to obtain financial transactions entered or generated under the selected selection code. Selectioncode is used for grouping data entered, processed at the back end in the database, whereby selecting the specific selectioncode only retrieves the data that are entered under the selected selection code. Selection code is retrieved for quick retrieval ofdata from the large database.

AmountSelect either one of the following to obtain financial transaction of certain amount:

Equal to Select this to obtain financial transactions with specific amount. This makes available extra field for entry of the specificamount.

Not equal to Select this to obtain financial transactions that are not equal to specific amount specified in the extra field made available.


Less thanSelect this to obtain financial transactions that are less than the specific amount that can be entered in the field made availablewhen this option is selected.

Less than or equal toSelect this to obtain financial transactions that are less than or equal to the specific amount that can be specified in the fieldmade available when this option is selected.

Greater thanSelect this to obtain financial transactions that are greater than the specific amount that can be entered in the field madeavailable.

Greater than or equal toSelect this to obtain financial transactions that are greater than or equal to specific amount that can be entered in the field madeavailable.

Between Select this to obtain financial transactions that are between the specified amounts that can be specified in the two range fieldswhich are made available when this option is selected.

Not betweenSelect this to obtain financial transactions that are not between the specified amounts that can be specified in the two rangefield which are made available when this option is selected.


CHAPTER 6

AllSelect All to obtain all financial transactions irregardless of any amount.

Click to close the Project Financial Card functionality.

Click to obtain the latest results after the last filter selections.

Opening balance This displays the opening balance for the project transaction card.

List boxDisplays the summary of project transaction cards (i.e, G/L, Description, Type, Subtype, Item type, Debit EUR, Credit EUR,Planning) that meets the search criterion/criteria entered or selected.


Financial section

Revenue This displays the actual revenue and planned revenue, which provides comparison to planning and actual of revenue for theproject.

CostsThis displays the actual costs, planned costs and recognized costs, which provides comparisons to planning, actual andrecognition of costs for the project.

WIP This displays the actual work in progress and planned work in progress, which provides comparisons to planning and actual ofwork in progress for the project.

ResultThis displays the Actual Profit and Planned Profit which provides comparisons to the planning and actual of profit or results.

DisplayThis shows the displayed financial transaction's amount debited, credited and balance.

Closing balanceThis displays the Closing balance in the Balance column.

Invoices to be received This displays the Invoices to be received amount debited, credited and balance.

To be invoicedThis displays the To be invoiced amount debited, credited and balance.


CHAPTER 6

Functional icons:

Click to export the details of project financial transactions to the MS-Excel spreadsheet.

Click to retrieve the corresponding project master card.

Click to close the Project screen.

Viewing the graph of a project

From the list-box in [Projects, Projects, Cards], highlight a project.

Click . The Excel: Graph screen appears.

Group bySelect Cost center, Resource or Warehouse to group the project respectively.

Scale Select Monthly, Quarterly or Yearly to scale the project respectively.


Date from/to/AllEnter or select the start and end date during which the project will be portrayed. Select All to portray all project regardless of date.

Click to start generating

Click to close the Excel: Graph screen.

Upon clicking , the Excel: Graph progress screen appears.

Once completed, the graph will be displayed in a excel spreadsheet. Save the changes if necessary.

CHAPTER 7

Reports and Statistics

748 CHAPTER 7 | REPORTS AND STATISTICS

Triggering the Production orders report functionality, displays the following search and filter screen :

The user must make selections on the search & filter options to obtain the desired overview.

CHAPTER 7 | REPORTS AND STATISTICS 749

7. Reports and Statistics

Reports and statistics are important in the business environment. They bring about a higher level overview and information tothe managers by giving them the current status of business processes executed in the organization. Not only do reports andstatistics provide higher level information, but the information obtained can also be used for decision making and strategicplanning.

1. Reports

1.1 Production orders

CHAPTER 7

Overview This report provides an overview of all production orders.

Menu path [Manufacturing, RReports, PProduction oorders]

Used by Production Control Managers, Production Planning Managers.


General

WarehousesClicking on the Warehouses button displays the following warehouse selection screen:

Select the Warehouse record and click on the Select button. The selected warehouse is shown with the green tick in the Selectcolumn.

To unselect all selections, click on the Deselect aall button. Click on the Close button to close the warehouses selection screen.

Parent projectSelect range of parent projects to obtain an overview of the production orders of the selected parent project. By default the Allcheckbox is selected, which displays all production orders regardless of parent project.

Production order Select a range of production orders to obtain their overview. By default the All checkbox is selected which displays allproduction orders.

StatusSelect among the following statuses to obtain production orders of a selected status:


OpenThe Open status indicates that a production order has been entered.

AuthorizedThe Authorized status indicates that a production order has been Authorized.

Rejected The Rejected status indicates that a production order was rejected.

Released The Released status indicates that a production order has been released.

Printed The Printed status indicates that an order has been printed for production order instructions.

CompletedThe Complete status indicates that a production order has been completed.

Start date Select a range of Start dates to obtain production orders that start within the selected range of start dates.

Display

PrecisionEnter the precision number of days to obtain the intended production orders.

CHAPTER 7


Advanced Selection options

Click on the Advanced button for advanced selection options as shown below:


Advanced / Simple buttonThe Advanced button is a toggle button which toggles to the Simple button for reverting selection options to simple.

The following explains the advanced selection options:

Header

Cost center Select a range of Cost centers to obtain production orders belonging to the selected cost center (s).

ResourceSelect a specific range of Resources to obtain production orders entered by the selected resource (s).

Debtor Select a specific debtor or range of debtors to obtain production orders derived/demanded by the selected debtor(s).

Including ChildrenCheck this to obtain child production orders.

End date Select a range of end dates to obtain production orders that end within the selected range of end dates.

Make itemSelect a specific Make item or range of make items to obtain production orders that are quoted with the selected make item (s).

Item groupSelect a specific Item group to obtain production orders that are quoted with items from the selected range of item groups.

Routing Select specific routings to obtain production orders that use the selected routing(s).

CHAPTER 7


AssortmentClicking on the Assortment button displays the Assortment selection screen:

Select the Assortment record and click on the Select button. The selected Assortment is then shown with a green tick in theSelect column.

To unselect all selections, click on the Deselect aall button. To close the Assortment selection screen click on the Close button.

Selection code Clicking on the Selection code button displays the Selection code selection screen as shown below:

Select the Selection code record and click on the Select button. Theselected Selection code record is shown with a green tick in the Selectcolumn.

To unselect all selections, click on the Deselect aall button. To close thisselection screen click the Close button.


Lines

Item code Select a specific Item code or range of Item codes to obtain production orders that are quoted with the selected part items. Bydefault the All checkbox is selected which displays all production orders regardless of part Item.

WarehousesClicking on the Warehouses button displays the Warehouses selection screen. This is similar to the steps described earlier forWarehouses selection. Selecting a specific warehouse displays production orders with part items belonging to the selectedwarehouse(s).

Start dateSelect range of Start dates to obtain production orders with part items within the selected range of start dates. By default, theAll checkbox is selected which displays all production orders regardless of start date.

End dateSelect a range of End dates to obtain production orders with part items within the selected range of end dates. By default, theAll checkbox is selected which displays all production orders regardless of end date.

Work centerSelect a range of work centers to obtain production orders that belong to the selected work center. By default, the All checkboxis selected which displays all production orders regardless of work center.

Type Check the relevant types to obtain production orders that are quoted with the selected type of part items.• Standard

Standard is an Item type that states that the item is a standard item that represents physical goods or service. Standarditems can be purchased, sold or used for service depending on its defined attributes.

• Labor hour

• Machine hourMachine hour is an item type which represents a unit of time for a production tool with an asset and a cost price attached.

CHAPTER 7


• Phantom Phantom is an item type that is used for registering a logical group of items, activities or costs. A number of PhantomItems are predefined. These are related to Payment Conditions and Shipping Methods.

• Bulk IssueWhen the item is part of a Product structure, the bulk issue type determines how the cost price of this item will influencethe cost price of the main item during assembly or production. An item of the type "bulk issue" can only be used inproduct structures.

Planner Select the Planner to obtain production orders that are planned by the selected Planner. After Selections are made, click on the Display button. This displays the production order overview as shown below:


Overview details

Parent projectThis displays the Parent Project code, if there is any, for the Production order.

Production ordersThis displays the Production order number.

Item codeThis displays the Item code of the Main Item/Parent Item (Finished Product).

Item description This displays the Item description of the Main item/Parent item.

Planning QuantityThis displays the Planned Quantity of the Production order.

Actual QuantityThis displays the Actual Quantity receipt for the Production order.

UnitThis displays the Unit of Measure for the Parent Item/Main Item of the Production order.

Planning Costs (EUR)This displays the Planned Costs for the Production order.

Actual Costs (EUR)This displays the Actual costs realized/issued for the Production order.

Routing This displays the Routing used in the Production order.

Selection code This displays the Selection code used in the entry of the Production order.

CHAPTER 7


Warehouse This displays the Warehouse code of the Parent item in the Production order.

Cost center This displays the Cost center of the Production order.

Resource This displays the Resource who entered the Production order.

StatusThis displays the Production order Status.

Start dateThis displays the Production order Start date.

End dateThis displays the Production order End date.

AttachmentA green tick next to Attachment will indicate if the production order has a document attached.

NoteA green tick next to Note will indicate if the production order has notes inserted.

OverdueThis displays the number of days overdue for production order completion.

Ordered A green tick will indicate if a production order was entered, and the date it was ordered will be indicated.

AuthorizedA green tick will indicate if a production order was authorized, and the date it was authorized will be indicated.

Released A green tick will indicate if a production order was released, and the date it was released will be indicated.

Printed A green tick will indicate if a production order was printed and the date it was printed will be indicated.


Overall Overview SummaryBudgeted This displays the Total Planned Quantity of Parent Items for all the displayedproduction orders.

ActualThis displays the Total Actual Quantity receipt of Parent Item for all the displayedproduction orders.

Budgeted This displays the Total Planned Costs for all the displayed production orders.

ActualThis displays the Total Actual Costs for all the displayed production orders.

Process Flow indication

CHAPTER 7


Issued A green tick will indicate if a production order was issued, and the date it was issued will be indicated.

Received A green tick will indicate if a production order was received, and the date it was received will be indicated.

CompletedA green tick and the date as of when the production order was Completed.

Actions within obtained Production orders Overview


ExpandThis allows the user to obtain an expanded overview of production orders. For information see Section 1.1.1: Expandingproduction orders overview.

ExportThis allows the user to export the displayed production orders overview to MS-Excel spreadsheet. For information seeSection 1.1.2: Exporting overview information to MS-Excel spreadsheet.

Zoom This allows the user to obtain details by zooming in the overview of production orders. For information see Section1.1.3: Zoom in production order for detailed overview.

Note This allows the user to view the existing notes in the production order. For information see Section 1.1.4: Obtainingview of production order note.

AttachmentThis allows the user to view existing documents attached in the production orders. For information see Section 1.1.5:Obtaining view of production order attachment.

ProjectThis allows the user to obtain the Project Master Card. For information on Project Master Card, obtain the E-ProjectProduct Manual.

Our rref.This allows the user to obtain Financial transactions of the displayed production order. For information see Section1.1.6: Obtaining overview of production order's financial transactions.

Production This allows the user to retrieve the Production order entry. For information on Production order entry see Section 4.

Close This allows the user to exit and close the production order overview functionality.

The obtained overview can be reverted back to the overall overview obtained earlier by clicking on the Back button.


1.1.1 Expanding Production order overview

Upon obtaining the production order overview, each production order can be expanded for detailed overview by Costs Type.

Select the production order record and click on the Expand button.

This displays the detailed overview grouping items information by Costs Type as shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 7


1.1.2 Exporting overview information to MS-Excel spreadsheet

Upon obtaining the overview click on the Export button.

This exports all displayed overview information to the MS-Excel spreadsheet as shown in the example below:

The obtained detailed overview can be reverted to the previous production orders overview by clicking on the Back button.


1.1.3 Zoom in production order for Detailed Overview

Upon obtaining the production order overview, each record of production order can be zoomed in for a detailed overview.

Select a production order record and click on the Zoom button.

This displays the detailed overview of the production order as shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 7


1.1.4 Obtaining view of production order note

After obtaining a production order overview, notes of the production order can be viewed by using the Note button.

Selecting the displayed production order record and clicking on the Note button retrieves the notes of the production order asshown in the example below:


1.1.5 Obtaining view of production order attachment

Upon obtaining a production order overview, a document which is attached to the production order can be viewed by clickingon the Attachment button.

Selecting the displayed production order record and clicking on the Attachment button, retrieves the attached documentautomatically as shown in the example below:

CHAPTER 7


1.1.6 Obtaining overview of production order's financial transactions

After obtaining the overview of production orders, an overview of financial transactions can be obtained for each productionorder using the Our RRef. functional button.

Selecting the displayed production order record and clicking on the Our rref. button displays the financial transactions as shownin the example below:

By triggering the above menu of Actuals report functionality, the filter and search screen is displayed as shown below:

The above are the simple filter options for the user to make selections for obtaining the intended overview results.


1.2 Actuals

CHAPTER 7

Overview This report provides an overview of production orders actual costs.

Menu path [Manufacturing, RReports, AActuals]

Used by Production Manager, Purchasing Manager, Planning Manager


General

WarehousesThis allows the user to select specific warehouses to obtain an overview of production orders actuals belonging to the selectedwarehouses.

Clicking on the Warehouses button displays the warehouses selection screen as shown below:

Select the warehouse record and click on the Select button. The selected warehouse record is then shown with a green tick inthe Select column.

To unselect all warehouses selections, click on the Deselect aall button. To exit from the warehouses selection screen click onthe Close button.

Parent projectSelect the range of parent projects to obtain production order's actuals of the selected parent project/. By default, the Allcheckbox is selected which displays all parent projects' actuals.


Production order Select the range of production orders to obtain the selected production orders actuals. By default, the All checkbox is selectedwhich displays all production order's actuals.

StatusSelect the following status to obtain production orders of the selected status(es).• Open

This is the Open status of a production order after it has been entered.

• AuthorizedThis is the Authorized status of production order after it is has been Authorized.

• Rejected This is the production order which has been rejected.

• Released This is the production order which has been released.

• Printed This is the production order which has been printed for production order instructions.

• CompletedThis is the production order which has been completed.

Start date Select a range of Start dates to obtain production orders actuals of a selected start date. By default, the All checkbox is selectedwhich displays production orders actuals of all start dates.

End dateSelect a range of End dates to obtain production orders actuals of the selected end date. By default, the All checkbox is selectedwhich displays production orders actuals of all end dates.

CHAPTER 7


Display

PrecisionEnter the number of days to precisely obtain the production orders actuals.


Click on the Advanced button for Advanced selection options as shown below:


Header

Cost centersSelect a range of cost centers to obtain production orders actuals belonging to the selected cost centers. By default, the Allcheckbox is selected which displays production orders of all cost centers.

Resource Select a range of resources to obtain production orders that are entered by the selected resource. By default, the All checkboxis selected which displays production orders entered by all resources.

Debtor Select a range of debtors to obtain production orders that derived from the selected debtors. By default, the All checkbox isselected which displays production orders regardless of debtor.

Including ChildrenCheck this to obtain production order actuals including child production orders.

Make item Select a range of Make items to obtain production orders actuals that are quoted with the selected Make items. By default, theAll checkbox is selected which displays production order regardless of Make item.

Item StatusSelect among the following Item Statuses to obtain production orders that are quoted with Items of the selected Status.• Active

Active items can be sold, purchased, delivered, received, and manufactured/assembled.

• Blocked Blocked items cannot be used in any logistics planning and financial transactions but can be used in product structureline, budget line and stock counts.

• Discontinued Discontinued items cannot be used in purchases but can be used for sales. They can also be used in product structureline, budget line and stock counts.

CHAPTER 7


• FutureItems with a future status will be used in the future, and the active date is defined as a future date.

• Inactive Inactive items cannot be used in logistics planning and financial transactions. They also cannot be used in productstructure lines or budget lines but can be used in stock counts.

Item group Select specific Item group or a range of Item groups to obtain production orders actuals that are quoted with items of theselected Item group. By default, the All checkbox is selected which displays production orders regardless of Item group.

RoutingSelect specific routing or a range of routings to obtain production orders that use the selected routings. By default, the Allcheckbox is selected which displays production orders regardless of routing.

AssortmentSelect specific Item assortment to obtain production orders actuals that has the items quoted with selected Item assortments.

Clicking on the Assortment button displays the Assortment selection screen as shown below:

Select the Selection code record and click on the Selectbutton. The selected selection code record is shown with agreen tick in the Select column.

To unselect all selections, click on the Deselect aall button. Toclose the selection code selection screen click on the Closebutton.

The selection code is shown in use when there are one ormore selection codes selected for use, as shown below:


Select the Assortment record and click on the Select button. The selected Assortment record is shown with the green tick in theSelect column.

To unselect all selections click on the Deselect aall button. Click on the Close button to close the Assortment selection screen.

When one or more Assortments are selected, then it is shown that the Assortments selection is in Use, as shown below:

Selection codeSelect a specific selection code to obtain production order actuals that are of the selected Selection code.

Clicking on the Selection ccode button displays the code selection screen as shown below:

CHAPTER 7


Lines

Work centerSelect a specific work center or a range of work centers to obtain production orders belonging to the selected cost center. Bydefault, the All checkbox is selected, which displays production orders regardless of work center.

Type Check the relevant types to obtain production orders that are quoted with the selected type of part items.• Standard

This indicates that an Item is a standard type of physical goods or service. Standard items can be purchased, sold or usedfor service depending on their defined attributes.

• Labor hourThis indicates that an item is a labor hour item type which is performed by employees (resources). An example of laborhour is "Consultation hours".

• Machine hourAn item of the Machine Hour type represents a unit of time for a production tool with an asset and a cost price attached.

• Phantom An item of the Phantom type is used for registering a logical group of Items, activities or costs. A number of PhantomItems are predefined. They are related to Payment Conditions and Shipping Methods.



Show

QuantitySelect this to display the Quantity column in the results overview screen.

Production costsSelect this to display the Production costs column in the results overview screen.

Production revenueSelect this to display the Production revenue column in the results overview screen.

ResultSelect this to display the Result column in the results overview screen.

Sales revenueSelect this to display the Sales revenue column in the results overview screen.

CHAPTER 7


RoutingSelect this to display the Routing column in the results overview screen.

After making the required selections, click on the Display button.

This displays the Overview results as shown below:


Details of the overview results are as follows:

Display columns

Parent projectThis displays the Parent project.


Item This displays the Production order's Item code.

Item descriptionThis displays the Item description.

RoutingThis displays the Routing code used in the Production order.

Planning QuantityThis displays the Production order's Planned Quantity.

Actual QuantityThis displays the Production order's Actual Quantity Received.

UnitThis displays the Unit of Measure of the Main item in the Production order.

Planning Total CostsThis displays the Production order's Planned Total Costs.

Actual Total CostsThis displays the Production order's Actual Total Costs.

CHAPTER 7


Planning Production order RevenueThis displays the Production order's Planned Revenue.

Actual Production order RevenueThis displays the Production order's Actual Revenue.

Production order ResultThis displays the Production order's Result which is automatically computed based on the Formula: Production order Result =Actual Production order Revenue - Actual Total Costs.

Production orders Margin %This displays the Production order Margin Percentage which is automatically computed based on the Formula: Productionorders Margin % = (Production order Result / Actual Production order Revenue) * 100.

Planning Sales RevenuesThis displays the Planned Sales Revenues for the Production order.

Actual Sales RevenuesThis displays the Actual Sales Revenues for the Production order.

Sales ResultThis displays the Sales Result for the Production order.

Sales Margin % This displays the Sales Margin % for the Production order.

Selection code This displays the Selection code used for the Production order.

Warehouse This displays the Warehouse code that receives the Production order.

Costs (Production) This displays the Total Costs of Production orders that are displayed in theOverview results.

Revenue (Production)This displays the Total Revenue of Production orders that are displayed in theoverview results.

Production ResultThis displays the Total Result of Production orders that are displayed in the overview results.

Revenue (Sales)This displays the Total Sales Revenue of Production orders that are displayed in the overview results.

Sales ResultThis displays the Total Sales Result of Production orders that are displayed in the overview results.


Cost centerThis displays the Cost center code that the Production order belongs to.

Resource This displays the Resource Name of who entered the Production order.

OverdueThis displays the Number of Days overdue to complete the production order.

AttachmentThis indicates if the production order has documents attached.

Note This indicates if the production order contains notes.

Overview Summary

CHAPTER 7



Some actions can be done using the functional buttons after obtaining the overview results.


Export This allows exporting the overview results to MS-Excel spreadsheet.

Zoom This allows zooming in the result of production order for detailed overview.

Note This allows obtaining view of the notes in the production order.

Attachment This allows viewing the documents attached in the production order.

ProjectThis allows retrieval of the Project Master card for the respective production order. For information on the Project MasterCard, obtain the E-Project Product Manual.

Our rref. This enables retrieval of the Financial Transaction Entries for the respective production order.

Sales oorder This enables retrieval of the Sales order for the respective production order. For information on Sales order entry, obtainthe Logistics Product Manual.

Production This enables retrieval of Production order entry. For information on Production order entry, see Section 4.0

Close This enables the user to close and exit the Overview results screen.



Upon obtaining the overview results for production order actuals, the Export functional button can be used to export theoverview results to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

Clicking on the Export button directs the system to export the overview results to the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet,as shown below:

CHAPTER 7


1.2.2 Zoom in for detailed overview of production order actuals

Upon obtaining the overall overview of production order actuals, the Zoom functional button can be used for obtaining adetailed overview.

Selecting the specific production order actuals record and clicking on the Zoom button displays the detailedoverview as shown below:


Details displayed in the zoom in overview are as follows:

Parent projectThis displays the Parent Project code of the displayed Production order.


Item code This displays the Item code of the Production order.

DescriptionThis displays Item Description.

Routing This displays the Routing code used for the part item in the Production order.

Work centerThis displays the Work center code used for the Part Item in the Production order.

Printed This indicates whether instructions for the part item have been printed. This is indicated with a green tick.

By ProductThis indicates whether the part item is a by-product item. This is indicated with a green tick.

Planning QuantityThis displays the Planned Quantity of the Part item in the Production order.

Actual QuantityThis displays the Actual Quantity of the Part item in the Production order.

UnitThis displays the Unit of Measure for the Part item in the Production order.

CHAPTER 7


Planning CostsThis displays the Planned Costs of the Part item in the Production order.

Actual CostsThis displays the Actual Costs of the Part item in the Production order.

Type This displays the Part item Type.

Warehouse This displays the Warehouse code for the Part item in the Production order.

Cost centerThis displays the Cost center for the Part item in the Production order.

Resource This displays the Resource Name who is responsible for picking the part item.

Overview SummaryBudget CostsThis displays the Budgeted Costs for all the displayed part items zoomed inthe production order.

Actual costsThis displays the Actual Costs for all the displayed part items zoomed in theproduction order.

Budget AmountThis displays the Budgeted Amount for all the displayed part items zoomed in the production order.

Actual AmountThis displays the Actual Amount for all the displayed part items zoomed in the production order.

To return to the overall overview previously displayed, click on the Back button.


1.2.3 Obtaining view of Note in the Production order

Upon obtaining an overview of the Production order Actuals, the notes in the production order that were entered at the time ofproduction order entry can be retrieved for view only by using the Note function button.

Selecting the production order actual record and clicking on the Note button, prompts the system to display theNotes screen (not editable) as shown below::

CHAPTER 7


1.2.4 Obtaining View of Document Attached in the Production order

Upon obtaining an overview of overall production order actuals, the documents attached at the time of entry in the productionorder can now be retrieved using the Attachment button.

Selecting the production order record and clicking on the Attachment button, retrieves the attached documents inits document editor application.

See below an attached document retrieved in its editor/browser application:



Upon obtaining the overview of overall production order actuals, the financial transaction entries done at the time of Issue andReceipt can be viewed by using the Our Ref. button.

Select the production order record and click on the Our RRef. button. This displays the financial transaction entriesas shown below:

CHAPTER 7

Overview This report provides an overview to provide information about the components or material (excluding make items) usedin production order and their budgeted quantity, actual quantity, budgeted cost and actual costs of each items.

Menu ppath [Manufacturing, RReports, AAllocation]

Used bby Production Manager, Purchasing Manager, Planning Manager


1.3 Allocation

By triggering the above menu of the Allocation report functionality, the filter and search screen is displayed as shown below:

The above shown are the simple filter options for the user to make selections for obtaining the intended overview results.

CHAPTER 7


General

WarehousesThis allows the selection of specific warehouses to obtain an overview of production orders which belongs to the selectedwarehouses.

End dateSelect a range of end dates to obtain production orders whose end dates falls in this particular period of time. By default, theALL checkbox is selected which displays production orders of all end dates.

StatusSelect the following option to obtain production orders with the selected statuses below:• Open

This is the Open status of production order after it has been entered and no action has taken place.

• AuthorizedThis is a production order which has been authorized.

• Rejected This is a production order which has been rejected.

• Released This is a production order which has been released.

• Printed This is a production order which has been printed for production order instructions.

• CompletedThis is a production order which has been completed.


Display

PrecisionEnter number of decimal points for production order quantity column to be displayed in this overview.

Advanced Filter optionsFor advanced search & filter options, click on the Advanced button. This display the advanced filter options asshown below:

CHAPTER 7


Parent projectSelect the specific parent project to obtain production orders of the selected parent project. By default it is empty and displaysproduction orders for all parent projects.

Production order Select the specific production order to obtain the selected production orders. By default it is empty and displays all productionorders.

Start date Select a range of start dates to obtain production orders whose start dates fall in this particular period of time. By default, theAll checkbox is selected which displays production orders of all start dates.

RoutingSelect a range of routings to obtain production orders that use the selected routings. By default, the All checkbox is selectedand the system displays production orders regardless of routing.

Work centerSelect a range of work centers to obtain production orders belonging to the selected work center. By default, the All checkboxis selected and production orders are displayed regardless of work center.

Item

ItemSelect a range of items whose production orders are quoted with the selected items. By default, the All checkbox is selectedand displays production order regardless of item.

Item groupSelect a range of item groups to obtain production orders that are quoted with items of the selected item group. By default, theAll checkbox is selected which displays production orders regardless of item group.


Item StatusSelect the among following Item Statuses to obtain production orders that are quoted with Items of the selected Status.

• Active Active items can be sold, purchased, delivered, received, and manufactured/assembled.

• Blocked Blocked items cannot be used in any logistics planning or financial transactions but can be used in product structure line,budget line and stock counts.

• Discontinued Discontinued items cannot be used in purchases but can be used for sales. They can also be used in product structureline, budget line and stock counts.

• FutureItems with a future status are items to be used in the future, whereby the active date is defined in the future.

• Inactive Inactive items cannot be used in logistics planning and financial transactions. They also cannot be used in productstructure lines or budget lines but can be used in stock counts.

CHAPTER 7


After making the selections on the search and filter, click on Display button.

This displays the production order allocation overview as shown below:



Display columns:

Production order This displays the Production order number.

Item codeThis displays the component or material used in the production order.

DescriptionThis displays production order header description.

DescriptionThis displays the item description.

RoutingThis displays the routing code used in the production order.

Work centerThis displays the work center used in the production order.

PrintedThe check box is ticked if the production order instructions have been printed.

End dateThis displays the end date of the production order.

PlannedThis displays production orders planned materials quantity issued.

ActualThis displays production orders actual materials quantity issued.

CHAPTER 7


Planned (EUR)This displays the Production order's planned cost of materials in the default currency.

Actual (EUR)This displays the Production order's actual cost of materials in the default currency.

Overview Summary

ItemThis displays the actual total costs of items for theproduction orders that are displayed in the Overviewresult.

Machine hoursThis displays the actual total costs of machine hours for the production orders that are displayed in the Overview result.

Labor hoursThis displays the actual total costs of labor hours for the production orders that are displayed in the Overview result.

Extra chargesThis displays the actual total costs of extra charges for the production orders that are displayed in the Overview result.

TotalThis displays the summary of all the actual total costs for the production orders that are displayed in the Overview result.


Budgeted (Items)This displays the total planned quantity issued including items, machine hours, labor hours and extra charges for theproduction orders that are displayed in the Overview result.

Actual (Items)This displays the total actual quantity issued including items, machine hours, labor hours and extra charges for the productionorders that are displayed in the Overview result.

Budgeted (EUR)This displays the total planned cost in the default currency including items, machine hours, labor hours and extra charges forthe production orders that are displayed in the Overview result.

Actual (EUR)This displays the total actual cost in the default currency including items, machine hours, labor hours and extra charges for theproduction orders that are displayed in the Overview result.



Export This allows the exporting the overview results to MS-Excel spreadsheet.

ProjectThis allows the retrieval of the Project Master card for the respective production order. For information on the ProjectMaster Card, obtain the E-Project Product Manual.

Our rref. This enables the retrieval of the Financial Transaction Entries for the respective production order.

Production This enables the retrieval of Production order entry. For information on Production order entry, see Section 4.0

Close This enables the user to close and exit the Overview results screen.

CHAPTER 7



Upon obtaining the overview results for production order allocation, the Export functional button can be used to export theoverview results to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

Clicking on the Export button, system exports the overview results to the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, as shown below:



Upon obtaining the overview of overall production order allocation, the financial transaction entries that were entered at thetime of issuing can be viewed by using the Our Ref. button.

Select the production order record and click on the Our RRef. button. This displays the financial transaction entries asshown below:

CHAPTER 7


1.4 Pegging

By triggering the above menu of the Pegging report functionality, the filter and search screen is displayed as shown below:

Overview This report provides an overview of customs scenarios advice which are generated from MRP engine. It serves as a MRPrequirement viewer for all the requirements selected from MRP engine and provides advice such as the number ofquantity needed in a time of period either in single or full level pegging overview.

Menu path [Manufacturing, RReports, PPegging]



The above shown are the filter options for user to make selections for obtaining the intended overview results.

Filter

WarehousesThis allows selection of specific warehouses to obtain an overview of production orders pegging belonging to the selectedwarehouses.




When one ore more warehouses are selected, it will show the warehouses selections in use, as shown below:

CHAPTER 7


AssortmentSelect a specific Item assortment to obtain pegging that has the item quoted with the selected Item assortments.


Select the Assortment record and click on the Select button. The selected Assortment record is shown with the green tick in theSelect column.

To unselect all selections, click on the Deselect aall button. Click on the Close button to close the Assortment selection screen.

When one ore more Assortments are selected, it will show the Assortments selections in use, as shown below:


ItemThis is to select a range of items for obtaining advice from the pegging overview. By default, the All checkbox is selected todisplay all items.

RequiredThis is to select a range of required dates for items selected. By default, the All checkbox is selected which displays the peggingoverview of all dates.

PlannerThis is to select a planner for obtaining advice from the pegging overview. By default, the All checkbox is selected to display allitems.

Make/buy• Make

This is to select items which have a make attribute checked in maintain item and is used to create a production order.

• BuyThis is to select items which have a buy attribute checked in maintain item and is used to create a purchase order.

• AllThis is to select the option for both make and buy items.

Stock controlled• Order controlled

This is to select make to order items. This has the attribute Stock controlled unchecked in maintain item.

• Stock controlledThis is to select make to stock items. This has the attribute Stock controlled checked in maintain item.

• AllThis is to select both order and stock controlled items.

CHAPTER 7


Option

Based on MRPSelecting this option will retrieve the advice from MRP custom scenario, more specifically called the MRP engine. Unselect thisoption to display the standard material requirement available in purchase and production order.

Show Serial/batchThis is to show the serial or batch number in the overview result. It is only enabled if the option "Based on MRP" is off.

Output• Single level

Select this option to display materials required by the end product one level up.

• Full levelSelect this option to display materials required for the top level of the end product.

PrecisionEnter number of decimal points to be displayed in the production order quantity column field which is to be displayed in thepegging overview.


Obtaining pegging overview in standard screen



Details of the overview results are as follows:

ItemThis displays the Production order's item code and item description.

QuantityThis displays the total quantity required based on the selection in the pegging overview including batch size and purchase size.

UnitThis displays the sales unit of item.

CHAPTER 7


RequirementIf the option "Based on MRP" is selected, appropriate advice will be given for the action taken and information like "Purchaseadvice" and "Production advice" are shown.

If the option "Based on MRP" is unselected, this displays the actual orders placed in the type of order and the information like"Purchase order" and "Production order' are shown.

NumberThis displays the advice of purchase/production order number; if advices are in an unprocessed status then it will display adash.

After obtaining the overall overview of pegging, the Full llevel or Single llevel functional button can beused for obtaining a detailed overview. The button shown in this screen is dependent on the option on Output selection ofthe pegging overview.


Columns explanation:

ItemThis displays the item code with description

RequiredThis displays the item required date including all the factors like supplier delivery time and production lead time

QuantityThis displays the quantity for the requirement including all factors like batch size and purchase size

UnitThis displays sales unit of item

RequirementsThis displays whether the required action is to purchase or produce

NumberThis displays the processed advice purchase/production order number. If the advice is in an unprocessed status then it willdisplay a dash.

Source: RequirementsThis displays the original transaction that required the materials. They can be from a sales order, production order or internaluse. If there are batch size or purchase size balances encountered, the text "Batch size routing" is displayed in this column.

NumberThis displays original "Source: Requirements" number

End productThis displays the end product depending on the pegging output level selection

CHAPTER 7


QuantityThis displays the quantity of the end product in "Source: Requirements"

UnitThis displays sales unit of the end product

End dateThis displays the end date of the material required

In the details pegging overview, the Requirements button is used to display selected lines in the original transactionlike sales order, production order or internal use. The Zoom button has a similar function to the Requirement button. Itis enabled if the option "Based on MRP" is unselected. To exit the detail overview of pegging, click on Close and backto main pegging overview.


1.4.1 Obtaining pegging overview results in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet

After making the required selections, pegging overview can be exported to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet using the Excel functional button. Click on this button and the overview result is shown as below:

CHAPTER 7


1.5 BOM

Triggering the above menu path displays the following search screen:

Details of search & filter fields are as follows:

General

Item code Select a specific range of Make item codes to obtain their overview of Bill of Material. By default, the All checkbox is selectedwhich displays Bill of Material report on all items.

Overview This provides overview report on the Bill of Material in the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

Menu path [Manufacturing, RReports, BBOM]

Used by Production Designer, Sales Manager, Purchasing Manager, Production Manager.


Recipe versions

Main Select this to obtain a Bill of Material overview for only Main version.

AllSelect this to obtain a Bill of Material overview for All versions.

SelectSelect this to obtain a Bill of Material overview for specific version. Selecting this enables an addition field for entry of theversion number. Enter the preferred version number.

AssortmentsSelect specific Assortments to obtain a Bill of Material overview for Items of the selected Item Assortments.

Clicking on the Assortment button

CHAPTER 7


Select a specific Assortment and click oon the Select button. The selected assortment record is shown with a green tick in theSelect column.


When one or more records of specific Assortment are selected, then In Use is shown to indicate that there are specificassortments used for the search.

Advanced selection optionsFor advanced search and filter options, click on the Advanced button.

The Advanced/Simple button is a toggle button, which toggles accordingly for expanding search and filter selection optionsbetween simple and advanced.

This displays the Advanced search and filter selection options as shown below:


Details of the advanced search and filter options are as follows:

Advanced

Effective date Select a specific range of effective dates to obtain Bills of Material that are effective per the selected range of dates. By default,the All checkbox is selected which displays Bill of Material reports for all effective dates.

Expiry date Select a specific range of Expiry dates to obtain Bills of Material that are expiring during the selected range of dates. By default,the All checkbox is selected which displays Bill of Material report of all expiry dates.

Warehouse Select specific warehouses to obtain Bills of Material that belong to the selected warehouses.

Clicking on the Warehouse button displays the Warehouses selection screen as shown below:

Select the warehouse record and click on the Select button.The selected warehouse record is shown with a green tick inthe Select column.

To unselect all selections, click on the Deselect aall button. Toclose the warehouses selection screen click on the Closebutton.

CHAPTER 7


Display

Type Select the following Types to show the selected item types in the Bill of Material report being displayed. • Standard

This is an Item type that states that the item is a standard item that represents physical goods or service. Standard itemscan be purchased, sold or used for service depending on their defined attributes.

• Labor hourThis is an item of the hour item which is performed by employees (resources). An example of labor hour is "Consultationhours".

• Machine hourAn item of the Machine Hour type represents a unit of time for a production tool with an asset and a cost price attached.

• Phantom An item of the Phantom type is used for registering a logical group of Items, activities or costs. A number of PhantomItems are predefined. They are related to Payment Conditions and Shipping Methods


Maximum number of LevelsSelect the Maximum Level Number to show components of the Bill of Material in the selected number of Levels.

PrecisionEnter the precision for number of decimal points to be shown for the Quantity field to be displayed in the Bill of Material report.


After making the required selections, click on Excel button.

This displays the Bill of Material report as shown below:

The obtained Bill of Material report in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet can be printed out for reference purposes.

CHAPTER 7


1.6 Where Used

Triggering the above menu path displays the Search screen as shown below:

Overview This provides a Where Used Report which provides information on where part items are used in the End Make Item(Main Item).

Menu path [Manufacturing, RReports, WWhere uused]

Used by Production Designer, Sales Manager, Purchase Manager, Production Manager.


Details of the search options are as follows:

General

Item code Select a specific range of Item codes to obtain the Where used information of the selected items. By default, the All checkboxis selected which displays the Where used information for all items.

Item StatusSelect the following Item Status to obtain the Where used information of items of the selected Statuses. By default, "none" isselected which displays the Where used information for all items regardless of Item Status.

Show

One sales unitSelect this to show only one sales unit in the Where used report to be displayed.

Batch quantitySelect this to show Batch quantities of Items in the Where used report to be displayed.

CHAPTER 7


For advanced search and filter options, click on the Advanced button.

The Advanced/Simple button is a toggle button, which can be clicked for toggling between simple search options and advancedsearch options.

This displays the advanced search and filter options:


Details of the advanced filter options are as follows:

Advanced

Item group Select a specific range of Item groups to obtain Where used information of items that are of the selected Item group. By default,the All checkbox is selected which displays the Where used information of items that are of all item groups.

AssortmentsSelect a specific record of assortments to obtain the Where used information for items that are of a selected Item Assortment.


Select the Assortment record and click on the Select button. The selected assortment record is shown with a green tick in theSelect column.


CHAPTER 7


Level

1 levelSelect this to obtain the Where used information at 1 level.

Deepest levelSelect this to obtain the Where used information at the deepest level.

Main versionCheck this to obtain the Where used information only for Main version.

Effective date Select a specific range of effective dates to obtain the Where used information for items that are effective during the selecteddate range. By default, the All checkbox is selected which displays the Where used information for all items regardless ofeffective date.

Expiry dateSelect a specific range of expiry dates to obtain the Where used information for items that are expiring per the selected daterange. By default, the All checkbox is selected which displays the Where used information for all items regardless of expiry date.

Show allSelect this to obtain the Where used information by showing all details.

Display

PrecisionEnter the precision for number of decimal places to be shown in the Quantity field in the Where used information beingdisplayed.


After making the required selections, click on the Excel button.

This displays the Where used information in the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet shown below:

The obtained report can be printed out into hardcopy for reference purposes.

CHAPTER 7


1.7 Production capability

By triggering the above menu of Production ccapability report functionality, the filter and search screen is displayed as shown below:

The above shown are the filter options for the user to make selections for obtaining the intended overview results.

Overview This report provides information about the production capability for producing a specific finished good by checking thefree stock available in the time period.

Menu path [Manufacturing, RReports, PProduction ccapability]



Filter

Make itemSelect a range of active make items which obtain materials set in Bill of Material (BOM). By default, the All checkbox is selectedand displays all materials

Make/buy• Make

This is to select items which have the make attribute checked in maintain item and is used to create a production order.

• BuyThis is to select items which have the buy attribute checked in maintain item and is used to create purchase order.

• AllThis is to select the option for both make and buy items

WarehousesThis allows selection of specific warehouses of make item to obtain an overview of the gross requirement belonging to theselected warehouses. Tick on the check box All to display items in all warehouses.

End dateSelect an end date of the make item availability. If the option "Include: Quantity on order" is selected, the end date selectionwill be important as the system will search for the free purchase order which can deliver before this date for the free stockcalculation.

CHAPTER 7


Part warehouse This allows selection of specific warehouses to obtain an overview of production capability belonging to the selectedwarehouses for BOM line items.




When one ore more warehouses are selected, then it is shown that the warehouses selection is in use, as shown below:


Explode: Maximum number of levelsSelects the number of BOM level the system going to perform calculations of the production capability.

Include: WasteThis is to filter the BOM line items with conditions: • Enabling this option requirement will include waste for the BOM line item.• Disabling this option requirement will exclude waste for the BOM line item.

Show only: Production capability > 0This is to filter make item production capability: • Enable this option report to show records with production capability>0 only.• Disable this option report to show all the records even production capability=0.

Include: Quantity on orderThis is to filter by free purchase order availability: • Enabling this option system will check the end date from the selection and search through the free purchase order

available in the system to calculate the free stock accordingly.• Disabling this option system will not check the free purchase order available in the system.

Notes• Free production order will not be taken into consideration when selecting option Include: Quantity on order. This applies

to free purchase order only. • Free stock in this report does include all the warehouses free stock. • Labor hour and machine hour will not take the calculation into consideration. • If there is not a warehouse specific in the BOM structure then the system will take the BOM item main warehouse.

CHAPTER 7


Obtaining production capability overview




WarehouseThis displays warehouse information from the selection made and it is not editable.

End dateThis displays end date information from the selection made and it is not editable.

Make itemThis is a make item code.

DescriptionThis is make item description

Production capabilityThis displays the realistic capability to produce the make item. The system will take the smallest capability value from the BOMline item. The production capability will calculate according to the total materials availability for all the BOM line items for themake item.

Version This displays the make item BOM version. All the BOM versions for the make item will be shown in this report.

Main versionThis indicates a make item BOM main version

Warehouse This displays the make item BOM warehouse.

Item This is a BOM line item code.

Description This is a BOM line item description.

Make This indicates a BOM line items make attribute.

CHAPTER 7


BuyThis indicates a BOM line item buy attribute .

Part warehouse This is a BOM line item warehouse.

Free stockBOM line item free stock: • "Include: Quantity on order" option enabled: the system will include the free PO quantity.• "Include: Quantity on order" option disabled: the system will exclude the free PO quantity.

Required This displays the required quantity per make item.

UnitThis displays a BOM line item sales unit.

CapabilityThis is a calculated result obtained from free stock divided by required quantity per make item.


Some actions can be performed using the functional buttons after obtaining the overview results.


Excel This allows the exporting the overview results to MS-Excel spreadsheet.

PurchaseThis button enables generating Purchase order based on obtained production capability. For information on Purchaseorder entry obtain Logistics Product Manual.

ProduceThis button enables generating production order based on the obtained production capability. For information onProduction order entry see sub Section 4.0

Close This allows closing and exiting the Overview selection screen.



Upon obtaining the overview results for production capability, the Excel functional button can be used to export the overviewresults to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

Clicking on the Excel button, system exports the overview results to the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, as shown below:

CHAPTER 7


1.8 Gross requirements

By triggering the above menu of Gross rrequirements report functionality, the filter and search screen is displayed as shown below:

The above shown are the filter options for the user to make selections for obtaining the intended overview results.

Overview This report provides information about the gross requirements of materials needed for processing in a time periodgiven.

Menu path [Manufacturing, RReports, GGross rrequirements]



Filter

Make itemSelect a range of make items which obtain materials set in Bill of Material (BOM). By default, the All checkbox is selected anddisplays all materials.

Make/buy• Make

This is to select items which have the make attribute checked in maintain item and is used to create production order.

• BuyThis is to select items which have the buy attribute checked in maintain item and is used to create purchase order.

• AllThis is to select the option for both make and buy items

WarehousesThis allows selecting specific warehouses of make items to obtain the overview of gross requirements belonging to the selectedwarehouses. Tick on the check box All to display items in all warehouses.

End dateSelect an end date of the make item availability. If there is option "Include: Quantity on order" selected, the end date selectionwill be important as system will search for the free purchase order which can deliver before this date for the free stockcalculation.

Quantity requiredEnter the number of quantity of the make item where system will calculate the materials gross requirements.

CHAPTER 7


Part warehouse This allows selecting specific warehouses to obtain the overview of gross requirements belonging to the selected warehousesfor BOM line items.




When one ore more warehouses are selected, it shows that the warehouses selection is in use, as shown below:


Explode: Maximum number of levelsSelect the number of BOM level the system is going to perform calculation of the materials gross requirements.

Include: WasteThis is to filter the BOM items with conditions: • Enabling this option requirement will include waste for the BOM item.• Disabling this option requirement will exclude waste for the BOM item.

Show only: ShortageThis is to filter by material gross requirements shortage: • Enable this option report to show the record with materials shortage only.• Disable this option report to show all the records even there is no materials shortage.

Include: Quantity on orderThis is to filter by free purchase order available: • Enable this option, and the system will check the end date from the selection and search through the free purchase order

availability in the system to calculate the free stock accordingly.• Disable this option, and the system will not check the free purchase order availability in the system.

Notes• Free production order will not be taken into consideration when selecting option "Include: Quantity on order". This

applies to free purchase orders only. • Labor hours and machine hours will not be taken into consideration in the calculation. • If there is not warehouse specified in the BOM structure then the system will use the BOM item main warehouse.

CHAPTER 7





WarehouseThis displays warehouse information from the selection made and it is not editable.

End dateThis displays end date information from the selection made and it is not editable.

Quantity requiredThis displays the quantity required information from the selection made and it is not editable.

Make itemThis is a make item code.

DescriptionThis is a make item description.

Version This displays the make item BOM version; all the BOM versions for the make item will be shown in this report.

Main versionThis indicates the make item BOM main version

Warehouse This displays the make item BOM warehouse.

Item This is BOM line item code.

Description This is BOM line item description.

Make This is the BOM line item make attribute indicator.

CHAPTER 7


BuyThis is the BOM line item buy attribute indicator.

Part warehouse This is the BOM line item warehouse.

Required These displays the total quantity required based on the input from the selection.

Free stockThis displays the BOM line item stocks kept in the warehouse which are no yet allocated or reserved for other usage. The systemmay also count free stock per the requirement if: • "Include: Quantity on order" option is enabled, the system will include the free PO quantity• "include: Quantity on order" option is disabled, the system will exclude the free PO quantity

ShortageThis displays the shortage with by calculating Required quantity minus free stock.

UnitThis displays BOM line item sales unit.


Some actions can be done using the functional buttons after obtaining the overview results.


Excel This allows exporting the overview results to an MS-Excel spreadsheet.

PurchaseThis enables generating Purchase order based on obtained Gross requirements. For information on Purchase order entryobtain the Logistics Product Manual.

ProduceThis button functionality allows generating Production order based on obtained Gross Requirements. For information onProduction order entry see sub Section 4.0.

Close This allows closing and exiting the Overview selection screen.



Upon obtaining the overview results for gross requirements, the Excel functional button can be used to export the overviewresults to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

Clicking on the Excel button, prompts the system to export the overview results to the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet,as shown below:

CHAPTER 7


1.9 Exception codes

Even when MRP is introduced, it doesn't help the planner simplify decision making in order to expedite the purchase and/ormanufacture of goods and ensure that the most efficient utilization of capacity in the organization is achieved.

For this reason, exception codes are introduced in MRP to assist the planner. Whenever the MRP engine is run, the exceptioncodes will compare the run result with the requirements' quantity to identify which category the requirement falls into. In thisway, the planner can prioritize the requirements or make necessary decisions on the requirements. The intrinsic value of havingthese codes within the MRP engine run is to allow the user to work from one central application within which filters can beapplied to the mass of data allowing for more efficient planning.

The Exception code functionality is executed based on the MRP engine run. The exception report will compare the plannedquantity with the ordered quantity. This will take into consideration the minimum PO level stock defined and free stock availableregardless of the purchase order level option during MRP engine run.

Overview This provides lists of exception codes to simply decision making from requirements, to the production planning andproduction floor.

Menu path [Manufacturing, RReports, EException ccodes]

Used by Production Floor Manager, Production Planning Manager, Production Manager


Triggering the above menu path displays the Search screen shown below:

CHAPTER 7


WarehousesSelect a specific warehouse to obtain exception codes for production orders belonging to the selected warehouse.

Clicking on the Warehouses button displays the Warehouses selection screen:

Select the warehouse record and click on the Select button. The selected warehouse record is shown with a green tick in theSelect column.

To unselect all selections, click on the Deselect aall button. To close the warehouse selection screen, click on the Close button.


AssortmentsSelect specific assortments to obtain exception codes for production orders items that are of the selected Item assortments.

Clicking on the Assortment button displays the following Assortment selection screen:

Select the Assortment record and click on the Select button. The selected assortment record is shown with a green tick in theselect column.

To unselect all selections, click on the Deselect all button. To close the Assortment selection screen, click on the Close button.

ItemSelect a specific range of Items to obtain exception codes for production orders that are quoted with the selected items. Bydefault, the All checkbox is selected which displays exception codes for all production orders regardless of item.

Start dateSelect a specific range of Start dates to obtain exception codes for production orders that have the selected range of start dates.By default, the All checkbox is selected which displays the exception codes for all production orders regardless of Start date.

CHAPTER 7


Planner Select a specific Planner's Resource ID to obtain exception codes for production orders planned/entered by the selectedPlanner. By default, the All checkbox is selected which displays exception codes for all production orders regardless of planner.

Make/Buy• Make

Select this to obtain exception codes for production order containing only Make Items.

• BuySelect this to obtain exception codes for production orders containing only Buy Items.

• AllSelect this to obtain exception codes for production orders containing both Make and Buy Items.

Stock controlled• Order controlled

Select this to obtain exception codes for production orders containing only Order controlled items.

• Stock controlled Select this to obtain exception codes for production orders containing only Stock controlled items.

• AllSelect this to obtain exception codes for production orders containing both Order controlled and Stock controlled items.


After making the necessary selections, click on the Excel button.

This displays the exception code listing for production orders in the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet shown below:

CHAPTER 7


The list of MRP exception codes are described below:

Case Scenario examples for each Exception codes are described in the following:

• Code - AA, if required date is earlier than the current date. Example, a sales order (SO) fulfillment date is 18/01/2005 forItem A. In order to produce Item A, it requires 2 days. Therefore the required date is 16/01/2005 which is earlier thancurrent date (17/01/2005). Then this requirement is classified as too late.

• Code - BB, Formula used: (required quantity - free stock + minimum PO level) > planned quantity. This will end up withreplenishment being insufficient.

• Code - CC, opposite as code B, formula used: (required quantity - free stock + minimum PO level < planned quantity)

Code Description

A A requirement was encountered that is before due date. A - Too Late

B The planned replenishments do not meet the requirement. B - Too Few

C The planned replenishments exceed the requirements. C - Too Many

D The planned replenishments exceed the maximum order quantity for an item. Not support

E Replenishment generated that fills items that are to be purchased. E - Purchased

F Replenishment generated that fills items to be manufactured. F - Make

G Replenishment for an item that is generated is planned too soon. G - Too Soon

HPhantom item - No computer planned order (Production order / purchase order) is generated, butdemand (sales order) is reflected.

H - Phantom

IReplenishment for forced demand - The demand is directly (dependant) linked to a Sales Order(Make to Order Environment).

I - Back to back order

J Replenishment where a substitute item exists that may meet the demand. Not support

K Replenishment for items those are either blocked or discontinued. K - Discontinued items

L Replenishment for an item that is derived from an order customer who is blocked.L - Invoiced debtorblocked

M Replenishment for an item that is derived from an order where customer's credit limit exceeded.M - Credit lineexceeded


• Code - DD, since Globe 2003 doesn't support maximum order quantity, this exception code will be ignored.

• Code - EE, a list of items that need to be purchased.

• Code - FF, a list of items that required to be made.

• Code - GG, if the required date minus the production completion date or purchase order delivery date is greater than oneday. Example, a sales order fulfillment date is 20/01/2005, whereas a production order can be completed by18/01/2005. Therefore this requirement is too soon.

• Code - HH, a list of items that are phantom. This is the Sub-assembly item with Phantom Condition.

• Code - II, for all those sales order have a purchase order linked. This is Back-to-back order.

• Code - JJ, since Globe 2003 doesn't support substitute item, this exception code will also be ignored.

• Code - KK, an item where its status is not active. Basically the items have expired.

• Code - LL, this is to check against whether a debtor's status is blocked based on the debtors master.

• Code - MM, An order where its debtor has exceeded his/her credit limit.

CHAPTER 7


The result will be displayed in an Excel file where the user can save the file and perform further analysis depending upon therequirements.


Below examples illustrate each exception codes:

Setup Data

Add nnew iitems • Item A, Item B which are part items. Attributes = purchase, assign a supplier to this item, Planner = current user.• Phantom A, attributes = make, BOM = 1 batch quantity, Phantom A requires 2 units of Item A, Planner =

current user.• Make A, attributes = sales, make, BOM = 1 batch quantity, Make A requires 3 units of Phantom A, Planner =

current user, Sales price = 30.• Make B, attributes = sales, purchase, assign a supplier to this item, make, BOM = 1 batch quantity, Make B

requires 1 unit of Item A and 2 units of Item B, Effective date = 01/03/05, Planner = current user

Add nnew SSO • SO 1, Customer = A, Make A, SO date = current, fulfillment date = current, qty = 5• SO 2, Customer = B, Make B, SO date = current, fulfillment date = current, qty = 10

Exception code: Purchased, Make

MRP EEngine • /MNE [Manufacturing/Planning/MRP Engine], Item = All, Stock Controlled = All, Sales = All, Sales Orders = All, Make/Buy = Make. Click 'Process'.

Exception ccodes • /MAX [Manufacturing/Reports/Exception codes], Item = All, Start Date = All, Planner = Current User, Make/Buy = All, Stock Controlled = All. Click 'Excel'.

• Excel report spool out.• Item AA

- Purchase advice, Planned = 30, Required = 30, Source = SO1, Purhcased is shown.- Purchase advice, Planned = 10, Required = 10, Source = SO2, Purhcased is shown.

• Item BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 20, Required = 20, Source = SO2, Purhcased is shown.• Make AA

- Production advice, Planned = 5, Required = 5, Source = SO1, Make is shown.• Make BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 10, Required = 10, Source = SO1, Make is shown.

CHAPTER 7

Setup Data

Exception code: Too Late, Too Soon

Create SSO • /OBI [Order/Entries/Sales orders], SO3, Customer = B, Make B, SO date = 01/03/05, fulfillment date = 01/03/05, qty = 3

MRP EEngine • /MNE, Item = All, Stock Controlled = All, Sales = All, Sales orders = All, Make/Buy = Make. Click 'Process'.

Exception ccodes • Item AA

- Purchase advice, Planned = 3, Required = 3, Source = SO3, Too late is shown.• Item BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 6, Required = 6, Source = SO3, Too late is shown.• Make BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 3, Required = 3, Source = SO3, Too late is shown.

Change SSO • /OBI, SO2, Make B, fulfillment = a few days later than current date.


- Purchase advice, Planned = 10, Required = 10, Source = SO2, Too soon is shown.• Item BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 20, Required = 20, Source = SO2, Too soon is shown.• Make BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 10, Required = 10, Source = SO2, Too soon is shown.

Exception codes: Too Many, Too Few

Change SSO • /OBI, SO2, Make B, qty = 20


- Purchase advice, Planned = 10, Required = 20, Source = SO2, Too few is shown.• Item BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 20, Required = 40, Source = SO2, Too few is shown.• Make BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 10, Required = 20, Source = SO2, Too few is shown.

Change SSO • /OBI, SO2, Make B, qty = 5


- Purchase advice, Planned = 10, Required = 5, Source = SO2, Too many is shown.• Item BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 20, Required = 10, Source = SO2, Too many is shown.• Make BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 10, Required = 5, Source = SO2, Too many is shown.



Setup Data

Exception codes: Back to Back Order

Create PPO • /OBI, SO3, Authorize SO, Create PO


- Purchase advice, Planned = 10, Required = 20, Source = SO3, Back to back order is shown.• Item BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 20, Required = 40, Source = SO3, Back to back order is shown.• Make BB

- Purchase advice, Planned = 3, Required = 3, Source = SO3, Back to back order is shown.

Exception codes: Back to Back Order

Change iitem • /MIM [Manufacturing/Setup/Items], Make B, status = Blocked/Discontinued/Inactive/Future.

Exception ccodes • B

- Production advice, Planned = 3, Required = 3, Source = SO3, Item discontinued is shown.- Production advice, Planned = 10, Required = 5, Source = SO3, Item discontinued is shown.

Exception ccodes: BBlock CCustomer

Change aaccount • /CCA [CRM/Accounts/Maintain accounts], Customer A = Blocked.

Exception ccodes • Make AA

- Production advice, Planned = 5, Required = 5, Source = SO1, Invoiced debtor blocked is shown.

Exception codes: Credit Line Exceeded

Change aaccount • /CCA, Customer A, credit line = 100, Status = active.• Order setting, credit line risk control = Authorized sales orders.• Run MRP engine again else cannot see the changes made.

Exception ccodes • Make AA

- Production advice, Planned = 5, Required = 5, Source = SO1, Credit line exceeded is shown.

CHAPTER 7


2. Statistics

Triggering the menu path [Manufacturing, Statistics, Rejected] the following Search functionality is displayed as shown below:

Overview

This provides an overview of Rejected Make Items in the Production order. This overview is shown in the case where theproduction order has subassembly make items and all components/parts issued, but the production order received (Actual)quantity is less than the planned production order quantity and the Production order is set to as "Completed" withoutsuggesting return. In this case the make items become rejected make items.

Menu path [Manufacturing, SStatistics, RRejected]

Used by Production Manager, Planning Manager


Details of the search screen are as follows:

General

Warehouse Select a specific warehouse or a range of warehouses to obtain production orders with rejected make items belonging to theselected warehouse. By default, the All checkbox is selected, which displays all rejected production orders.

End date Select a range of end dates to obtain production orders with rejected make items with end date that fall within the selected range ofend dates. By default, the All checkbox is selected, which displays the rejected production orders regardless of end date.

Display

PrecisionEnter precision for the number of decimal points to be shown in the production order quantity column field which is to bedisplayed in the production order overview screen.

CHAPTER 7



For advanced selection options click on the Advanced button, which then displays the following advanced filter options:


Details of Advanced selection options are as follows:

Advanced

Parent projectSelect a specific parent project to obtain production orders with rejected make items that belong to the selected Parent Project.

Production order Select a specific Production order to obtain its record of rejected make items. By default, the All checkbox is selected whichdisplays all rejected production orders.

Start dateSelect a specific range of Start dates to obtain production orders with rejected make items that have the start date that fallswithin the selected start dates. By default, the All checkbox is selected which displays rejected production order regardless ofstart date.

CHAPTER 7


Item

Item groupSelect a specific range of Item groups to obtain production orders with rejected make items that belong to the selected Itemgroup. By default, the All checkbox is selected which displays rejected production orders regardless of Item group.

ItemSelect a specific range of Items to obtain production orders that have the selected range of Make items. By default, the Allcheckbox is selected which displays rejected production orders regardless of Items.

Item StatusSelect the among the following Item statuses to obtain production orders with rejected make items that have the selected Status.


• Blocked Blocked items cannot be used in any logistics planning or financial transactions but can be used in product structurelines, budget lines and stock counts.

• Discontinued Discontinued items cannot be used in purchases but can be used for sales. They can also be used in product structurelines, budget lines and stock counts.

• FutureAn Item with a future status states that the item is to be used in the future, whereby the active date is defined in thefuture.

• Inactive Inactive items cannot be used in logistics planning or financial transactions. They also cannot be used in productstructure lines or budget lines, but can be used in stock counts.


After making selections, click the Display button. This displays the Rejected Production orders overview asshown below:

Display details in the Rejected Production orders overview are as follows:


Description This displays the Production order Description.

Item code This displays the Make Item Code as quoted in the Production order.

DescriptionThis displays the Make Item Description.

CHAPTER 7


End date This displays the Production order End Date.

QuantityThis displays the Make item Rejected Quantity in the Production order.

Costs (EUR) This displays the Costs of the Rejected Make Item in the production order.

Overview Summary

QuantityThis displays the Total Quantity of all rejected production orders in the overview results.

CostsThis displays the Total Costs of all rejected production orders in the overview results.



After obtaining the Rejected Production orders overview, relevant actions can be done. For information refer to the table below:


ExportThis exports the overview results into Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. For information see Section 2.1.1: Exporting Resultsto Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

Project This button enables retrieval of the Project Master Maintenance Card. For information obtain E-Project Product Manual.

ProductionThis button enables retrieval of the relevant Production order. For information on Production order entry see Section 4.0.

Close This allows the user to exit and close the Overview results functionality. For information see Section 9.0: CommonFunctionalities.

CHAPTER 7


2.1.1 Exporting Results to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet

After obtaining the Rejected Production order overview, the overview results can be seen in the MS-Excel spreadsheet using theExport function button.

Click on the Export button, which then exports the overview results to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet as shown below:

Overview This provides overview of production order with waste items. Waste items are defined in the Bill of Material by specifying theWaster Percentage in the Waste column for each component / part item. Production order consisting waste items are thenshown in this overview report. Production orders with rejected make items are also shown in this report.

Menu path [Manufacturing, SStatistics, WWaste]

Used by Production Manager, Planning Manager, Purchasing Manager


2.2 Waste

Triggering the above menu path displays the Search screen as shown below:

CHAPTER 7


Details of the search and filter options are as follows:

Warehouse Select a specific range of Warehouses to obtain the production order waste that belongs to the selected warehouse. By default,the All checkbox is selected which displays production orders regardless of warehouse.

Parent projectSelect a specific Parent project to obtain the production order waste that is linked to the selected Parent project.

Production order Select specific Production order number to obtain its record of production order waste.

Show Select among the following production order Status to obtain production orders with the selected statuses.• Open

This is the Open status of a production order after it has been entered.

• AuthorizedThis is the Authorized status of a production order after it has been authorized.

• Rejected This is the Rejected status of a production order which has been rejected.

• Released This is the Release status of a production order which has been released.

• Printed This is the Printed status of a production order which has been printed for production order instructions.

• CompletedThis is the Completed status of a production order which has been completed.


Display

PrecisionEnter the precision for number of decimal points to be shown in the production order quantity column field for the productionorder to be displayed in the overview.

Advanced Filter optionsFor advanced search & filter options, click on the Advanced button. This displays the advanced filter optionsshown below:

CHAPTER 7


Details of the advanced filter options are as follows:

Start date Select a specific range of Start dates to obtain production orders with waste items that have a start date which falls within theselected range of start dates. By default, the All checkbox is selected which displays production orders regardless of start date.

Item

Item group Select a specific range of Item groups to obtain production orders with waste items that are of the selected Item group. Bydefault, the All checkbox is selected which displays production orders regardless of Item group.

Item Select a specific range of Items to obtain production orders with the selected item for waste. By default, the All checkbox isselected which displays production orders regardless of Item.

Item StatusSelect the among the following Item Statuses to obtain production orders with waste items which are of the selected Status:• Active

Active items can be sold, purchased, delivered, received, and manufactured/assembled.

• Blocked Blocked items cannot be used in any logistics planning or financial transactions but can be used in product structurelines, budget lines and stock counts.

• Discontinued Discontinued items cannot be used in purchases but can be used for sales. They can be used in product structure lines,budget lines and stock counts.

• FutureA future Item status states that the item is to be used in the future, whereby the active date is defined in the future .


• Inactive Inactive items cannot be used in logistics planning or financial transactions. They also cannot be used in productstructure lines or budget lines, but can be used in stock counts.

After making the selections on search and filter, click on the Display button.

This displays the production order waste items overview as shown below:

CHAPTER 7


Details displayed in the overview are as follows:


DescriptionThis displays the Production order Description.

Item This displays the Waste/Rejected Item code of the Production order.

DescriptionThis displays the Waste/Rejected Item description.

Printed This indicates if the production order's waste has been printed for picking instruction. This is indicated with a green tick.

End date This displays the Production order End date.

Planning QuantityThis displays the Planned Production order Quantity for each Waste Item.

Quantity ActualThis displays the Actual Quantity Issued for each Waste Item.

Planning AmountThis displays the Planned Production order Amount for each Waster Item.

Amount ActualThis displays the Actual Amount for each Waste Item.


Overview Summary

Quantity BudgetThis displays the Total Planned Quantity of all displayed Waste Items.

Quantity ActualThis displays the Total Actual Quantity of all displayed Waste Items.

Amount BudgetThis displays the Planned Amount of all displayed Waste Items.

Amount ActualThis displays the Actual Amount of all displayed Waste Items.


After obtaining an overview of production orders waste items, some basic actions such as retrieval of relevant information canbe done using the functional buttons. For information refer to table below:


ExportTThis allows exporting the overview information to MS-Excel spreadsheet. For information see Section 2.2.1: ExportingOverview Results to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

ProjectThis allows the retrieval of the Project Master Card for the respective Production order. For information on Project MasterCard, obtain the E-Project Product Manual.

Our rref.This allows the retrieval of the Financial Transaction Entries for the respective production order. For information seeSection 2.2.2: Obtaining Financial Transaction Entries Overview.

Production This allows the retrieval of the Production order Entry screen. For information on Production order Entry, see Section 5.0

Close This allows the user to exit and close the Overview screen. For information on the Close functionality see Section 9.0Common Functionalities.

CHAPTER 7


2.2.1 Exporting Overview Results to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet

After obtaining the Production order Waste Item Overview, the overview can be seen in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet by exportingthe displayed information using the Export function button.

Click on the Export button, which then exports the displayed overview information to Microsoft Excel spreadsheetas shown below:


2.2.2 Obtaining Financial Transaction Entries Overview

After obtaining an Overview of production orders waste items, the financial transaction entries overview can be obtained foreach waste item in the production order using the Our ref. functional button.

Selecting the waste item record for a production order and clicking on the Our rref. button displays the FinancialTransactions Entries that have occurred for the waste item as shown below:

CHAPTER 7


2.3 Production orders

Triggering the above menu path displays the Search screen shown below:

Overview This provides overview of Production orders in the report form for printing out hard copy.

Menu path [Manufacturing, SStatistics, PProduction oorders]

Used by Production Manager, Production Planning Manager, relevant resources in Managerial level whom are in the Production flow.


Details of the search & filter options are as follows:

General

Warehouse Select a specific range of Warehouses to obtain production orders that belong to the selected warehouse. By default, the Allcheckbox is selected which displays production orders regardless of warehouse.

End date Select a specific range of End dates to obtain production orders that have the selected end dates. By default, the All checkboxis selected which displays production orders regardless of End date.

ShowSelect among the following Production order Statuses to obtain production orders of the selected Statuses.• Open

This is the Open status of a production order that has been entered.

• AuthorizedThis is the Authorized status of a production order that has been authorized.

• Rejected This is the Rejected status of a production order that has been rejected.

• Released This is the Released status of a production order that has been released.

• Printed This is the Printed status of a production order which has been printed for production order instructions.

• CompletedThis is the Completed status of a production order which has been completed.

CHAPTER 7


Display

PrecisionEnter precision for number of decimal points to be shown for the production order quantity in the overview to be displayed.

Advanced Filter SelectionsFor advanced search & filter selection options click on the Advanced button, which the displays the advancedsearch & filter options shown below:


Details of advanced search & filter options are as follows:

Advanced

Parent projectSelect a specific Parent Project to obtain its production order and its child production orders.

Production orderSelect a specific Production order to obtain its production order overview. By default, the All checkbox is selected whichdisplays all production orders.

Start date Select a specific range of Start dates to obtain production orders that have the selected Start date. By default, the All checkboxis selected which displays all production orders regardless of Start date.

Item

Item group Select a specific Item group to obtain production orders that have items belonging to the selected Item group. By default, theAll checkbox is selected which displays all production orders regardless of Item group.

Item Select a specific range of Items to obtain production orders that have the selected Item. By default, the All checkbox is selectedwhich displays all production orders regardless of Item.

CHAPTER 7


Item StatusSelect among the following Item Statuses to obtain production orders that are of the selected status:


• Blocked Blocked items cannot be used in any logistics planning or financial transactions, but can be used in product structurelines, budget lines and stock counts.

• Discontinued Discontinued items cannot be used in purchases but can be used for sales. They can also be used in product structurelines, budget lines and stock counts.

• FutureAn Item with a future status states that the item is to be used in the future, whereby the active date is defined in thefuture.

• Inactive Inactive items cannot be used in logistics planning or financial transactions. They also cannot be used in productstructure lines or budget lines but can be used in stock counts.


After making the required selection on the search and filter options, click on the Display button, which then displays theProduction orders report as shown below:

CHAPTER 7


Upon obtaining the production orders report, this report can be printed out for hardcopy by clicking on the Print icon or thePrint button.

The printing option screen is displayed as shown below:

PrinterThe default printer on which the document is to be printed out is shown here.

Print range

AllSelect this to print all pages.

PagesSelect this to print only specific pages.

From Enter page number to print from

ToEnter page number to print till.

CopiesClick on the scroll up button to increase number of copies or scroll down button to decrease number of copies to be printed out.


CollateCheck this to print out document by collating.

Click on the OK button, to start printing. Otherwise to discontinue printing, click on the Close button

Actions using Functional icons

Various actions can be done upon obtaining the overview report of production order. For information refer to the table below:

To close the obtained production order report screen, click on the Close button

Functional icons Description

Clicking on this bring you to the first page of production order report.

Clicking on this bring you to the previous page of the production order report.

Click on this to move to the next page of the production order report.

Click on this to move to the last page of the production order report.

Click on this to find specific text or number in the production order report.

Click on this for selecting information options to be shown in the production order report.

Click on this to refresh the production order report.

Select the view size percentage from the drop down list. For original view size select 100 %.

This is the Currency Calculator. Click on this to trigger the currency calculation functionality.

Click on this to obtain online help for the displayed crystal report.


CHAPTER 7

FEEDBACK FORM

FEEDBACK FORM 877

1. Contents

a. Breadth: How well has the document covered the desired scope of the subject?

b. Depth: How complete have the different sections covered their topics?

2. Quality

a. Language: How is the overall standard of the language used?

b. Graphics: How is the overall standard of the graphic contents of the document?

c. Presentation: How is the overall standard of the presentation (layouts) of the document?

3. User-friendliness

a. Structure: Is the overall structure or flow used useful for the readers to understand the topics described?

b. Descriptions: Overall, are the topics being described in an easy-to-understand manner?

4. Other comments What features did you like most about this User Manual? What did you like least about it?

Provide any other comments you have relating to the document evaluated.

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Reader's FeedbackProduct Type Exact Globe 2003 Version 360 Item Code SME0107EN

User Manual Type Manufacturing

Exact SSoftware welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this publication. Your input is an important part of the information we use for revision. Please take a few minutes ofyour time to read through the document to be evaluated as thoroughly as you can. Then use your fair judgment to rate the evaluation criteria in the questionnaire basing on the following five-point scores.

1. Excellent - something to shout about2. Professional - has high standard3. Acceptable - has the required standard

Questionnaire score

Reader's Name : Designation:

Company :

Address :

Other comments:

Email: Telephone: Fax:

Thank you for helping us to improve our service.Mail your feedback to the following address or e-mail to [email protected]. You can also fill in an online evaluation form at the customer portal.

Marketing Services, User Manuals FeedbackExact Asia Development Center Sdn Bhd, Level 34, Tower 2, Petronas Twin Towers, Kuala Lumpur City Centre 50088 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Tel: 603-2179 4242 Fax: 603-2179 4255

4. Below aaverage - much room for improvement5. Not aacceptable - definitely needs a rework

www.exactsoftware.com

August 2005

manual eg2003 360 manufacturing

Documents

exact software

manufacturingii exact

copyright exact group

exact customer portal

globe functionality

ofthe exact internet

help documents

software available